HEAT EXCHANGER Manual

HEAT EXCHANGER
OPERATING MANUAL
Open System Models
WO2-2-7500-2P-NF-L-M-R407C
WO2-2-5000-2P-NF-L-M-R407C
[Type text]
Page 1
Table of Contents
Article I. FOR YOUR SAFETY ................................................................................................................ 3

Article II. INSTALLATION AND START-UP ........................................................................................... 4
Article III. CONTROLLER OPERATION............................................................................................... 7
Section 3.01 Introduction: .................................................................................................................. 7
Section 3.02 Initialization of Controller: ......................................................................................... 8
Section 3.03 Starting the System: ..................................................................................................... 8
Section 3.04 Enabling Devices: .......................................................................................................... 8
Section 3.05 Changing the Setpoint:................................................................................................. 9
Section 3.06 Viewing Alarms: ............................................................................................................. 9
Section 3.07 Sequence of Operation: ............................................................................................... 9
Article IV. HEAT EXCHANGER COMPONENTS ................................................................................ 10
Article V. WATER TREATMENT ....................................................................................................... 14
Article VI. MAINTENANCE ................................................................................................................. 15
Section 6.01 Condenser: Cleaning Air Filters and Condenser ..................................................... 15
Section 6.02 Electric Motors............................................................................................................. 15
Section 6.03 Check Water Quality / Test Glycol Mixture ............................................................ 15
Section 6.04 Inspect and Clean Fluid Strainer .............................................................................. 15
Section 6.05 Inspect Fluid System for Leaks Or Loose Connection............................................ 15
Section 6.06 Check All Wiring For Loose Connections, Chaffing Or Damage ........................... 16
Section 6.07 Inspect And Test Refrigeration System For Leaks ................................................. 16
Article VII. HEAT EXCHANGER SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................ 17
Article VIII. TROUBLESHOOTING SERVICE GUIDE ........................................................................... 18
Article IX. SPARE PARTS GUIDE ....................................................................................................... 19
Article X. MSDS……….…………………………….……………………………………………….20
Article XI. MISCELLANEOUS DOCUMENTS……..………….………………………………………29
Article XII. DRAWINGS………...……………………………………………………………………...65
2
Page 2

Article I. FOR YOUR SAFETY
1. Signs and Symbols:
Throughout the operating manual, the information and notices below are identified by
graphical symbols.
DANGER!
Safety note indicating imminent danger. Failure to heed the warning
may result in serious bodily injury and even death.
CAUTION!
Safety note indicating the presence of potential hazard. Failure to
heed the safety notice may result in minor bodily injury or damage to
the equipment.
INFORMATION!
This symbol identifies important information or a useful tip concerning
the application or service of the unit.
2. Safety Notes:
For the installation and operation of the heat exchanger, the following regulations and safety
notes have to be observed.
Any work on the heat exchanger may only be performed by qualified

personnel. All relevant accident prevention regulations have to be
observed.
The eletro-technical connection of the heat exchanger must be

performed according to all relevant national and local standards.
Before attempting to carry out any work on the heat exchanger,

always disconnect the unit from the power supply.
Any national regulations applicable in the country of installation

must be observed.
The fluid must comply with KOOLANT KOOLERS specifications.

Watch for an incompatibilities of materials in the entire fluid
circuit.
3. Handling of refrigerants:
When handing refrigerants it is imperative that the relevant

statutory regulations and guidelines be complied with. Only
adequately skilled personnel may carry out this kind of work.
The proper disposal of refrigerants and parts of the system that are
no longer serviceable lies within the responsibility of the operator
of the facility.
2
Page 3
Article II. INSTALLATION AND START-UP
1) Outdoor Use: The Heat Exchanger is designed to be installed outdoors, but is suitable
for installation indoors provided the space can dissipate the heat rejected from the
Heat Exchanger.
2) Leveling the Unit: Make sure unit is placed, on a flat, level, hard surface. Heat
Exchanger must be level or less than ½ inch of slope per 10 feet with the electrical box
end of the Heat Exchanger at the high point. Use shims to correct level if needed. If a
concrete slab is utilized, a 4 inch depth is adequate; pad should be at least 5 feet x 12
feet. If mounted on roof, two i-beams runners are typically provided to support feet at
both ends. Heat Exchanger should be anchored from the feet mounting holes at the
four corners of the machine. When mounted above office space, optional vibration
mounting springs can be used to mount the Heat Exchanger and a spring mount will be
provided for both ends of each foot.
3) Proper Spacing: The unit should be located where adequate air circulation is provided
with room for servicing. As a general guideline for units with vertical air discharge (fans
located on top), keep the unit at least 5 feet away from walls and allow at least an 8
foot clearance above the unit.1 For units with horizontal air discharge (fans located on
side), keep the side containing the fans a minimum of 15 feet from the wall. The side
containing the filter should be a minimum of 6 feet from the wall. Avoid placing the
Heat Exchanger under or near eves which may reflect the discharge air back into the
air inlet2. Do not place in a poorly ventilated room. The build-up of high ambient
temperatures can cause compressor and or machine damage3
CAUTION: Heat Exchanger must not be installed more than 65 feet above the heat exchangers and cryro
compressor. The Heat Exchanger pumps can deliver up to 165 feet of head and the heat exchangers and
cryro compressor are rated at 230 feet of head max. If the Heat Exchanger is mounted more than 65 feet
above the heat exchangers and cryro compressor, the maximum allowable pressure on the heat
exchangers and cryro compressor may be exceeded. Consult factory for installations requiring the Heat
Exchanger to be installed more than 65 feet above the Heat Exchanger.
4) Connection of Water Piping: The material and nominal widths of the pipes must be
selected according to KOOLANT KOOLERS specifications. See dimensions in Article VII.
Connect the fluid lines to the proper piping marked "F FLUID INLET TO HEAT
EXCHANGER" and "F FLUID OUTLET FROM HEAT EXCHANGER". Make sure that the flow
of fluid to and from the unit can not be shut off or blocked while the Heat Exchanger is
in operation, and the pipe size matches specifications.
5) Length and Distance of Flow: The maximum equivalent linear feet of total piping
which may be installed external to the Heat Exchanger is 500ft. using 2” plumbing.4
This is total piping which includes the feed and return to the heat exchangers and cryro
compressor. The Heat Exchanger can pump fluid vertically up to 75 feet (usually 6
stories).
1
Do not place in a mezzanine, near a ceiling or in an enclosed room without consulting factory.
2
Note: Placing Heat Exchanger under or near eves that can result in ice damage or damage to
the eve as a result of hot air discharge.
3
If there is a concern about adequate ventilation for the Heat Exchanger please consult the
factory.
4
NOTE: If the equivalent piping exceeds 500’ please contact the factory for assistance. 1-
800-968-5665
2
Page 4
Standard Fitting Losses in Equivalent Feet of Pipe
2inch piping with one, 90º Standard Elbow: 05.0ft. loss
2inch piping with one, 90º Street Elbow: 08.2ft. loss
2inch piping with one, 45º Standard Elbow: 02.6ft. loss
2inch piping with one, 45º Street Elbow: 04.5ft. loss
2inch piping with one, Globe Valve: 55.0ft. loss
2inch piping with one, Gate Valve: 02.3ft. loss
2inch piping with one, Angle Valve: 24.0ft. loss
6) Voltage and Power: Check building power to ensure it matches the Heat Exchanger
rated voltage and current. Voltage and circuit ampacity of the unit can be found on the
data tag which is located on the front of the electrical panel or the electrical drawings.
Connect power leads to main disconnect5.
7) Remote Display: If a remote display (Figure 1) is provided with the unit, install the
provided 150 foot communications cable between the Heat Exchanger electrical panel
and the remote display location. For distances in excess of 150 feet, an optional Long
Distance Remote Display kit is required6. See Initialization of Controller: section for
remote display plug connection point on master controller.
Figure 1
Remote display and communication cable
CAUTION: Heat Exchangers installed with a crankcase heater require the electrical panel
disconnect to be in the “ON” position for a minimum of 8 hours before start-up of unit.
Leaving the Disconnect in the “ON” position maintains power to the compressor crankcase
heater, preventing refrigerant migration and possible damage to system. Power can be off
for 30 minutes for service without observing the 8 hour pre-heat requirement.
8) Units are shipped with refrigeration service valves in the open (back-seated) position
and do not require any adjustments. Service valves should only be adjusted by a
certified technician.
9) Fill Unit: Fill the reservoir through the fill/sight glass. You will know it is properly
filled when water level remains between the two black level markers located on the
sight glass.
CAUTION: Do not allow the fluid pumps to run dry. This will damage the pump seals and
will not be covered under warranty.
5
Wiring should match Heat Exchanger disconnect size and power requirements in accordance
with local codes.
6
Contact the parts department if the distance to remote location exceeds 150ft.
2
Page 5
10) Turn On Unit: Once Heat Exchanger reservoir has been filled, proceed to turn the main
power disconnect on located on the electrical box door. Defeat the disconnect handle
to open the electrical box door. Phase monitor light must be green and master
controller alarms should be clear. Turn the system on. See the CONTROLLER
OPERATION for more information on operation of the master controller.
Caution: Electrical Shock Hazard – Use appropriate personal protective equipment rated
for exposure to 460 volts when within 3 feet of open electrical enclosure.
11) If pump motors do not start, check incoming power for correct sequence. If incoming
power is present, check any faults on the master controller. Reset any faults which
may be present.
12) Proceed to run Heat Exchanger pump for five minutes or more to allow any air in the
system to be vented. Check fluid level after air is purged from the piping. Fill
reservoir as needed.
13) Check controller for fault messages. Clear faults that may have occurred during start-
up procedure. If faults do not re-occur, the system is ready for continuous duty.
2
Page 6
Article III. CONTROLLER OPERATION
Section 3.01 Introduction:
On the Heat Exchanger unit there are multiple controllers as shown in Figure 2. These
controllers communicate to a remote display called a PGD display which is shown in Figure 3.
The Heat Exchanger status, settings and alarms can all be viewed and reset through the PGD
display.
Figure 2
Figure 3
2
Page 7
Section 3.02 Initialization of Controller:
When the unit is first powered up after a download it goes through a self-
test and requires a reboot after initialization. Cycle power to the
controller if the message in Figure 4 is displayed.
Figure 4
When the controller has finished its initial self test, the main page will be
displayed. This displays the current time, date, unit #, fluid temperature,
setpoint and system status. The page will look similar to Figure 5.
Figure 5
Section 3.03 Starting the System:
The system status displays the current status of the on/off switch.
Turn the system on: Press the “Prg” key and the main menu will be displayed over three
screens. Highlight the menu labeled “A. ON/OFF Unit” and press the “Enter” key.
.
The next page will look similar to Figure 6. Press the “Enter” key again,
to move the cursor over the “SWITCH OFF”. Press the up arrow key to
change the status to “SWITCH ON”
Figure 6
Section 3.04 Enabling Devices:
The pump and compressors can be individually enabled using the

Enable/Disable function. To enable/disable devices press the “Prg” key
to view the main menu. Highlight the menu labeled “G. SERVICE” and
press the “Enter” key. Use the arrow keys to highlight the menu labeled
“C. ENABLE/DISABLE” and press the “Enter” key again. The first page
Figure 7
should display the Process Pumps similar to Figure 7. The three options
for process pumps are:
Auto = Selects pump based on time and switches on flow alarm (if enabled) & overload alarm
#1 = Selects only pump #1 to run
#2 = Selects only pump #2 to run
Once the Process Pumps have been selected, press the “↓” arrow key to change the page to
Circuit #1. To enable the compressor(s), use the “Enter” key and the arrow keys to change the
status from “No” to “Yes”. Complete for any additional circuits on the unit. The number of
compressors and circuits will depend on the design of the unit.
2
Page 8
Section 3.05 Changing the Setpoint:
To turn the system on press the “Prg” key and the main menu will be
displayed. Highlight the menu labeled “B. SETPOINT” and press the
“Enter” key. The page will look similar to Figure 8. Press the “Enter”
key again, to move the cursor over the fluid setpoint temperature. Use
the arrow keys to change the temperature and press the “Enter” key to
accept. Press the “Esc” key to return back to the main menu. Figure 8
Section 3.06 Viewing Alarms:
When an alarm occurs the red alarm light on the PGD display will light up
(a buzzer will activate if not disabled). To view this alarm, press the
“Alarm” key and the alarms will be displayed. To view all active alarms,
use the arrow keys to scroll up and down. To clear all inactive alarms,
press and hold the “Alarm” key. At the end of the alarms a page similar
to Figure 9 will be displayed. Press the “Enter” key and you will be
taken to the Alarm Log page where you can view the alarm history. Figure 9
Section 3.07 Sequence of Operation:
Upon system start, with all compressors and pumps enabled a brief delay will occur and then
the pump that didn’t run during the last occurrence will start first. If flow is approved on
either heat exchanger, the pump will continue to run. If no flow is established after a flow
fault delay time, the opposing pump will automatically start. Pumps will rotate once every 24
hours to balance run time.
Once flow is established and cooling demand increases to 25%, the compressor that hasn’t run
in the longest period of time will start. As cooling demand increases to 50%, the compressor in
the alternate compressor set that hasn’t run in the longest period of time will start. At a
cooling demand of 75% and 100% the remaining compressors will stage up. When cooling
demand decreases by 25% from a compressor start percentage, a compressor will cycle off,
compressors drop out in a ‘first in-first out’ sequence. The cooling demand signal is
proportional and integral driven so the cycling of compressors should slowly correct to be
centered about set point.
2
Page 9
Article IV. HEAT EXCHANGER COMPONENTS
CLEANABLE
AIR FILTERS
LIFT UP
AND PULL
OUT
SIGHT
GLASS
FLUID
DRAIN RETURN
VALVE INTO HEAT
EXCHANGER
FLUID
RETURN
INTO HEAT
EXCHANGER
Heat Exchanger Main Parts
Heat Exchanger Overview 1
2
Page 10
Compressor Set 1
Compressor Set 2
2
Page 11
Pumps 1
Tanks Access 1
2
Page 12
Electrical Panel 1
2
Page 13
Article V. WATER TREATMENT
Dimplex Thermal Solutions recommends that an inhibited ethylene glycol or inhibited

propylene glycol solution be used in its Heat Exchangers. Inhibited glycol solutions will prevent
rust in ferrous material systems and it will keep algae and bacteria from growing inside the
system. Use 40-50% glycol for freeze protection. If low toxicity glycol is desired or required,
use an inhibited propylene glycol7.
CAUTION: Do not mix brand names or types of glycol as this may result in the inhibitors
precipitating out of solution. Do not use automotive antifreeze in the Heat Exchanger unit as it can
cause extensive damage to the cooling system. The use of automotive anti-freeze can affect the
heat transfer of the system, fluid flow, and attack the pump seals.
CAUTION: Galvanized piping is not recommended because the zinc will react with the inhibitor in
the fluids, causing precipitate formation, depletion of the inhibitor package, and removal of the
protective zinc coating, particularly above 100ºF. Precipitation can also lead to localized
corrosion.
Dimplex Thermal Solutions offers its own brands of inhibited ethylene glycol called “K-Kool E”
and inhibited propylene glycol “K-Kool P” as a service to its customers. Call 1-800-968-5665
(1-800-YOU-KOOL) and ask for the parts department for more information.
If you have any other questions regarding the use of glycol or other water treatment issues for
your Dimplex Thermal Solutions Heat Exchanger, please contact the factory at 1-800-968-5665
and ask for the service department.
7
Always refer to the original equipment manufacturers water quality treatment
requirements to which the Heat Exchanger is connected before treating water.
2
Page 14
Article VI. MAINTENANCE
The following maintenance procedures should be completed every 4 – 6 months:
Section 6.01 Condenser: Cleaning Air Filters and Condenser

In order for the refrigeration system to perform to its rated capacity, it is very important to keep the
condensing temperature from getting too hot. This usually happens when the condenser is not kept
properly cleaned. The air cooled condensers are supplied with cleanable aluminum air filters, and it is
very important that they be cleaned as necessary to maintain good airflow. Failing to do so will result
in poor unit performance and possible compressor damage.
To clean the filters use a brush, compressed air or wash out with water. To clean the condenser coil
using compressed air, pressure must not exceed 30 psi. Blow air in the opposite direction of the air
flow when Heat Exchanger is in operation.
Section 6.02 Electric Motors

Maintenance for electric motors is required only when these motors are furnished with
grease fittings so they can be greased. If this is the situation, we recommend greasing every
6 months.
Section 6.03 Check Water Quality / Test Glycol Mixture

System fluid should be clean and free of contaminants. Check the inlet and outlet pressure on the
unit for normal pressures. These can be found under the “H HEAT EXCHANGER SPECIFICATIONS”
section. Test the glycol concentration level to ensure levels are within the rated conditions. Refill
tank as needed with pre-mixed glycol to maintain proper concentration.
Section 6.04 Inspect and Clean Fluid Strainer

Fluid Strainers protect the brazed plate heat exchangers from becoming clogged. Inspect and clean
strainers after first hour of operation, after first week of operation, and annually thereafter.
Section 6.05 Inspect Fluid System for Leaks or Loose Connection

Visually check fluid connections for any potential leaks in the system. Ensure there are no plumbing
parts that show any significant wear including chaffing or cracking.
2
Page 15
Section 6.06 Check All Wiring for Loose Connections, Chaffing or Damage
Turn off the main disconnect. Check all wiring inside of electrical panel and inside the Heat
Exchanger unit for loose or damaged wires. Tighten any loose terminals and replace any damaged
wires.
WO2-2-5000-2P-NF-L-M-R407C WO2-2-7500-2P-NF-L-M-R407C
460 volt 460 volt
Pump/fan contactor power term. 22 lb-in 22 lb-in

Pump contactor overload term. 12 lb -in 12 lb -in
Pump/fan contactor control term. 8.9 to 13 lb-in 8.9 to 13 lb-in
Pump overload power terminals 22 lb-in 22 lb-in
Pump overload control term. 5 lb-in 5 lb-in
Compressor contactor 13.3 to 22 lb-in 13.3 to 22 lb -in
Compressor contactor control 8.9 to 13 lb-in 8.9 to 13 lb-in
Fused terminal 25 lb-in 25 lb-in
Disconnect lug anchor 150 lb-in 150 lb-in
Disconnect lug screw 150 lb-in 150 lb-in
Disconnect shaft set screw 12 lb-in 12 lb-in
Disconnect terminal shield screw 9 lb-in 9 lb-in
Fuse block terminal 35 lb-in 35 lb-in
Transformer Allen Bradley 10 lb-in 10 lb-in
Power Distribution Block 120 lb-in 120 lb-in
Section 6.07 Inspect and Test Refrigeration System for Leaks

Inspect the inside of the Heat Exchanger unit for any visual evidence of a refrigerant leak. Spots of oil
on the inside of the unit or on the refrigeration lines may signify a potential leak. Have a certified
refrigeration technician inspect the unit for proper operation.
Maintenance as you can see is minimal, but should you have a problem or situation not
described above, please call our service department for assistance at (269) 349-6800.
2
Page 16
Article VII. HEAT EXCHANGER SPECIFICATIONS
Model Number: WO2-2-5000 WO2-2-7500

Capacity 14 Tons 20 Tons
@ 50ºF Fluid 167,300 BTU/hr 240,000 BTU/hr
@ 122ºF Ambient 49kW 70 KW
Dimensions
Height: 85” 85”
Width: 44” 44”
Depth: 138” 138”
Mechanical
Compressor: 5 hp x 4 7.5 hp x 4
Pump: 3 hp x 2 3 hp x 2
Fan: ½ hp x 4 ½ hp x 8
Inlet: 2’ NPTF 2” MPT
Outlet: 2” NPTF 2” MPT
Reservoir: 100 gallons 100 gallons
Weight: 3200 lbs – dry 3500 lbs – dry
4000lbs - operation 4300 lbs – operation
Electrical
Voltage: 460V( +/-10%)/3/60Hz (+/-2Hz) 460V (+/-10%)/3/60Hz (+/-2Hz)
Voltage Imbalance +/- 2 % max +/- 2 % max
Disconnect Fuse: 80A 100A
FLA: 67A 91A
Compressor FLA: 11.8A 17.3A
Compressor LRA: 68A 114A
Pump FLA: 6.3A 6.3A
Fan FLA: 1.2A 1.2A
Max. Overcurrent Protect. 80A 110A
Min. Circuit Ampacity 70A 95A
Listings NRTL LISTED TO UL1995(Standard) NRTL LISTED TO UL1995(Standard)
CUL 1995 (Canadian Sites) CUL 1995 (Canadian Sites)
Nominal flow required is 35 gpm @ 70 psi pump Available Pressure for Piping and Heat exchangers (psid)
outlet, flow setter valve on fluid outlet pipe 80
will automatically drop pressure to reduce flow 70
to 35 gpm. Bypass relief valve is adjusted to 60

Pressure (psid)
maintain 70 to 80 psi maximum pressure to 50
prevent pump damage due to deadheading. 40
Bypass relief valve should only be adjusted to a 30
higher pressure if the MRI is located above the 20
Heat Exchanger. Increase valve setting by the 10
head above the Heat Exchanger. 0

25 30 35 40
Flow (gpm)
Differential (psid) 74 66 60 53
2
Page 17
Article VIII. TROUBLESHOOTING SERVICE GUIDE
SYMPTOMS POSSIBLE CAUSE
Selector switch is in “ON” position & pump will not start. 1. Open disconnect switch
2. Blown fuse
3. Tripped overloads
4. Phase monitor fault
5. Low tank level
Pump is rotating but no pressure is established. 1. Improper rotation

2. No water in reservoir
3. Valves not open
4. No back pressure
5. Pump suction blocked
6. Pump seal leaking
Pump runs properly, but compressor does not start. 1. Compressor is not getting energized-flow switch
not activated
Compressor hums but will not start. 1. Low line voltage

2. Motor windings shorted to ground
3. Internal compressor damage
4. Improperly wired
Compressor will not start (no hum). 1. Open disconnect or blown fuse
2. Thermal overload open
3. Relay not closing to start compressor
4. Bad motor windings
5. Loss of refrigerant charge
Compressor starts but trips on internal protector 1. High suction or discharge pressure
2. Low line voltage
The unit short cycles. 1. Low refrigerant charge

2. Defective expansion valve
Temperature controller is indicating a fault: See Below:
High refrigerant pressure fault 1. Dirty air filters

2. Refrigerant overcharge
3. Dirty condenser
4. Malfunction of fan motor
5. Excessive ambient air temperature
Low refrigerant pressure fault 1. Extreme low ambient temperature

2. Refrigerant leak
3. Lack of fluid flow through heat exchanger
4. Liquid line solenoid valve stuck or not opening
5. Expansion valve stuck or lost bulbwell charge.
Fluid flow fault 1. Pump not running

2. System not completely filled
3. Air in the system
4. Flow switch paddle stuck
Pump Overload fault 1. Overload setting incorrect

3. Low pump pressure due to low piping resistance
Phase Monitor fault 1. Incorrect line phasing

2. Low/High incoming voltage
3. Voltage imbalance between phases
Low Tank Level fault 1. Low/no fluid in Heat Exchanger reservoir

2. Float switch stuck in the open position
2
Page 18
Article IX. SPARE PARTS GUIDE
Detailed below is the recommended spare parts list for your Koolant Koolers chiller. For current pricing on
the parts listed, please contact the Dimplex Thermal Solutions parts department at (800) 968-5665.
DTS Guarantee: If any part purchased from this list fails to function within one year of the purchase
date, due to a failure in the part, Dimplex Thermal Solutions will replace the stock part for no
charge.
Koolant Koolers Model #: WO2-2-500 Koolant Koolers Model #: WO2-2-7500

DTS PART DTS PART
Part Description: #: Qty: Part Description: #: Qty:
*Air Filters 4300142 4 *Air Filters 4300142 4
*Expansion Valve 2760105 1 *Expansion Valve 2760112 1
*Fan Motor 4051311 1 *Fan Motor 4051311 1
*Pump 1785007 1 *Pump 1785007 1
*Pump Seal Kit 1785052 1 *Pump Seal Kit 1785052 1
*Temperature Controller 4807776 1 *Temperature Controller 4807776 1
*Temperature Sensor 0611318 1 *Temperature Sensor 0611318 1
Compressor 1450064 1 Compressor 1450077 1
Crank Case Heater 1298032 1 Crank Case Heater 1298032 1
Solenoid Valve 2710006 1 Solenoid Valve 2710008 1
Solenoid Coil 0608319 1 Solenoid Coil 0608319 1
Flow Switch 3653015 1 Flow Switch 3653015 1
Pressure Transducer 4807736 1 Pressure Transducer 4807736 1
Cord Set for Transducer 4807715 1 Cord Set for Transducer 4807715 1
Pressure Transducer 4807739 1 Pressure Transducer 4807739 1
Filter Dryer 2730006 1 Filter Dryer 2730005 1
Hi Pressure Switch 3640017 1 Hi Pressure Switch 3640017 1
Lo Pressure Switch 3640006 1 Lo Pressure Switch 3640006 1
ATJ80 Fuse 3500919 3 ATJ100 3500921 3
ATDR3 Fuse 3500970 3 ATDR3 Fuse 3500970 3
TRM10 Fuse 3500091 2 TRM10 Fuse 3500091 2
TRM3 Fuse 3500030 1 TRM3 Fuse 3500030 1
ATDR1-1/2 Fuse 3500972 2 ATDR1-1/2 Fuse 3500972 2
ATDR ½ Fuse 3500973 4 ATDR ½ Fuse 3500973 4
ATDR15 Fuse 3500960 10 ATDR15 Fuse 3500960 10
AJT20 Fuse 3500910 12 AJT25 Fuse 3500911 12
*Core Components *Core Components
2
Page 19
The MSDS format adheres to the standards and regulatory requirements
of the United States and may not meet regulatory requirements
in other countries.
DuPont Page 1
Material Safety Data Sheet
----------------------------------------------------------------------
"SUVA" 407C
6037FR Revised 29-AUG-2001
----------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------
CHEMICAL PRODUCT/COMPANY IDENTIFICATION
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Material Identification
"SUVA" is a registered trademark of DuPont.
Corporate MSDS Number : DU005999
Tradenames and Synonyms
"SUVA" 9000
Company Identification
MANUFACTURER/DISTRIBUTOR
DuPont Fluoroproducts
1007 Market Street
Wilmington, DE 19898
PHONE NUMBERS
Product Information : 1-800-441-7515 (outside the U.S.
302-774-1000)
Transport Emergency : CHEMTREC 1-800-424-9300(outside U.S.
703-527-3887)
Medical Emergency : 1-800-441-3637 (outside the U.S.
302-774-1000)
----------------------------------------------------------------------
COMPOSITION/INFORMATION ON INGREDIENTS
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Components
Material CAS Number %

PENTAFLUOROETHANE (HFC-125) 354-33-6 25
811-97-2
ETHANE, 1,1,1,2-TETRAFLUORO- (HFC-134a) 52
DIFLUOROMETHANE (HFC-32) 75-10-5 23
----------------------------------------------------------------------
HAZARDS IDENTIFICATION
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Potential Health Effects
Inhalation of high concentrations of vapor is harmful and

may cause heart irregularities, unconsciousness, or death.
Intentional misuse or deliberate inhalation may cause death
without warning. Vapor reduces oxygen available for
breathing and is heavier than air. Liquid contact can cause
frostbite.
6037FR DuPont Page 2
(HAZARDS IDENTIFICATION - Continued)
HUMAN HEALTH EFFECTS:
Overexposure to the vapors by inhalation may include

temporary nervous system depression with anesthetic effects
such as dizziness, headache, confusion, incoordination, and
loss of consciousness. Higher exposures to the vapors may
cause temporary alteration of the heart’s electrical
activity with irregular pulse, palpitations, or inadequate
circulation. Gross overexposure may be fatal. Skin contact
with the liquid may cause frostbite.
Individuals with preexisting diseases of the central nervous

or cardiovascular system may have increased susceptibility
to the toxicity of increased exposures.
Carcinogenicity Information
None of the components present in this material at concentrations

equal to or greater than 0.1% are listed by IARC, NTP, OSHA or ACGIH
as a carcinogen.
----------------------------------------------------------------------
FIRST AID MEASURES
----------------------------------------------------------------------
First Aid
INHALATION
If inhaled, immediately remove to fresh air. Keep person calm.

If not breathing, give artificial respiration. If breathing is
difficult, give oxygen. Call a physician.
SKIN CONTACT
Flush area with lukewarm water. Do not use hot water. If

frostbite has occurred, call a physician.
EYE CONTACT
In case of contact, immediately flush eyes with plenty of water

for at least 15 minutes. Call a physician.
INGESTION
Not a probable route. However, in case of accidental ingestion,

call a physician.
Notes to Physicians
THIS MATERIAL MAY MAKE THE HEART MORE SUSCEPTIBLE TO

ARRHYTHMIAS. Catecholamines such as adrenaline, and other
compounds having similar effects, should be reserved for
emergencies and then used only with special caution.
----------------------------------------------------------------------
FIRE FIGHTING MEASURES
----------------------------------------------------------------------
# Flammable Properties
Flash Point : No flash point
Flammable Limits in Air, % by Volume:

LEL : None per ASTM E681
UEL : None per ASTM E681
Autoignition: Not determined
Fire and Explosion Hazards:
Cylinders may rupture under fire conditions. Decomposition

may occur.
Contact of welding or soldering torch flame with high

concentrations of refrigerant can result in visible changes
in the size and color of torch flames. This flame effect
will only occur in concentrations of product well above the
recommended exposure limit, therefore stop all work and
ventilate to disperse refrigerant vapors from the work area
before using any open flames.
R-407C is not flammable in air at temperatures up to 100

deg C (212 deg F) at atmospheric pressure. However,
mixtures of R-407C with high concentrations of air at
elevated pressure and/or temperature can become combustible
in the presence of an ignition source. R-407C can also
become combustible in an oxygen enriched environment (oxygen
concentrations greater than that in air). Whether a mixture
containing R-407C and air, or R-407C in an oxygen enriched
atmosphere becomes combustible depends on the
inter-relationship of 1) the temperature 2) the pressure,
and 3) the proportion of oxygen in the mixture. In general,
R-407C should not be allowed to exist with air above
atmospheric pressure or at high temperatures; or in an
oxygen enriched environment. For example: R-407C should
NOT be mixed with air under pressure for leak testing or
other purposes.
Experimental data have also been reported which indicate

combustibility of HFC-134a, a component in this blend, in
the presence of chlorine.
Extinguishing Media
As appropriate for combustibles in area.
Fire Fighting Instructions
Cool cylinder with water spray or fog. Self-contained

breathing apparatus (SCBA) is required if cylinders rupture
and contents are released under fire conditions. Water
runoff should be contained and neutralized prior to release.
----------------------------------------------------------------------
ACCIDENTAL RELEASE MEASURES
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Safeguards (Personnel)
NOTE: Review FIRE FIGHTING MEASURES and HANDLING (PERSONNEL)

sections before proceeding with clean-up. Use appropriate
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT during clean-up.
Accidental Release Measures
Ventilate area, especially low or enclosed places where

heavy vapors might collect. Remove open flames. Use
self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) for large spills
or releases.
----------------------------------------------------------------------
HANDLING AND STORAGE
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Handling (Personnel)
Avoid breathing vapor. Avoid liquid contact with eyes and

skin. Use with sufficient ventilation to keep employee
exposure below recommended limits. Contact with chlorine or
other strong oxidizing agents should also be avoided. See
Fire and Explosion Data section.
Storage
Clean, dry area. Do not heat above 52 deg C (125 deg F).
----------------------------------------------------------------------
EXPOSURE CONTROLS/PERSONAL PROTECTION
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Engineering Controls
Avoid breathing vapors. Avoid contact with skin or eyes.

Use with sufficient ventilation to keep employee exposure
below the recommended exposure limit. Local exhaust should
be used if large amounts are released. Mechanical
ventilation should be used in low or enclosed places.
Personal Protective Equipment
Impervious gloves should be used to avoid prolonged or

repeated exposure. Chemical splash goggles should be
available for use as needed to prevent eye contact. Under
normal manufacturing conditions, no respiratory protection
is required when using this product. Self-contained
breathing apparatus (SCBA) is required if a large release
occurs.
Exposure Guidelines
Applicable Exposure Limits

PENTAFLUOROETHANE (HFC-125)
PEL (OSHA) : None Established
TLV (ACGIH) : None Established
AEL * (DuPont) : 1000 ppm, 8 & 12 Hr. TWA
WEEL (AIHA) : 1000 ppm, 4900 mg/m3, 8 Hr. TWA
ETHANE, 1,1,1,2-TETRAFLUORO- (HFC-134a)

PEL (OSHA) : None Established
TLV (ACGIH) : None Established
WEEL (AIHA) : 1000 ppm, 8 Hr. TWA
DIFLUOROMETHANE (HFC-32)
WEEL (AIHA) : 1000 ppm, 8 Hr. TWA
* AEL is DuPont’s Acceptable Exposure Limit. Where governmentally

imposed occupational exposure limits which are lower than the AEL
are in effect, such limits shall take precedence.
----------------------------------------------------------------------
PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL PROPERTIES
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Physical Data
Boiling Point : -43.9 C (-47 F) Average

Vapor Pressure : 171.8 psia 25 C (77 F)
% Volatiles : 100 WT%
Evaporation Rate : (Cl4 = 1)
Greater than 1
Solubility in Water : Not determined
Odor : Slight ethereal
Form : Liquefied gas
Color : Clear, colorless
Specific Gravity : 1.136 @ 25 C (77 F)
----------------------------------------------------------------------
STABILITY AND REACTIVITY
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Chemical Stability
Material is stable. However, avoid open flames and high

temperatures.
Incompatibility with Other Materials
Incompatible with active metals, alkali or alkaline earth

metals--powdered Al, Zn, Be, etc.
(STABILITY AND REACTIVITY - Continued)
Decomposition
Decomposition products are hazardous. "SUVA" 9000 can be

decomposed by high temperatures (open flames, glowing metal
surfaces, etc.) forming hydrochloric and hydrofluoric acids
and possibly carbonyl halides. These materials are toxic
and irritating. Contact should be avoided.
Polymerization
Polymerization will not occur.
----------------------------------------------------------------------
TOXICOLOGICAL INFORMATION
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Animal Data
The blend is untested.
HFC-125
Inhalation 4 hour ALC: > 709,000 ppm in rats
Single, high inhalation exposures caused lethargy, decreased

activity, labored breathing and weight loss. Weak cardiac
sensitization effect, a potentially fatal disturbance of
heart rhythm caused by a heightened sensitivity to the
action of epinephrine. Lowest-Observed-Adverse-Effect-Level
for cardiac sensitization: 100,000 ppm.
Repeated exposure caused: No significant toxicological
effects. No-Observed-Adverse-Effect-Level(NOAEL): 50,000 ppm
No animal data are available to define carcinogenic,

developmental or reproductive hazards. In animal testing
this material has not caused developmental toxicity.
HFC-125 does not produce genetic damage in bacterial or
mammalian cell cultures or when tested in animals (not
tested for heritable genetic damage).
HFC-134a
Inhalation 4-hour LC50: 567,000 ppm in rats
Single exposure caused: Cardiac sensitization, a potentially

fatal disturbance of heart rhythm associated with a
heightened sensitivity to the action of epinephrine.
Lowest-Observed-Adverse-Effect-Level for cardiac
sensitization: 75,000 ppm. Single exposure caused: Lethargy.
Narcosis. Increased respiratory rates. These effects were
temporary. Single exposure to near lethal doses caused:
Pulmonary edema. Repeated exposure caused: Increased
adrenals, liver, spleen weight. Decreased uterine, prostate
weight. Repeated dosing of higher concentrations caused:
the following temporary effects - Tremors. Incoordination.
(TOXICOLOGICAL INFORMATION - Continued)
CARCINOGENIC, DEVELOPMENTAL, REPRODUCTIVE,MUTAGENIC EFFECTS:
In a two-year inhalation study, HFC-134a, at a concentration

of 50,000 ppm, produced an increase in late-occurring benign
testicular tumors, testicular hyperplasia and testicular
weight. The no-effect-level for this study was 10,000 ppm.
Animal data show slight fetotoxicity but only at exposure
levels producing other toxic effects in the adult animal.
Reproductive data on male mice show: No change in
reproductive performance. Tests have shown that this
material does not cause genetic damage in bacterial or
mammalian cell cultures, or in animals. In animal testing,
this material has not caused permanent genetic damage in
reproductive cells of mammals (has not produced heritable
genetic damage).
HFC-32
Inhalation: 4 hour-ALC: > 520,000 ppm in rats
Single exposure caused: Lethargy. Spasms. Loss of mobility

in the hind limbs. Other effects include weak cardiac
sensitization, a potentially fatal disturbance of heart
rhythm caused by a heightened sensitivity to the action of
epinephrine. 250,000 ppm.
Repeated exposure caused pathological changes of the lungs,

liver, spleen, kidneys. In more recent studies repeated
exposure caused: No significant toxicological effects.
No-Observed-Effect-Level (NOEL): 49,100 ppm.
No animal data are available to define the following effects

of this material: carcinogenicity, reproductive toxicity.
Animal data show slight fetotoxicity but only at exposure
levels producing other toxic effects in the adult animal.
Tests have shown that this material does not cause genetic
damage in bacterial or mammalian cell cultures, or in
animals. This material has not been tested for its ability
to cause permanent genetic damage in reproductive cells of
mammals (not tested for heritable genetic damage).
----------------------------------------------------------------------
ECOLOGICAL INFORMATION
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Ecotoxicological Information
HFC-134a
48-hour EC50, Daphnia magna: 980 mg/L
96-hour LC50, Rainbow trout: 450 mg/L
----------------------------------------------------------------------
DISPOSAL CONSIDERATIONS
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Waste Disposal
Comply with Federal, State, and local regulations. Reclaim

by distillation or remove to a permitted waste disposal
facility.
----------------------------------------------------------------------
TRANSPORTATION INFORMATION
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Shipping Information
DOT/IMO/IATA
Proper Shipping Name : Refrigerant Gas R407C
Hazard Class : 2.2
UN No. : 3340
Label(s) : Nonflammable Gas
Shipping Containers
Tank Cars.
Cylinders
Ton Tanks
----------------------------------------------------------------------
REGULATORY INFORMATION
----------------------------------------------------------------------
U.S. Federal Regulations
TSCA Inventory Status : Reported/Included.
TITLE III HAZARD CLASSIFICATIONS SECTIONS 311, 312
Acute : Yes
Chronic : Yes
Fire : No
Reactivity : No
Pressure : Yes
LISTS:
SARA Extremely Hazardous Substance -No

CERCLA Hazardous Substance -No
SARA Toxic Chemical -No
----------------------------------------------------------------------
OTHER INFORMATION
----------------------------------------------------------------------
NFPA, NPCA-HMIS
NPCA-HMIS Rating
Health : 1
Flammability : 0
Reactivity : 1
Personal Protection rating to be supplied by user depending on use

conditions.
Additional Information
MEDICAL USE: CAUTION: Do not use in medical applications

involving permanent implantation in the human body. For other
medical applications see DuPont CAUTION Bulletin No. H-50102.
----------------------------------------------------------------------
The data in this Material Safety Data Sheet relates only to the
specific material designated herein and does not relate to use in
combination with any other material or in any process.
Responsibility for MSDS : MSDS Coordinator

> : DuPont Fluoroproducts
Address : Wilmington, DE 19898
Telephone : (800) 441-7515
# Indicates updated section.
This information is based upon technical information believed to be

reliable. It is subject to revision as additional knowledge and
experience is gained.
End of MSDS
cod. +050001040 rel. 1.3 - 05.02.2004
PGD0000F00/PGD0000W00 pCO display grafico / pCO Graphic Display
Vi ringraziamo per la scelta fatta, sicuri che sarete soddisfatti del vostro acquisto. Thank you for your choice. We trust you will be satisfied with your purchase.
Il display grafico pGD è un dispositivo elettronico, compatibile con i precedenti terminali della linea PCOI/PCOT, che The pGD graphic display is an electronic device that is compatible with the previous PCOI/PCOT line terminals; it allows
consente la completa gestione della grafica tramite la visualizzazione di icone (definite a livello di sviluppo software complete management of graphics by the display of icons (defined at an application software development level), as well as
applicativo) e la gestione di font internazionali di due dimensioni: 5x7 e 11x15 pixel. the management of international fonts, in two sizes: 5x7 and 11x15 pixels.
Il software applicativo è residente soltanto sulla scheda pCO, il terminale non ha bisogno di nessun software aggiuntivo in The application software resides on the pCO board, and therefore the terminal does not require any additional software for
fase di utilizzo. operation.
Inoltre il terminale offre un ampio range di temperatura di funzionamento (-20T60 °C) e nella versione ad incasso il frontale Furthermore, the terminals feature a wide operating temperature range (-20T60 °C) and in the built-in version, the front
garantisce un elevato grado di protezione (IP65). panel ensures a high index of protection (IP65).
Codici dei modelli Model codes

Versione da incasso o pannello PGD0000F00 Built-in or panel-mounted version PGD0000F00
Versione da parete PGD0000W00 Wall-mounted version PGD0000W00
Montaggio a pannello (cod. PGD0000F00) Panel-mounted version (code PGD0000F00)

Questi terminali sono stati progettati per il montaggio a pannello; la dima di foratura deve avere dimensioni di 127x69 mm + These terminals have been designed for panel installation; the drilling template measures 127x69 mm and has 2 circular
2 fori circolari diametro 4 come indicato in Fig. 8. Per l’installazione seguire le istruzioni riportate di seguito: holes, 4 mm in diameter, as shown in Fig. 8. For installation, proceed as follows:
• Effettuare il collegamento del cavo telefonico; • Connect the telephone cable;
• Inserire il terminale, privo di cornice frontale, nel foro, e mediante le viti a testa svasata, contenute all’interno dell’imballo, • Insert the terminal, with the front frame removed, into the opening, and fasten the device to the panel using the
fissare il dispositivo al pannello nelle sedi indicate in Fig. 1; flush-head screws, supplied in the packaging, as shown in Fig. 1;
• Infine, installare la cornice a scatto. • Finally, fit the click-on frame.
Montaggio a parete (cod. PGD0000W00) Wall-mounted version (code PGD0000W00)

Terminale versione da incasso Terminale versione montaggio a parete Il montaggio a parete del terminale prevede l’iniziale fissaggio del retrocontenitore A (Fig. 2), per mezzo di una scatola The wall-mounting of the terminal first requires the back piece of the container A (Fig. 2) to be fitted, using a standard
standard a 3 moduli per interruttori. three-module switch box.
Panel mounting terminal Wall mounting terminal
• Fissare il retrocontenitore alla scatola tramite le viti a testa bombata presenti all’interno dell’imballo; • Fasten the back piece to the box using the rounded-head screws supplied in the packaging;
• Effettuare il collegamento del cavo telefonico; • Connect the telephone cable;
• Appoggiare il frontale al retrocontenitore e fissare il tutto utilizzando le viti a testa svasata presenti all’interno dell’imballo • Rest the front panel on the back piece and fasten the parts together using the flush-head screws supplied in the
A
come illustrato in Fig. 2; packaging, as shown in Fig. 2;
• Infine, installare la cornice a scatto. • Finally, fit the click-on frame.
Collegamento elettrico Electrical connection

Collegare il cavo telefonico (cod. S90CONN00*) proveniente dalla scheda pCO all’apposito connettore (RJ12) posto sul Connect the telephone cable (code S90CONN00*) from the pCO board to the connector provided (RJ12) on the rear of the
retro del terminale. terminal.
Configurazione indirizzo Configuring the address

È possibile configurare l’indirizzo del terminale solo dopo aver fornito alimentazione allo stesso tramite il connettore The address of the terminal can be configured only after having connected the power supply, using the RJ12 telephone
telefonico RJ12 (il valore preimpostato in fabbrica è 32). jack (the factory default value is 32).
Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Per entrare in modalità configurazione premere contemporaneamente i tasti (sempre presenti in tutte le versioni) To access configuration mode, press the buttons (present on all versions) together and hold them for at least 5
per almeno 5 secondi; verrà visualizzata la maschera di Fig. 3 con il cursore lampeggiante nell’angolo in alto a sinistra: seconds; the screen shown in Fig. 3 will be displayed, with the cursor flashing in the top left corner:
• Per modificare l’indirizzo del terminale (display address setting) premere una volta il tasto : il cursore si sposterà sul • To change the address of the terminal (display address setting), press the button once: the cursor will move to
campo indirizzo (nn). the address field (nn).
• Tramite i tasti selezionare il valore voluto, e confermare ripremendo il tasto . Se il valore selezionato è diverso da • Use the buttons to select the desired value, and confirm by pressing again. If the value selected is not the same
quello memorizzato precedentemente apparirà la maschera di Fig. 4 e il nuovo valore verrà memorizzato nella memoria as the one saved previously, the screen shown in Fig. 4 will be displayed, and the new value will be saved to the
Configurazione indirizzo / Configuring the address permanente del display. permanent memory.
Se si imposta il campo nn al valore 0, il terminale comunicherà con la scheda pCO usando il protocollo “punto-punto” (non If the field nn is set to 0, the terminal will communicate with the pCO board using “point-to-point” protocol (not pLAN) and
pLAN) e il campo “I/O Board address: xx” scompare in quanto privo di significato. the field “I/O Board address: xx” will not be displayed, as it has no meaning.
pCO: assegnazione lista terminali privati e condivisi pCO: assigning the list of private and shared terminals
A questo punto, se fosse necessario modificare la lista dei terminali associata ad ogni singola scheda pCO, si dovrà At this point, if the list of terminals associated with each individual pCO board needs to be modified, proceed as
seguire la seguente procedura: follows:
• entrare nella modalità configurazione con i tasti , come descritto nel paragrafo precedente; • access configuration mode using the buttons, as described in the previous paragraph;
• premere il tasto fino a che il cursore si posiziona sul campo xx (I/O board address) Fig. 3; • press the button until the cursor moves to the field xx (I/O board address) Fig. 3;
Fig. 3 Fig. 4 • tramite i tasti scegliere l’indirizzo della scheda pCO desiderata. I valori selezionabili saranno solo quelli delle • use the buttons to select the pCO board in question. The values available correspond to the pCO boards that are
schede pCO effettivamente in linea. Se la rete pLAN non funziona correttamente, oppure non è presente nessuna effectively on line. If the pLAN network is not working correctly, or if no pCO board is present, the field cannot be
scheda piCO, non sarà possibile modificare il campo che mostrerà solo “—”; modified, and the symbol “—” will be displayed;
• premendo ancora una volta il tasto verranno visualizzate in sequenza le maschere di Fig. 5; • pressing again displays the screens shown in Fig. 5, in sequence;
Assegnazione lista terminali privati e condivisi / • anche qui il tasto muove il cursore da un campo all’altro e i tasti cambiano il valore del campo corrente. Il campo • here too, the button moves the cursor from one field to the next, and the buttons change the value of the
Assigning the list of private and shared terminals P:xx mostra l’indirizzo della scheda selezionata; nell’esempio di figura è stata selezionata la 12; current field. The field P:xx shows the address of the board selected; in the example shown in the figure, the
• per uscire dalla procedura di configurazione e memorizzare i dati selezionare il campo “OK ?” impostare Yes e value 12 has been selected;
confermare con il tasto . • to exit the configuration procedure and save the data, select the field “OK ?”, choose Yes and confirm by pressing .
I campi della colonna “Adr” rappresentano gli indirizzi dei terminali associati alla scheda pCO di indirizzo 12, mentre la The fields in the “Adr” column represent the addresses of the terminals associated with the pCO board that has address
colonna Priv/Shared indica il tipo di terminale. 12, while the Priv/Shared column indicates the type of terminal.
Attenzione: i terminali della linea pGD non possono essere configurati come “Sp” (shared printer) in quanto privi dell’uscita Note: the pGD terminals cannot be configured as “Sp” (shared printer), as they have no printer port.
stampante. If the terminal remains inactive (no button is pressed) for more than 30 seconds, the configuration procedure is exited auto-
Se il terminale rimane inattivo (nessun tasto premuto) per più di 30 secondi esce automaticamente dalla procedura di matically, without saving any changes.
configurazione senza memorizzare gli eventuali cambiamenti.
Segnalazione guasti Fault signals

Se il terminale rivela lo stato di fuori linea della scheda pCO a cui è stato associato cancella il display e visualizza il If the terminal detects the off-line status of the pCO board it is associated with, the display shows the message:
messaggio: I/O Board xx fault. I/O Board xx fault.
Fig. 5 Mentre, se il terminale non riceve nessun segnale di rete, cancella il display e visualizza il seguente messaggio: NO LINK. On the other hand, if the terminal receives no signal from the network, the display shows the following message: NO LINK.
Assegnazione lista terminali privati e condivisi Visualizzazione stato rete e versione del firmware Displaying the status of the network and firmware version
Assigning the list of private and shared terminals Premendo contemporaneamente i tasti di configurazione ( ) per almeno 10 secondi (solo in modalità pLAN), si Pressing the configuration buttons ( ) together for at least 10 seconds (in pLAN mode only), displays the screen
visualizza la maschera di Fig. 6. shown in Fig. 6.
La schermata in Fig. 6 esemplifica lo stato della rete pLAN, visualizzando quanti e quali dispositivi sono collegati, e con The screen shown in Fig. 6 provides an example of the status of the pLAN, displaying which and how many devices are
quale indirizzo. connected, and the corresponding addresses.
Legenda: Key:
: controllore pCO attivo in rete : pCO controllers active in network
Fig. 6 Fig. 7 : terminale attivo in rete : terminals active in network

: nessun dispositivo collegato : no device connected
Es. la Fig. 4 rappresenta: The example in Fig. 4 represents:
controllori pCO attivi in rete con indirizzo: 1, 2, 25 pCO controllers active in network, addresses: 1, 2, 25
Dimensioni / Dimensions
terminali attivi in rete con indirizzo: 3, 4, 15, 26. terminals active in network, addresses: 3, 4, 15, 26.
134 Tramite i tasti è possibile visualizzare la versione del firmware residente nel terminale (Fig. 7). The buttons can be used to display the version of the firmware resident in the terminal (Fig. 7).
Per uscire dalla procedura NetSTAT premere il tasto . To exit the NetSTAT procedure, press .
Regolazione contrasto LCD Contrast adjustment

Ø4
dima di foratura I tasti + Prg + consentono la regolazione del contrasto. Use + Prg + buttons to adjust the contrast.
Ø4 drilling template
127x69 mm
34.5
Caratteristiche tecniche Technical specifications
Display Display
Fig. 8 Tipo: grafico FSTN Type: FSTN graphic
Retroilluminazione: LED verdi (comandabile da “software applicativo”) Backlighting: green LEDs (controlled by “application software”)
Risoluzione in grafica: 120x32 pixel Graphic resolution: 120x32 pixels
Modi testo: 4 righe x 20 colonne (font 5x7 e 11x15 pixel) Text mode: 4 rows x 20 columns (font sizes 5x7 and 11x15 pixels)
2 righe x 10 colonne (font 11x15 pixel) 2 rows x 10 columns (font size 11x15 pixels)
oppure modi misti or mixed modes
Altezza carattere: 4,5 mm (font 5x7 pixel) Character height: 4.5 mm (font size 5x7 pixels)
9 mm (font 11x15 pixel) 9 mm (font size 11x15 pixels)
Dimensione area attiva: 71.95x20.75 mm Size of active area: 71.95x20.75 mm
Dimensione area visiva: 76x25.2 mm Size of display area: 76x25.2 mm
67
82
LED tastiera Keypad LEDs
2 programmabili da “software applicativo” di colore rosso e arancio (tasti Prg e Alarm) 2 programmable by “application software”, red and orange (Prg and Alarm buttons)
4 di colore verde, asserviti al comando backlight dell’LCD (tasti e Esc) 4 green LEDs, used as backlighting for LCD ( and Esc buttons)
Alimentazione Power supply
Tensione: alimentazione da pCO tramite connettore telefonico oppure da Voltage: power supply from pCO through telephone cable or external
18 156 sorgente esterna 18/30 Vdc protetta da fusibile esterno da 250 mAT source 18/30 Vdc protected with 2 250 mAT fuse
Potenza assorbita massima: 0,8 W Maximum power input: 0.8 W
30
Distanze massime Maximum distances
125
Lunghezza massima rete pLAN: 500 m con cavo AWG22 a coppie schermate Maximum pLAN length: 500 m with AWG22 twisted pair cable
Distanza pCO terminale: 50 m con cavo telefonico pCO terminal distance: 50 m with telephone cable
500 m con cavo AWG22 a coppie schermate e TCONN6J000 500 m with AWG22 twisted pair cable and TCONN6J000
Nota: per raggiungere la lunghezza massima utilizzare una Note: to reach the maximum length, use a bus layout, with branches
tipologia a bus con diramazioni che non superano i 5 m. not exceeding 5 m.
Materiali Materials
Fig. 9 Frontale trasparente: policarbonato trasparente Transparent front panel: transparent polycarbonate
Retrocontenitori grigio antracite (parete/incasso): policarbonato +ABS Charcoal grey container back piece (wall/built-in): polycarbonate +ABS
Tastiera: gomma siliconica Keypad: silicon rubber
Vetrino trasparente/cornice: policarbonato trasparente Transparent cover glass/frame: transparent polycarbonate
Autoestinguenza: V0 su frontale trasparente e retrocontenitori Self-extinguishing classification: V0 for transparent front panel and back piece
HB su tastiera siliconica e particolari restanti HB for silicon keypad and remaining parts
Generali Others
Grado di protezione: IP65 con montaggio a pannello Index of protection: IP65 for panel mounting
IP40 con montaggio a parete IP40 for wall mounting
UL type 1 UL type 1
82
Condizioni di funzionamento: -20T60 °C, 90% U.R. non condensante Operating conditions: -20T60 °C, 90% r.H. non-condensing
Condizioni di immagazzinamento: -20T70 °C, 90% U.R. non condensante Storage conditions: -20T70 *C, 90% r.H. non-condensing
Classe e struttura del software: A Software class and structure: A
Classificazione secondo il grado di Classification according to
protezione contro le scosse elettriche: Da incorporare in apparecchiature di classe I o II protection against electric shock: To be integrated into class 1 or 2 devices
156 PTI dei materiali di isolamento: 250 V PTI of insulating materials: 250 V
Periodo delle sollecitazioni elettriche: lungo Period of electric stress across insulating parts: long
Categoria di resistenza al calore e al fuoco: D Category of resistance to fire and heat: D
Categoria (immunità contro le sovratensioni): I Category (immunity against voltage surges): I
Inquinamento ambientale: normale Environmental pollution: normal
31
Fig. 10
CAREL S.p.A. CAREL si riserva la possibilità di apportare modifiche o cambiamenti ai propri prodotti senza alcun preavviso.
Via dell’Industria, 11 - 35020 Brugine - Padova (Italy) CAREL reserves the right to modify the features of its products without prior notice.
Tel. (+39) 0499716611 – Fax (+39) 0499716600
http://www.carel.com – e-mail: carel@carel.com cod. +050001040 rel. 1.3 - 05.02.2004
SANYO SCROLL COMPRESSORS
For Air Conditioning
For Refrigeration
C-SB Series C-SC Series C-SD Series
Dalian SANYO Compressor Co., Ltd.
27,May,2009
R407C
R407C - B8 (50Hz 380-415V / 60Hz 440-460V)

'LVSODF +] +] 2XWOLQH
2XW3XW &RPSUHVVRU &RPSUHVVRU 6WDUWLQJ
3KDVH HPHQW 1RPLQDO&DSDFLW\ &23 1RPLQDO&DSDFLW\ &23 *UDSK
0RGHO &RGH 0HWKRG &RGH
+3 FPUHY N: N%78K :: %78:K N: N%78K :: %78:K
&6%1+$ ሪ %
&6%1+$ ሪ $

&6%1+* ሪ $W
&6%1+$ ሪ $

&6%1+* ሪ $W
&6%1+$ ሪ $

&6%1+* ሪ $W
&6%1+$ ሪ $

&6%1+* ሪ $W

&6%6+$ ሪ ሪ $

&6%6+% ሪ ሪ $W
&6&1++ ሪ '
&6&1++ ሪ '

&6&1+. ሪ 'W
&6&1++ ሪ (

&6&1+. ሪ (W
&6&1++ ሪ ሪ ሪ ሪ ሪ (

&6&1+. ሪ ሪ ሪ ሪ ሪ (W
R407C - B8 (50Hz 380-415V / 60Hz 440-460V) T3 Models

'LVSODF +] +] 2XWOLQH
+3 FPUHY N: N%78K :: %78:K N: N%78K :: %78:K
&6%6+3 ሪ ሪ $

&6%6+3 ሪ ሪ $
R407C - B8 (50Hz 380-415V / 60Hz 440-460V) EVI Models

'LVSODF +]FRROLQJ +]KHDWLQJ 2XWOLQH
+3 FPUHY N: N%78K :: %78:K N: N%78K :: %78:K
&6%6+4 ሪ ሪ 'HYHORSLQJ
&6&6+4 ሪ ሪ 'HYHORSLQJ
&6&6+4 ሪ ሪ 'HYHORSLQJ
R407C - B5 (50Hz 220-240V)

'LVSODF +] 2XWOLQH
3KDVH HPHQW 1RPLQDO&DSDFLW\ &23 *UDSK
+3 FPUHY N: N%78K :: %78:K
&6%1+$ &65 $

&6%6+$ ሪ 36& $
&6%1+$ &65 $

&6%6+$ ሪ 36& $

&6%1+$ 36& $

&6%6+$ ሪ 36& $
&6%1+$ 36& $

&6%6+$ ሪ 36& 'HYHORSLQJ
&6%1+$ ሪ $
&6%1+$ ሪ $
&6%1+$ ሪ $
&6%1+$ ሪ $

&6&1++ ሪ '

&6&1++ ሪ '
&6&1++ ሪ (
&6&1++ ሪ (
R407C - B9 (60Hz 380V)

'LVSODF +] 2XWOLQH
3KDVH HPHQW 1RPLQDO&DSDFLW\ &23 *UDSK

+3 FP UHY N: N%78K :: %78:K
&6%1+$ ሪ $

࿢5DWLQJ&RQGLWLRQ
55&5$
ദ ¡)
&RQGHQVLQJ7HPSHUDWXUH
(YDSRUDWLQJ7HPSHUDWXUH
6XE&RROLQJ
6XSHU+HDWLQJ
࿢5DWLQJ&RQGLWLRQIRU(9,
&RROLQJ +HDWLQJ
ദ ¡) ദ ¡)
6XE&RROLQJ
6XSHU+HDWLQJ
࿢5DWLQJ&RQGLWLRQIRU5HIULJHUDWLRQ55$
IL[HGVSHHG ,QYHUWHU
ദ ¡) ദ ¡)
6XE&RROLQJ
6XQWLRQ*DV7HPSHUDWXUH
࿢3RZHU6RXUFH
&RGH 3KDVH +] +]
% 3KDVH 9 9
3KDVH 9
%
3KDVH 9
3KDVH 9
%
3KDVH 9
% 3KDVH 9 9
% 3KDVH 9
࿢6XEVFULSWVRI2XWOLQH*UDSK&RGH
6XEVFULSW H[SODQDWLRQ
W 7KHFRQQHFWLRQSRUWRIRLOEDODQFHWXEHLVDWWDFKHG
V 6FUHZW\SHSRZHUVXSSO\FRQQHFWLRQ
Operating Envelope
Suction Gas Superheat :9K

Refrigerant : R407C
70
60
Condensing Temperature ˄ć˅
Transient Operation
50
Normal Operation
40
30
20
10
-30 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20
Evaporating Temperature˄ć˅
APPLICATION STANDARD & LIMIT (R407C)
The following requirements apply to Vertical type Hermetic Scroll Compressors:

Standard: Applicable to ordinary conditions in Japan JIS B8616 or equivalent conditions, such as standard rating conditions,
maximum operating conditions, low temperature conditions, etc.
Limit: Applicable to transitional brief periods, such as start-up and beginning of defrost mode.
No. Item Standard Limit Note

1 Refrigerant R407C
-15~+12ć/[5̚54 eF] -25~+15ć/[-13̚59 eF] Average temp. of evaperator
2 Evaporating Temp.
0.20~0.65MPa(G)/[29̚94psig] 0.07~0.73MPa(G)[(10̚106psig] Inlet and outlet.
+30~+60ć/[86̚140 eF] +65ć/[149 eF] Average temp. of condensor

3 Condensing Temp.
1.17~2.56MPa(G)/[170̚371psig] 2.88MPa(G)/[418psig] Inlet and outlet.
4 Compression Ratio 2~6 10

5 Winding Temp. 115ć/[240 °F] Max. 125ć/[257 °F]
Upper Limit: 90 ć/[194 °F] Max.
6 Shell Bottom Temp. Lower Limit: Evaporating Temp.+12K / [21 °F] Min. When comp. Is running
Ambient Temp. +11K / [20 °F] Min. When comp. shuts off
Within 100mm(4in) of the

C-SB:130ć/[266°F] Max.
discharge fitting.
7 Discharge Gas Temp. 115ć/[240 °F] Max.
Inside of the well pipe on the
C-SC:135ć/[ 275°F] Max.
top of comp.
It should meet the

requirement of item 5, 6, 7
8 Suction Gas Temp. Superheat: 5K/[10 °F] Min. No excessive noise
and 14 within 300mm of the
suction fitting.
9 Running Voltage Within ±10% of the rated voltage Voltage at comp. terminals.
Three Phase Models: 85% of the rated voltage min. Dropped voltage at comp.
10 Starting Voltage
Single Phase Models: 90% of the rated voltage min. terminals.
ON Period: Until the oil level returns to the center of the lower bearing For at least 7 minutes -ON/3
11 On/Off Period minutes-OFF is
OFF Period: Until balance of high and low pressure is obtained recommendable.
Specific gravity of the Oil:

12 Refrigerant Charge Oil/Refrigerant(wt.)Ŏ0.35
0.94.
13 Life Time 200,000 cycle
C-SB: Center of the lower bearing C-SB:Bottom of the lower bearing

14 Minimum Oil Level
C-SC:No less than 70% of the initial oil charge
Abnormal Pressure Pressure Rise: 3.20MPa(G) /[464psig] Max. By high pressure switch
15
Rise/Drop Pressure Drop: 0.05MPa(G)/[7.3psig] Min. By low pressure switch
System Moisture
16 200ppm Max.
Level
System 1 Vol.% Max. 24 hrs. after vacuuming:
17 Uncondensable Gas
Residual Oxygen 0.1 Vol.% Max. 1.01kPa Max.
Level
18 Tilt 5ȡ Deg.Max.
Operation beyond the above limits must be approved by Dalian SANYO Compressor Co., Ltd. (G): Gauge Pressure
Notes
1 Installation should be completed within 15 minutes after removing the rubber plugs.
2 Do not use the compressor to compress air.
3 Do not energize the compressor under vacuumed conditon.
4 Evacuation and Refrigerant charge˖ Evacuate internal section in the refrigeration system from high and low pressure sides and
charge liquid refrigerant from condenser outlet side. Additional charge shall be done with gas condition from low side.
5 Do not tilt over the compressor while carrying it.

6 Do not remove the paint.
7 Crankcase heater is required when the oil sump temperature is too low to meet the requirement of item 6 .
8 Voltage fluctuation between compressor terminals, during operation, shall be within 2% of the rated voltage.
9 Do not operate compressor in reverse rotational direction.
10 Suction strainers are recommended for all applications.
11 Copper Piping Stress Start/Shutdown 34.32 N/mm 2 Max.
Run 12.26 N/mm 2 Max.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
Liquid Level Switch - Model L-21N, L-21CR and L-21VCR
221 Lombard Street, Oxnard, CA, 93030

CORPORATION Phone: (805) 988-6800 FAX: (805) 988-6804
E-Mail: harwil@ix.netcom.com
Internet: www.harwil.com
1
INSTALLATION & OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
1) If shipping container and contents are received damaged, place complete
package in separate container and immediately call shipping company for
damage inspection and file appropriate report with copy to HARWIL Corp. for
product replacement and insurance adjustment.
2) If contents are not damaged, inspect units received against packing list and
original purchase order. If incorrect units are received, call HARWIL Corp.
immediately for resolution of problem Tel: (805) 988-6800, Fax: (805) 988-6804.
3) Check for damage or scuffing or teflon tape applied to 1-1/4" NPT threads of
switch body. Retape as required with 2 to 3 layers wound clockwise looking at
end of threaded body with float toward viewer.
4) Remove switch and check switch action with a multimeter while moving float
up and down.
FLOAT UP/DOWN CONFIGURATION
FLOAT MULTIMETER METER

POSITION CONNECTION READING
COMM. & NO
CONTINUITY
TERMINALS
UP
COMM. & NC OPEN
TERMINALS CIRCUIT
COMM. & NO OPEN

TERMINALS CIRCUIT
DOWN
COMM. & NC
CONTINUITY
TERMINALS
5) Replace domed cover on unit and insert float through 1-1/4" NPT hole in tank and mate switchbody threads with tank
threads and tighten with appropriate wrench until thread joint is leak tight and arrow on cover label is pointing vertically
upward.
*NOTE: Model L-21 can be supplied with 1-1/2" x 1-1/4 " reducer bushings or larger bushings as required to fit existing
large hole in tank wall.
6) Remove cover and wire as indicated below.

2
LOW LIQUID LEVEL ALARM HIGH LIQUID LEVEL ALARM
Fig. 1: Wiring schematic for power applied to Fig 2: Wiring schematic for power applied to
load when liquid level is less than set point load when liquid level is greater than set point
(power to load interrupted when level (power to load interrupted when level
increases to above set point). decreases to below set point).
Decreasing Liquid Level moves actuator in Increasing Liquid Level moves actuator in
direction shown. direction shown.
Micro switch actuation point may be monitored by an audible click or with an OHM meter before connecting line power to
the switch terminals or by monitoring the voltage supplied to the load through the micro switch.
Pump Up wiring diagram same as low level alarm shown in Fig. 1 above.
Pump Down wiring diagram same as high level alarm show In Fig. 2 above.
Electrical Wiring:
Step 1: Remove gland nut, grommet and switch cover.

Step 2: Strip outer jacket of electrical cord back approximately
1-1/4" inches. Strip insulation from individual
conductors back approximately 1/4 inch.
Step 3: Slip on terminals are supplied with each switch.
Remove from switch terminals and crimp on or
solder to electrical leads.
Step 4: Feed electrical cable through gland nut, grommet and
switch cover as shown.
Step 5: Apply slip on terminals to appropriate contacts of
microswitch. Slide cover down cable and fasten to body of
switch with 4 screws provided. Slide grommet down cable
and push grommet into tapered end of cover. Hold cable
jacket to prevent rotation and thread gland nut firmly onto cover.
Electrical Wiring:
Step 1: Remove switch cover.
Step 2: Same as step 2 above.
Step 3: Same as step 3 above.
Step 4: Thread user supplied 1/2" flexible conduit fitting into 1/2" female thread on end of cover. Feed
electrical cable through conduit fitting.
Step 5: Apply slip on terminals to appropriate male spade contacts on microswitch. Slide cover down
cable and fasten to body of switch with 4 screws provided. Be sure to install "0" ring between
body and cover. Connect flexible 1/2" metal or plastic conduit to conduit fitting on end of cover per

3
1, 2, 3 AND 5 INCH LINE REPLACEABLE

DIFFERENTIAL FLOAT UNITS AVAILABLE
AS SEPARATE ITEMS

4
L-21N
(Series 21300)

5
Limited Warranty
Products manufactured by Walrus Pumps Co (Walrus) are warranted to the first user only
to be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of 12 months from date of
installation, but no more than 24 months from date of shipment. Walrus' liability under this
warranty shall be limited to repairing or replacing at our election, without charge, FOB
Walrus' distribution center or authorized service agent. Walrus will not be liable for any
cost of removal, installation, transportation or any other charges that may arise in
connection with warranty claim. TPHK Series
The warranty period commences on the date of original purchase of the equipment. Proof
of purchase and installation date, failure date, and supporting installation data must be Immersible Pump
provided when claiming repairs under warranty.
This warranty is subject to due compliance by the original purchaser with all directions and
conditions set out in the installation and operating instructions. Failure to comply with
Instruction Manual
these instructions, damage or breakdown caused by fair wear and tear, negligence, misuse,
incorrect installation, inappropriate chemicals or additives in the water, inadequate
protection against freezing, rain or other adverse weather conditions, corrosive or abrasive
water, lightning or high voltage spikes or through unauthorized persons attempting repairs
are not covered under warranty.
Walrus will not be liable for any incidental or consequential damages, losses, or expenses,
arising from installation, use, or any other causes. There are no express or implied
warranties, including merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose, which extend
beyond those warranties described or referred to above.
Certain states do not permit the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential

damages or the placing of limitations on the duration of an implied warranty, therefore, the
limitations or exclusions herein may not apply. This warranty sets forth specific legal rights
and obligations, however, additional rights may exist, which may vary from state to state.
Supersedes all previous publications
Walrus Pump Co., Ltd. ISO 9001 Certified

Web: www.walruspump.com E-mail: walrus.pump@msa.hinet.net
Walrus Pump Co., Ltd.
C099C008E007-00
Please read this instruction manual 3. Operating Limits
carefully before installing your new 1. Ambient temperature :Max. 50oC(122oF)
system as failures caused by 2. Liquid temperature range: 0oC(32oF) to
incorrect installation and operation 90oC(194oF)
are not cover by the warranty. 3. Operating pressure :Max. 10 kg/cm²
EC Declaration of Conformity 4. Submerged depth :Min. 65mm
We WALRUS PUMP CO., LTD. declare under our sole 1. Application
1.1. The TPHK series is multi-stage centrifugal 4. Installation
responsibility that the products : Immersible Pump - pump designed for industrial use, The pump has hot surface on the
TPHK series, to which this declaration relates, are in especially for machine tools. motor. It must be installed so that
1.2 The pump can not be used to transfer persons cannot accidentally come
conformity with the Council Directives relating to explosive liquids; such as gasoline, diesel into contact the hot surface.
oil or similar liquids. It is suitable to carry 4.1. Submerged Depth
- 98/37/EEC (Machinery Directive) liquids such as water, coolant, low viscosity To avoid dry running and damage the pump
or other non-corrosive liquids. during operation, the minimum pump
Standard used : EN 292 : 1991 submerged depth is 65mm (2½”) as shown in
2. Product Code Designation Fig 1. In addition, the bottom of the pump
EN 1050 : 1996 The standard range of pumps includes suction inlet must be at least 25 mm (1”) above
complete impeller in chamber combinations. the bottom of the tank.
Pr EN 809 : 1992 Upon request, a special length can be supplied
by fitting empty intermediate chambers instead
- 89/336/EEC (Electromagnetic compatibility Directive) of standard chambers with impellers. The pump
Fig.1
nameplate indicates the number of chambers
- 73/23/EEC (Low-Voltage Directive) and impellers fitted to the pump.
Standard used : EN60335-1
Min. 65 mm
EN60335-2-51 : 1997
25 mm
R&D department manager: Kao Tien

5. Electrical Connection
Manager: 5.1 The electrical connection should
be carried out in accordance
with local regulations. Never
make any connections unless
Address: 83 -14, DA PIAN TOU, HO CHUOH VILLAGE, the electricity supply has been
switched off.
SAN CHI, TAIPEI HSIEN, TAIWAN. 5.2. The electrical hazard warning
mark is placed outside the
TEL:886-2-26361123~7
connection box. Be careful.
FAX: 886-2-86352660 TPHK 2T 5.3. Electrical data (voltage and frequency) are
** - 4 S shown on the pump nameplate. Verify if
Stainless steel series these data match your electricity supply. A
Number of Impellers circuit breaker should be installed and the
Date: May 10, 2004 Number of Stages grounding be properly connected for your
safety.
Standard capacity m3/hr 5.4. Make electrical connection in accordance
Model name with connecting diagram located inside the
~1~ ~2~
connection box. The motor current must be 7.4. The pump must not be used to transfer 9. Fault Finding
within the rated amps range indicated on explosive liquids. In systems with hot Make sure electricity supply has been switched off before attempting to diagnose any fault
nameplate. Three phase motor requires a liquids (over 60oC), extra caution should be
magnetic starter for safety. exercised to prevent from personal injury. Fault Cause
5.5. For three phase motors, please check the 7.5. The pump should not be used to transfer 9.1 Motor does not start a. No electricity supply
correct direction of rotation of the pump on toxic or contaminated liquids. Please
the motor fan cover. When seen from carefully follow all instructions in the
motor fan cover end, the pump should manual as Walrus may refuse to accept the b. Fuses are blown.
rotate clockwise. You can reverse the contaminated pump for servicing.
direction of rotation by interchanging any c. Motor overheating relay tripped.
two of the incoming supply wires.
8. Sound pressure level
6. Start-up d. Defective magnetic contactors.
Before starting the pump, make sure the follow- Motor dB(A) Motor dB(A)
ing:
e. Control circuit malfunction.
6.1. For three phase motors, verify if the rotating TPHK2T3-1 <70 TPHK4T3-1 <70
direction is correct. It should be clockwise
viewing from the motor fan cover end. TPHK2T3-2 <70 TPHK4T3-2 <70 9.2. Motor cut out during operation. a. Fuses blown or breakers tripped.
6.2. All piping joints are completely tight.
TPHK2T3-3 <70 TPHK4T3-3 <70
Leakage in piping may cause the pump
hydraulic loss. b. Overheating relay tripped.
TPHK2T4-4 <70 TPHK4T4-4 <70
6.3. The pump is filled with liquid.
6.4. The suction filter is not blocked by any TPHK2T5-5 <70 TPHK4T5-5 <70 c. Control circuit malfunction.
foreign objects.
TPHK2T6-6 <70 TPHK4T6-6 <70
7. Operation and Maintenance d. Pump locked up by foreign objects.
It is dangerous to operate the pump
against a closed discharge outlet TPHK8T6-3 71 TPHK12T6-1 71
because it will cause extremely 9.3. Pumped capacity is not constant. a. Pump impeller blocked by impurities.
high liquid flow temperature and TPHK8T6-4 76 TPHK12T6-2 76
damage the pump in a few minutes. b. Insufficient liquid level in the tank. (See Sec.
TPHK8T6-5 76 TPHK12T6-3 76
4.1)
7.1. Lubrication
The mechanical seal and shaft sleeves are 9.4. Pump runs but gives no liquid. a. Suction filter blocked by impurities.
lubricated by the pumped liquid.
7.2. Suction filter
b. Liquid level is too low (See Sec. 4.1)
Always keep suction filter clean and make
sure it is not blocked by impurities.
7.3. Periodic checks c. Incorrect rotating direction.
The following checks should be carried out
periodically to ensure the normal opera-
tion.
7.3.1. Check the quantity of liquid and
operating pressure.
7.3.2. Check there are no leaks on piping
joints.
7.3.3. Check the tripping of the motor
starter.
7.3.4. Check that all controls are functioned
normally.
~3~ ~4~
TPHK 2T/4T Dimensions and Weights
142 Model B (mm) L (mm) N.W. (kg)
TPHK 2T 3 -1 145 350 10.9
TPHK 2T 8 -1 235 440 11.9
TPHK 2T 3 -2 145 350 11.1
TPHK 2T 5 -2 181 386 11.5
PF¾" TPHK 2T 9 -2 253 458 12.3
L TPHK 2T 3 -3 145 350 11.2
25 TPHK 2T 4 -3 163 368 11.4
TPHK 2T 5 -3 181 386 11.6
TPHK 2T 6 -3 199 404 11.8
B
TPHK 2T 8 -3 235 440 12.2
TPHK 2T11-3 289 494 12.6
TPHK 2T 4 -4 163 368 11.5
231 TPHK 2T 6 -4 199 404 11.9
121 110 4XØ7.5 TPHK 2T 5 -5 181 426 12.7
TPHK 2T 6 -6 199 444 13.5
TPHK 2T 8 -6 235 480 13.9
180 140
TPHK 2T 9 -6 253 498 14.1
TPHK 2T10-6 271 516 14.2
Ø160 TPHK 2T11-6 289 534 14.4
TPHK 2T 7 -7 217 462 13.0
TPHK 4T 2 -1 145 350 10.8

TPHK 8T/12T TPHK 4T 2 -2 145 350 11.0
178.4 TPHK 4T 3 -2 172 377 11.2
TPHK 4T 4 -2 199 404 11.4
TPHK 4T 6 -2 253 458 11.6
TPHK 4T 3 -3 172 417 11.7
TPHK 4T 4 -3 199 444 11.9
TPHK 4T 5 -3 226 471 12.1
TPHK 4T 6 -3 253 498 12.3
TPHK 4T 8 -3 307 552 12.7
TPHK 4T 4 -4 199 444 13.3
PF1¼
L TPHK 4T 5 -4 226 471 13.5
TPHK 4T 6 -4 253 498 13.7
40
TPHK 4T 5 -5 226 471 13.9
TPHK 4T 8 -5 307 552 14.5
TPHK 4T 6 -6 253 498 14.1
B
TPHK 4T 8 -6 307 552 14.6
TPHK 4T 7 -7 280 525 14.6
TPHK 4T 8 -7 307 552 14.8
122 124 4XØ9
TPHK 8T 3 -3 95.5 464.5 23.0
TPHK 8T 6 -3 199 568 24.3
TPHK 8T 4 -4 130 499 27.0
200 180 TPHK 8T 6 -4 199 568 28.0
TPHK 8T 5 -5 164.5 533.5 28.0
Ø210 TPHK12T 6 -1 199 568 27.0

TPHK12T 6 -2 199 568 29.0
TPHK12T 6 -3 199 568 30.0
~5~
cod. +050000485 rel. 1.5 - 09.02.2006
SPKT*R0 trasduttori di pressione raziometrici / ratiometric pressure trasducers

Vi ringraziamo per la scelta fatta, sicuri che sarete soddisfatti del vostro acquisto. GB Thank you for your choice. We trust you will be satisfied with your purchase.
Caratteristiche generali General characteristics

Le sonde elettroniche di pressione CAREL sono state sviluppate per essere The CAREL electronic pressure probes have been developed for the
applicate nei settori della refrigerazione e del condizionamento. La versione application in the refrigeration and air conditioning sectors. The ratiometric
raziometrica è disponibile in 5 diversi range di pressione, di seguito riportati. version is available in 5 different ranges of pressure, as following.
Descrizione codici e modelli Description of codes and models
codice serigrafia Pressione Pressione Modello Materiale over range code Silk-
Pressure Pressure Model Body over range
(1) (con 5 V) (con 5 V) screen
(with 5 V) (with 5 V) Material
psiA bar (2) (1)
psiA bar (2)
0.5 V 4.5 V 0.5 V 4.5 V psiA bar 0.5 V 4.5 V 0.5 V 4.5 V psiA bar
SPKT0053R0 2CP5-52 0 75 -1,0 4,2 femmina ottone 375,0 24,9 SPKT0053R0 2CP5-52 0 75 -1,0 4,2 female brass 375,0 24,9
SPKT0013R0 2CP5-46 0 150 -1,0 9,3 femmina ottone 450,0 30,0 SPKT0013R0 2CP5-46 0 150 -1,0 9,3 female brass 450,0 30,0
SPKT0043R0 52CP36-01 15 265 0,0 17,3 femmina ottone 7895,0 53,8 SPKT0043R0 52CP36-01 15 265 0,0 17,3 female brass 7895,0 53,8
2CP5-66 2CP5-66
2.03" MAX. (51.6 mm) SPKT0033R0 2CP5-47 15 515 0,0 34,5 femmina ottone 1030,0 70,0 SPKT0033R0 2CP5-47 15 515 0,0 34,5 female brass 1030,0 70,0
SPKT00B6R0 2CP50-1 15 667 0,0 45,0 femmina acciaio 1335,0 91,0 SPKT00B6R0 2CP50-1 15 667 0,0 45,0 female plated 1335,0 91,0
1.40" MAX. (36.6 mm)
placcato steel
(1) (1)
per distinguere i trasduttori riferirsi alla serigrafia sul corpo del sensore come da tab. to distinguish the transducers refer to the silk screen on the sensor like shown in the tab.
(2) (2)
Il range è espresso in bar relativi The range is expressed in in relative bar
Nota: tutti i sensori sono di tipo Sealed Gage. Note: all the sensors are Sealed Gage type.
ø0.67"
Accessori Accessories
(ø17.0 mm)
Cavo con connettore 2 m: SPKC002300 IP55 Cable with connector 2 m: SPKC002300 IP55
5/8" interpiano (15.9 mm) Cable with connector 2 m: SPKC002310 IP67
Cavo con connettore 2 m: SPKC002310 IP67
5/8" across flats (15.9 mm)
1/4 SAE femmina svasata con deflatore
7/16-20 UNF-2B
Collegamenti Connections
1/4" SAE female flare with deflator Nella Fig. 2 viene indicato lo schema di collegamento della sonda: Fig. 2 illustrates the connection diagram of the probe with the male connector:
7/16-20 UNF-2B • il cavo di colore nero riceve l’alimentazione (5 Vdc); • the black cable receives power supply (5 Vdc);
Fig.1
• il cavo di colore bianco è il segnale di uscita relativo alla pressione letta; • the white cable is the output signal relevant to the read pressure;
• il cavo di colore verde è il riferimento dell’alimentazione. • whereas the green cable refers to the power supply.
Caratteristiche tecniche Technical specifications
terra
ground alimentazione 4,5...5,5 Vdc power supply 4.5 to 5.5Vdc
alimentazione
supply voltage
uscita 0,5...4,5 Vdc output 0.5 to 4.5Vdc
filetto connettore 7/16” 20 UNF connector thread 7/16” UNF
condizioni di funzionamento -40T120 °C operating conditions -40T120°C
ø0.95" (ø24.0) TYP
precisione +/- 1,2% intervallo precision +/- 1.2% span
errore di temperatura +/- 0,013%/°C temperature error +/- 0.013%/°C
uscita grado di protezione IP65 protection degree IP65
out
Fig.2 shock (50...2000 Hz) 11g** shock (50 to 2000Hz) 11g**
grado di inquinamento ambientale normale environmental pollution level normal
per cavo SPKC*/for SPKC* cable: uscita/out = bianco/white materiale a contatto con il fluido ottone o acciaio material in contact with the fluid brass or plated steel
alimentazione/supply = nero/black separazione con membrana compatibili con fluidi refrigeranti R12, R22, separation with plastic compatible with cooling fluids R12, R22,
Nota/Note:
terra/ground = verde/green
Campo di temperatura connettore -35T105°C
Connector temperature range -35T105°C
plastica R134A, R404A, R407C, R410A, R502, R50.
Non compatibili con R717 (ammoniaca), da
non usare con acqua e glicole.
membrane
GB R134A, R404A, R407C, R410A, R502, R50.
Not compatible with R717 (ammonia), not
to be used with water and glycol.
**: g= accelerazione di gravità **: g= gravitational acceleration
Esempi di collegamento a strumentazione CAREL / Examples of connection to CAREL instrument
Collegamento con il pCO1 / pCO1 connection
C8
C1
C1
C4
C4
C7
C7
NC8
GND
NO8
GND
NO1
NO2
NO3
NO4
NO5
NO6
NO7
Rx-/Tx-
+5V Rif
+V Term
Rx+/Tx+
pCO1 Sonda / Probe
Bn= 1, ... , 4 Filo bianco = segnale di pressione
White wire = Pressure signal
+5V rif Filo nero = alimentazione
Black wire = power supply
GND Filo verde = riferimento alimentazione
Green wire = supply reference
Fuse
VG
VG0
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
ID1
ID2
ID3
ID4
ID5
ID6
ID7
ID8
IDC1
B5
GND
B6
GND
B1
B2
B3
B4
+VDC
G
G0
B7
"L'apparecchiatura (o il prodotto) deve essere oggetto di

raccolta separata in conformità alle vigenti normative
locali in materia di smaltimento"
“The appliance (or the product) must be disposed of
separately in accordance with the local waste disposal
legislation in force”
CAREL S.p.A. CAREL si riserva la possibilità di apportare modifiche o cambiamenti ai propri prodotti senza alcun preavviso.
Via dell’Industria, 11 - 35020 Brugine - Padova (Italy) CAREL reserves the right to modify the features of its products without prior notice.
Tel. (+39) 0499716611 – Fax (+39) 0499716600
http://www.carel.com – e-mail: carel@carel.com cod. +050000485 rel. 1.5 - 09.02.2006
P266 Series Single-Phase Condenser Fan Speed Control
Installation Instructions
P266xxx-x Part No. 24-7664-2705, Rev. B
Issued April 29, 2009
Supersedes January 21, 2009
Application 178
FIG:p266_dims
(7)
IMPORTANT: Use this P266 Single-Phase
Condenser Fan Speed Control only as an operating
control. Where failure or malfunction of the P266 fan
speed control could lead to personal injury or
property damage to the controlled equipment or
other property, additional precautions must be
designed into the control system. Incorporate and 76
(3)
maintain other devices, such as supervisory or
alarm systems or safety or limit controls, intended to
warn of or protect against failure or malfunction of
the P266 fan speed control.
CAUTION: Risk of Property Damage

Use only single-phase Permanent Split
! Capacitor (PSC) motors approved by the 165
manufacturer for speed control (6-1/2)
application with the P266 control. Failure
to use a single-phase PSC motor may
damage the motor and other property.
66
(2-5/8)
The P266 Single-Phase Condenser Fan Speed Control
is a cost-effective, compact, weather-resistant, and
durable speed control for single-phase, PSC motors
used in a wide variety of low-ambient refrigeration and
Figure 1: P266 Single-Phase Condenser
air conditioning condenser applications.
Fan Speed Control Mounting Dimensions
The P266 fan speed controls are designed to replace
the Johnson Controls® P66 Series and P215 Series • Mount the P266 control upright on a vertical
Fan Speed Controls and provide additional features surface with the heat sink fins oriented vertically
and application flexibility. and the conduit/electrical holes facing down.
Mounting • Ensure that air can flow through the heat sink fins
and provide 10 cm (4 in.) minimum clearance
Location and Mounting Considerations around the heat sink.
Observe these guidelines when locating and mounting • Mount the P266 control in a location away from
a P266 fan speed control: sources of excessive heat and within the specified
• Ensure that the mounting surface and mounting ambient operating conditions. See Technical
hardware can support the control and wiring. Specifications for ambient operating conditions.
P266 Series Single-Phase Condenser Fan Speed Control Installation Instructions 1

Wiring IMPORTANT: Do not exceed the P266 fan speed
Refer to the model-specific wiring diagram located on control electrical ratings. Exceeding P266 control
the interior label of the P266 control and observe these electrical ratings can result in permanent damage to
guidelines when wiring the P266 fan speed control: the P266 control and void any warranty.
WARNING: Risk of Electric Shock. IMPORTANT: Use copper conductors only. Make
! Disconnect each of multiple power
supplies before making electrical
all wiring in accordance with local, national, and
regional regulations.
connections. More than one disconnect
may be required to completely
IMPORTANT: Electrostatic discharge can damage
de-energize equipment. Contact with
P266 control components. Use proper Electrostatic
components carrying hazardous voltage
Discharge (ESD) precautions during installation and
can cause electric shock and may result
servicing to avoid damaging P266 components.
in severe personal injury or death.
• Ensure that the wires between the P266 control
IMPORTANT: Do not connect supply power to the and the fan motor do not exceed 15 m (50 ft).
P266 fan speed control before finishing wiring and
• Wires connected to the line-voltage terminal block
checking all wiring connections. Short circuits or
improperly connected wires can result in damage to must be 3.31 mm2 (12 AWG) or smaller.
the P266 control and void any warranty. • Low-voltage wires must be less than 30 m (100 ft).
24 VAC Supply Power Wiring 24 VAC Fan Control Wiring

for P266A and P266B Type Controls for P266A and P266B Type Controls
120/240 VAC
C 24 VAC
Primary Supply A
A Power 1 Fan 1 Starter
24 VAC Class 2 2 (Optional)
Power Supply 3
F Fan 2 Starter
(Optional)
Fan 3 Starter
DIP Switch Block (Optional)
LED
C
A Low-Voltage (<30 V) Auxiliary Fan Control
Push-Button Wiring for P266E Type Controls
A
1 External Low-Voltage SELV
2
3 Power Supply
F C
V Line-Voltage VAC
P
C Low-Voltage (<30V) Primary Supply
P2
V Power Power
P
C
M3 M2 M1 L2/N L2/N P1 1
2 Fan 1 Starter
3 (Optional)
F
Fan 2 Starter
(Optional)
Fan 3 Starter
Earth Ground (Optional)
Pressure Transducer
Connection
Wiring for All P266 Models
P266 Electronic
Pressure Transducer
V
Red
FIG:P266_lwV_wirng
P Wht
Blk
C
P1 If a second P266 transducer is used,
wire the P2 terminals the same
as P1 terminals.
Figure 2: P266 Control Physical Features and Low-Voltage Wiring
2 P266 Series Single-Phase Condenser Fan Speed Control Installation Instructions

Low-Voltage Wiring IMPORTANT: The L2/N terminal must be
Figure 2 shows the P266 control features under the connected to line voltage in order for a P266 control
housing cover and the low-voltage wiring diagrams for to comply with the FCC and IEC Class B radio
the P266A, P266B, and P266E Type control models. frequency interference emissions limit.
High-Voltage Wiring Use Table 1 to determine the high-voltage wiring
Figure 3 shows the high-voltage wiring diagrams for options available for P266A, P266B, and P266E Type
the P266A and P266B Type control models. Figure 4 control models.
show the high-voltage wiring diagrams for the P266E
Type control models.
Split Winding/Three Triac with LSC Wiring Two Triac with LSC Wiring One Triac with LSC Wiring
for P266A Type Controls for P266A and P266B Type Controls for P266A and P266B Type Controls
(208-240 VAC Only) (208-240 VAC and 460-575 VAC) (208-240 VAC and 460-575 VAC)
M3 M2 M1 L1 L2/N M3 M2 M1 L1 L2/N M3 M2 M1 L1 L2/N

Low-Speed Low-Speed
Capacitor Capacitor
208-240 VAC Line VAC Line VAC
(LSC) (LSC)
Auxilary Auxilary Auxilary
Capacitor Capacitor Capacitor
Main Auxiliary Main Auxiliary Main Auxiliary
Windings Windings Windings Windings Windings Windings
FIG:p266_NA_HiV_wirng
PSC PSC PSC
A Motor
B Motor
C Motor
Note: Some P266A
and P266B models do not
have M2 or M3 Triacs.
Figure 3: High-Voltage Wiring Options for P266A and P266B Type Controls
Split-Winding/Three Triac with LSC Wiring Two Triac with LSC Wiring Single Triac Wiring
for P266E Type Controls for P266E Type Controls for P266E Type Controls
(208-240 VAC Only) (208-240 VAC Only) (208-240 VAC Only)
M3 M2 M1 L1 L2/N L2/N M3 M2 M1 L1 L2/N L2/N M3 M2 M1 L1 L2/N L2/N
208-240 VAC 208-240 VAC 208-240 VAC
Auxilary Auxilary Auxilary

Low-Speed Low-Speed Capacitor
Capacitor Capacitor Capacitor Capacitor
(LSC) Main Auxiliary (LSC) Main Auxiliary
Main Auxiliary
Windings Windings Windings Windings Windings Windings
FIG:p266_E_HiV_wirng
PSC PSC PSC

A Motor
B Motor
C Motor
Note: Some P266E models do not have

M2 or M3 Triacs.
Figure 4: High-Voltage Wiring Options for P266E Type Controls

Table 1: Product Type High-Voltage Wiring Options and Voltage Ranges
Product Split Winding/Three Triac Two Triac with Single Triac Wiring for...
Type with Low-Speed Capacitor Low-Speed Capacitor
Number Wiring for... Wiring for...
208-240 VAC 460-575 VAC 208-240 VAC 460-575 VAC 208-240 VAC 460-575 VAC
P266AA See Figure 3A -- See Figure 3B -- See Figure 3C --
P266AB See Figure 3A -- See Figure 3B -- See Figure 3C --
P266AC -- -- -- -- See Figure 3C --
P266AD -- -- -- -- See Figure 3C --
P266BC -- -- -- -- -- See Figure 3C
P266BD -- -- -- -- -- See Figure 3C
P266BG -- -- -- See Figure 3B -- See Figure 3C
P266BH -- -- -- See Figure 3B -- See Figure 3C
P266EA See Figure 4A -- See Figure 4B -- See Figure 4C --
P266EB See Figure 4A -- See Figure 4B -- See Figure 4C --
P266EC -- -- -- -- See Figure 4C --
P266ED -- -- -- -- See Figure 4C --
P266EE -- -- -- -- See Figure 4C --
P266EF -- -- -- -- See Figure 4C --
Setup and Adjustments During normal operation, the green LED is On/lit
All P266 controls ship with factory-set default values constantly. When you press and hold the push button,
and mode settings. In most applications, the default the LED goes Off for 3 seconds then flashes two times.
values and modes do not require field adjustment. The LED then goes Off again for 3 seconds and flashes
three times, and continues this pattern until seven
If your P266 control application requires you to change flashes or until you release the push button.
the value or mode settings, you must:
Each sequence of flashes indicates a value or a value
1. Calculate the new values and determine the new and set of mode settings. Releasing the push button
mode settings required for your application. (See after the desired flash sequence saves the value and/
P266 Control Values and Modes.) or modes that are currently set on the DIP switch block.
2. Change the existing settings on the control to the See Table 2 for more information.
new values and modes using the P266 control P266 Control Values and Modes
setup interface. (See Setting Values and Modes.) P266 controls have up to ten values and modes (in six
P266 Control Setup Interface flash sequences) that can be changed in the field. See
The P266 control setup interface consists of a DIP Table 2 for more information about flash sequences
switch block with eight binary switches, a push button and the associated values and modes.
switch, and a green Light-Emitting Diode (LED) Start Voltage Value
(Figure 2). You can change the factory-set default The start voltage (VAC) is the voltage delivered by the
values and modes by repositioning the DIP switches P266 control to the fan motor to run the motor at
and saving the new settings. The number of LED minimum speed in your application.
flashes (in sequence) indicates which value and/or
modes that you are saving. See Table 2 for more The Start Voltage value is a percentage of the
information about LED flash sequences, values, and P266 control’s input voltage. Use the following formula
modes. to calculate the Start Voltage value for your application.
Start Voltage (VAC)
Start Voltage
P266 Control Value (%)
Input Line- Voltage (VAC)

Low Pressure Mode
Low Pressure Mode determines whether the fan motor End
is either On (at start voltage/minimum speed) or Off Voltage
Mode
Voltage to Motor
when the sensed pressure at the P266 transducer is r
M oto
below the start pressure setpoint. Low to
Pressure g e
lta
Start Pressure Value Mode Vo
On
Start pressure (psi or bar) is the pressure setpoint at Start
which the P266 control outputs the start voltage and Voltage
Low Pressure Mode
runs the fan motor at minimum speed. Start Pressure Off
FIG:p266_Valu_Rels
value is a function of the start pressure setpoint and 0
the pressure range of the referenced P266 transducer. Start End
Pressure Pressure
Use the following formula to calculate the Start
Pressure value. See Table 3 for P266 transducer
Pressure at Sensor
pressure ranges. Figure 5: Graph Showing the Relationship between
Start Pressure
P266 Fan Speed Control Variables
Setpoint (bar or psi)
X 250 = StartValue
Pressure
Low-Speed Capacitor Mode
P266 Transducer Pressure
Range (bar or psi) In some fan speed applications, a (user-supplied)
Low-speed capacitor (LSC) can be connected to the
P266 control’s M3 triac and the controlled fan motor
End Pressure Value
(Figure 3 and Figure 4). The low-speed capacitor is
The end pressure setpoint is the pressure (bar or psi) enabled at low voltages to enhance the fan motor
at which the P266 control outputs the End Voltage and efficiency and performance. Set Low-speed Capacitor
runs the fan motor at maximum speed. End Pressure mode On when a low-speed capacitor is used.
value is a function of the end pressure setpoint and the
total pressure range of the referenced transducer. Use Low-Speed Capacitor Low-Speed Capacitor
the following formula to determine your application End End Enabled Disabled
Pressure value. See Table 3 for P266 transducer Voltage
pressure ranges.
Voltage to Motor
r
End Pressure to
Setpoint (bar or psi) Mo
to
X 250 = EndValue
Pressure CV Changeover Voltage
l ta
ge
P266 Transducer Pressure Vo
Range (bar or psi)
Start
Voltage LPM On
LPM
Split Winding Mode Off
FIG:p266_CV_Rels
Some single-phase PSC motors have split motor 0 Start End

winding wire leads. Setting the Split Winding mode On Pressure Pressure
enables the M2 Triac to provide voltage to the main Pressure at Sensor
windings (and not the auxiliary windings), which
increases motor efficiency (Figure 3A and Figure 4A). Figure 6: Low-Speed Capacitor Operation
Note: Split Winding mode is available for only

Note: The optional low-speed capacitor should be
240 VAC single-phase PSC motors that have split
equal in both the voltage range and the microfarad
winding wire leads. Refer to the motor manufacturer’s
value to the auxiliary capacitor supplied by the
installation instructions to determine if your fan motor
manufacturer, but the capacitor must not exceed
may be wired to enabled the Split Winding mode.
15 microfarads.
End Voltage Mode
Note: You must also set the Changeover Voltage
End voltage is the voltage output by the P266 control value when a low-speed capacitor is used in your P266
(as a percentage of the full voltage) that is maintained control application. See Changeover Voltage Value and
when the monitored pressure is equal to or greater Determining Changeover Voltage Value for more
than the End Pressure. The End Voltage mode can be information on setting the Changeover Voltage value.
set to either 95% or 97% of the total input voltage.

Auxiliary Fan Stage Mode Note: If the P266 control is set for no auxiliary fans,
You can set the P266 fan speed control to cycle the Auxiliary Fan Overlap value is not used. See
(On/Off) up to three additional (fixed-speed) fan motors Table 2 for information on setting the number of
or fan stages in conjunction with the variable speed fan auxiliary fans used in your application.
controlled by the P266 control. Changeover Voltage Value
Three low-voltage circuits (Figure 2) can be wired to The Changeover Voltage value determines the voltage
control the auxiliary fan motor/stage starters. See at which the P266 control enables and disables the M3
Table 2 for information on setting the number of triac and the low-speed capacitor (Figure 6). See
auxiliary fans used in your application. Determining Changeover Voltage Value.
Figure 7 shows a P266 control application with one Setting Values and Modes
auxiliary fan operating in conjunction with the speed- To change settings and values on a P266 control:
controlled fan. When the condenser load exceeds the
output capacity of the speed-controlled fan, the P266 1. Determine the operating pressure setpoints (psi or
control powers On the auxiliary fan and shifts the bar), voltage inputs and outputs (VAC), and the
speed-controlled (P266) fan to a new start pressure. other modes of operation required for your
condenser fan motor control application.
Fan Throttling Range
Fig:AuxFanOvrlap 2. Convert the selected pressure setpoints (psi or bar)
% Fan
Overlap
and voltage targets (VAC) into P266 control values.
Total
See P266 Control Values and Modes and Table 2.
ut
Capacity
P266 Fan Outp Aux.Fan 3. Position the DIP switches to set the new values
n
Stage Fa Plus
and/or modes. See Setting up the DIP Switch
66 P266 Fan
Shift P2
1st Output Block.
Stage
ut
4. Press and hold the push button until the number of
Output
Auxiliary
Outp LED flashes indicates the desired value or set of
Fan
On
n
Fa values and/or mode settings. Release the push
Off
66 Output
P 2
button after:
0 Start End • two flashes to save the Low Pressure mode
Pressure Pressure
Pressure at Sensor setting and the Start Voltage value
Figure 7: Graph Showing a Speed-Controlled • three flashes to save the Start Pressure value
(P266) Fan Operating with One Auxiliary (On/Off) • four flashes to save the End Pressure value
Fan Stage over the Entire Pressure Range
• five flashes to save the Split Winding,
End Voltage, Low-speed Capacitor Mode, and
Auxiliary Fan Overlap Value Auxiliary Fan Stages mode settings
Auxiliary Fan Overlap value determines the pressure • six flashes to save the Auxiliary Fan Overlap
range overlap (as a percentage of the total pressure value
[throttling] range) between the fan stages set up on the
P266 control. The fan overlap value is equal for all • seven flashes to save the Changeover
auxiliary fan stages set up on the control. Voltage value
Increasing the Auxiliary Fan Overlap value decreases Note: See Table 2 for more information about the
the (On/Off) cycling rate of the auxiliary fans and values and modes that are associated with the
increases the pressure differential between auxiliary number of LED flashes.
fan stages (which increases the pressure range of each 5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for the next value and/or
auxiliary fan stage). mode you need to change.
6. After you save all of the new values and mode
settings, set all of the DIP switches to the On
position to lock out the push button operation.

Setting up the DIP Switch Block Test Voltage Mode
To set new values and modes on the DIP switch block: Test Voltage mode is a setup and diagnostic tool in the
P266 control firmware that allows you to test a
1. Position all of the switches on the DIP switch block
condenser fan motor’s operation at different voltage
to the Off position.
values in the field and determine the optimal Start
2. Position the numbered switches to ON so that the Voltage value for your P266 control application.
total of the switch numbers (in the ON position)
Test Voltage mode also allows you to determine and
equals the desired setup value. Start with the
set the optimal Changeover Voltage value for the M3
highest number switch that is less than the setup
triac in P266 control applications that use a low-speed
value. (For example, if the desired setup value is
capacitor.
185, position switch 128 to ON first. Then position
switch 32 ON, followed by switch 16, switch 8, and To use the Test Voltage Mode, you need:
switch 1 [128+32+16+8+1=185] [Figure 8]).
• a P266 control model designed for your condenser
Mode settings require you to position only one or fan application
two switches on the DIP switch block, depending
• access to the condenser (and fan motor) controlled
on the mode. See Table 2 for more information
by your P266 control
about the values and modes that are associated
with the number of LED flashes. • a clamp-on ampere meter with 15 A range (to
check changeover current draw when determining
ON Changeover Voltage value)
• an insulated probe to hold down the push-button
FIG:p266_DIP_swtch
and change the DIP switch positions

128
• a 24 VAC Class 2 power supply (only for

32
64
16
1
8
2
4
P266 control models that require an external

24 VAC power supply)
Figure 8: A DIP Switch Block with the
Switches Positioned for a Setup Value of 185 • a Low-Speed Capacitor (LSC), sized for the fan
motor (only for P266 control applications that use
a low-speed capacitor)
IMPORTANT: All of the switches on the DIP switch
block must be set to the proper positions for your Note: The LSC should be equal in both the
application before you press and release the push voltage range and the microfarad value to the
button to save the values and/or mode settings. See motor manufacturer’s auxiliary capacitor, but the
Table 2 for more information on switch positions. LSC must not exceed 15 microfarads.
Setting up Test Voltage Mode
Before you power on a P266 control and enable the
Test Voltage mode on the control:
1. Read and follow the guidelines and procedures in
the Mounting and Wiring sections.
2. Mount and wire the P266 control in your condenser
application and observe these additional
guidelines:
• Refer to the label inside the P266 control
housing cover for model-specific wiring details.
See Wiring for some wiring options.
• Wire the auxiliary and main windings according
to the motor manufacturer’s instructions and
your application requirements. Split the
windings (at the winding leads) and power
them separately, if your application and motor
allow for split-winding operation. See Figure 3
and Figure 4.

• If your application uses an optional low-speed 5. Disconnect line-voltage power to the P266 (and
capacitor, wire the LSC to the M3 triac and the external 24 VAC power supply on required
motor only after you have checked and models).
recorded the current draw at maximum. See
6. Wire the low-speed capacitor to the M3 triac and
Determining Changeover Voltage Value.
the motor auxiliary windings. (See Figure 3 and
• If your P266 control model requires an external Figure 4 for M3 triac wiring options.)
24 VAC power supply for control operation, 7. Set all of the DIP switches except switches 8 and
wire that power supply to the control. (Refer to 32 to the Off position; set switches 8 and 32 to the
the wiring label inside the P266 control cover ON position. (8 + 32 = 40% of maximum voltage
for external power supply requirements.) value.)
• You do not have to connect, wire, or power the 8. Apply line-voltage power to the P266 control (and
P266 transducer, or put a load on the the external 24 VAC power supply on required
condenser to operate a P266 control in the models), then, within the first 30 seconds after
Test Voltage mode. Test Voltage mode allows applying power, press and release the push button
you to use the DIP switch to set the voltage three times. The LED goes off and stays off, and
supplied to the motor by the P266 control. the fan motor accelerates to the speed at 40% of
3. Set up the P266 control and the condenser fan the maximum voltage (for up to 5 minutes).
motor for the intended operation, by setting the 9. At 40% of maximum voltage, use the clamp-on
required values and modes of operation for your ampere meter to check the current draw (in
condenser fan application. See Setup and amperes) of the low-speed capacitor lead
Adjustments for procedures. connected to the M3 terminal and record the
Determining Changeover Voltage Value current draw for the low-speed capacitor lead at
40% voltage.
In the Test Voltage mode, you can determine and set
the Changeover Voltage value for P266 control 10. Repeat Step 7 but increase the percent voltage
applications that use an optional low-voltage capacitor. value by 8%, then repeat Step 8, Step 9, and
To determine and set the Changeover Voltage value: Step 10 at the increased voltage values until the
current draw equals the (maximum voltage) current
1. Mount, wire, and set up the P266 control and the draw recorded in Step 4.
condenser fan motor for operation in the Test
Voltage mode. See Setting up Test Voltage Mode. Note: If the motor stops or does not run smoothly,
reduce the voltage value on the DIP switches by
Note: Do not wire the low-speed capacitor until 4% and test the motor operation.
Step 5 of this procedure.
11. The DIP switch voltage value is now equal to the
2. Set all of the DIP switches except switch 1 to the highest voltage of the low-speed mode or the
ON position; set switch 1 to Off. Changeover Voltage value.
3. Apply line-voltage power to the P266 control (and 12. Press and hold the push button until the LED
the external 24 VAC power supply on required flashes 3 time, then release the button. The
models), then, within the first 30 seconds after Changeover Voltage value is set and saved on the
applying power, press and release the push button P266 control.
three times. The LED goes off and stays off, and
the fan motor accelerates to maximum speed (at Note: If you want to also determine and set the
95 or 97% of maximum voltage) and stays at the Start Voltage value for your P266 control and
maximum voltage for up to 5 minutes. motor, you can go directly to Step 3 of the
Determining Start Voltage Value procedure.
4. At maximum voltage, use the clamp-on ampere
meter to check the current draw (in amperes) of the 13. Disconnect power to the P266 control and set all of
fan motor auxiliary windings and record the the DIP switches to the On position to lock out the
auxiliary windings current draw for the motor at push button operation.
maximum voltage. 14. Reconnect power to the P266 control to resume
normal motor speed control.

Determining Start Voltage Value 4. Observe the fan motor operation and determine if
In the Test Voltage mode, you can also determine and the applied start voltage runs the motor at the
set the Start Voltage value on for P266 control desired start speed:
application. • If the start speed and motor operation meet
To determine and set the Start Voltage value: your application requirements, go to Step 5.
1. Mount, wire, and set up the P266 control and the • If the start speed or operation does not meet
condenser fan motor for operation in the Test your application requirements, return to Step 3
Voltage mode. See Setting up Test Voltage Mode. and set a new estimated Start Voltage value to
generate the desired motor start speed.
Note: If your application uses Split Winding mode
and Low Speed Capacitor mode, wire the split 5. When your motor is running at the desired start
windings and low-speed capacitor according to speed (Start Voltage value), press and hold the
your application requirements (Figure 3A and push button until the LED flashes 2 times in
Figure 4A). succession, then release the push button. The
Start Voltage value is set and saved on the
2. Apply line-voltage power to the P266 control (and P266 control.
the external 24 VAC power supply on required
models), then, within the first 30 seconds after 6. Disconnect power to the P266 control and set all of
applying power, press and release the push button the DIP switches to the On position to lock out the
three times. The LED goes off and stays off. push button operation.
3. Position the DIP switches so that the total value of 7. Reconnect power to the P266 control to resume
the switches positioned ON is equal to a normal motor speed control.
percentage value equal to or slightly higher than
your estimated Start Voltage value. (For example, if
you estimate the start voltage of the motor to be
25% of the total voltage, position switches 16, 8, 4,
and 2 ON. 16 + 8 + 4 + 2 = 30%, which is slightly
higher than your 25% estimate.) The fan motor
accelerates to the speed at 30% of maximum
voltage and stays at that speed.

10
Table 2: LED Flash Sequences, Setup Values, Mode Settings on DIP Switch Block and Default Values and Mode Settings Example
Release Value/Mode Value Range/Mode Switch Number and Position DIP Switch Block
Push Button Name (Binary Settings (Example Description of Value/Setting Example Default
After... Switch Number) Default Settings) Settings
Two Flashes Low Speed Mode Settings: ON or Off Switch 128 Off = No voltage to motor when sensed pressure is
(Switch 128) (Default Setting: Off) below start pressure.
ON
Switch 128 ON = Start voltage to motor when sensed pressure is
at or below start pressure.
8
2
1
32
16
64
128
Start Voltage Value Value Range: 10 to 90 Position Switches 1 to 64 ON or Off so that the sum of the
(Switches 1 to 64) (Default Value: 40) switches set to ON equals the Start Voltage Value.
Three Flashes Start Pressure Value Range: 10 to 230 Position Switches 1 to 128 ON or Off so that the sum of the ON
Value (Default Value: 110) switches set to ON equals the Start Pressure Value.
8
2
1
(Switches 1 to 128)
32
16
64
128
Four Flashes End Pressure Value Value Range: [Start Position the Switches 1 to 128 ON or Off so that the sum of the ON
(Switches 1 to 128) Pressure + 8] to 240 switches set to ON equals the End Pressure Value.
8
2
1
(Default Value: 129)

32
16
64
128
Five Flashes Split Winding Mode Settings: ON or Off Switch 32 ON = M2 Triac enabled to power split windings.
(Switches 64 (Switch 32) (Default Setting: Off) Switch 32 Off = M2 Triac is disabled.
and 128 Off)
End Voltage Mode Settings: ON or Off Switch 16 ON = Provides 95% of P266 input voltage to motor.
(Switch 16) (Default Setting: Off) Switch 16 Off = Provides 97% of P266 input voltage to motor.
(Future Function) Settings: ON or Off Switch 8 ON = (Do not set to ON position.)
(Switch 8) (Default Setting: Off) Switch 8 Off = Set switch to Off position. ON
Low Speed Settings: ON or Off Switch 4 ON = Low speed capacitor is available.

8
2
1
32
16
64
128
Capacitor Mode (Default Setting: Off) Switch 4 Off = Low speed capacitor is not available.
(Switch 4)
Number of Settings: ON or Off Position switches 1-Off and 2-Off for no auxiliary fans.
Auxiliary Fan (Default Setting: Off - Position switches 1-On and 2-Off for auxiliary fan 1.
Stages Off) Position switches 1-Off and 2-On for auxiliary fans 1 and 2.
P266 Series Single-Phase Condenser Fan Speed Control Installation Instructions

(Switches 1 and 2) Position switches 1-On and 2-On for auxiliary fan 1, 2, and 3.
Six Flashes Auxiliary Fan Value Range: 1 to 90 Position Switches 1 to 64 ON or Off so that the sum of the ON
(Switch 128 Off) Overlap (Default Value: 10) switches set to ON equals the Auxiliary Fan Overlap Value.
8
2
1
(Switches 1 to 64)
4
32
16
64
128
Seven Flashes Changeover Value Range: 10 to 80 Position Switches 1 to 64 ON or Off so that the sum of the ON
(Switch 128 Off) Voltage Value (Default Value: 60) switches set to ON equals the Changeover Voltage value.
8
2
1
(Switch 1 to 64)
32
16
64
128
P266 Electronic Pressure Transducers Refer to the P499 Series Electronic Pressure
P266 controls are designed to reference either one or Transducers Product/Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011190)
two Johnson Controls P266 Electronic Pressure for information on installing P266 transducers.
Transducers to monitor condenser pressure. Table 3: P266SNR Electronic Pressure
P266 transducers are specialized versions of the Transducers
P499 Series Electronic Pressure Transducers Product Description
designed for use with P266 fan speed controls. See Code
Table 3 for the available P266 transducer models. Number
Note: On P266 control applications that use two P266SNR-1C Electronic Pressure Transducer:
0 to 35 bar (0 to 508 psi) total range
P266 transducers, the P266 control always references with a 1/4 in. SAE Female Flare
the transducer that is sensing the highest pressure. connection and a 2 meter (3.1 ft) cable.
P266SNR-2C Electronic Pressure Transducer:
IMPORTANT: When two P266 transducers are
0 to 52 bar (0 to 754 psi) total range
connected to a P266 control, the transducers must with a 1/4 in. SAE Female Flare
be the same model (product code number). Failure connection and a 2 meter (3.1 ft) cable.
to connect the same P266 transducer models to the
P266 control can result in erratic control behavior.
Technical Specifications
P266xxx-x
Product P266xxx-x Single Phase Condenser Fan Speed Control
Input Supply Power 208-240 VAC 50/60 Hz or 480-575 VAC 50/60 Hz depending on model
(Refer to the label inside the P266 control housing cover for rated voltage range and
model-specific wiring diagram.)
Low-Voltage Power Supply P266A and P266B Types: External 24 VAC Class 2, 20 VA Supply Transformer
P266Exx Types: Low-voltage power for P266 control is provided by an onboard
transformer.
Note: When auxiliary fan starters are connected to P266E type controls, you must
provide an external Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) AC supply to power the fan starters
(Figure 2).
Ambient Operating Conditions Temperature: -20 to 60qC (-4 to 140qF)
Humidity: Up to 95% RH non-condensing; Maximum Dew Point 29qC (85qF)
Ambient Shipping and Storage Temperature: -40 to 85qC (-40 to 185qF)
Conditions Humidity: Up to 95% RH non-condensing; Maximum Dew Point 29qC (85qF)
Low-Voltage Connections 1/4 in. Quick-Connect terminals, 30 m (100 ft) maximum wiring runs
Input Transducer P266SNR-x Pressure Transducer: 5 VDC for 0.5 to 4.5 VDC ratio metric analog signal
Enclosure Type NEMA 3R, IP54
Case Construction Aluminum Die Casting
Cover Construction UV Stabilized Polycarbonate/ABS
Dimensions (HxWxD) 159 x 177 x 70 mm (6-1/4 x 7 x 2-3/4 in.)
Weight Heaviest Model Weight: 1.0 kg (2.2 lb)
Approximate Shipping Weight: 1.2 kg (2.6 lb)
Compliance Europe: Mark: CE Compliant; CENELEC EN 60947-1 & 4-2;
RoHS Directive (2002/95/EC); WEEE Directive (2002/96/EC)
North America: ETL, UL508C; cETL C22.2 No. 107.1;
FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B
Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits
Australia: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)
The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For application at conditions beyond these
specifications, consult Johnson Controls Application Engineering at (414) 524-5535. Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages
resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products.

United States Emissions Compliance (FCC)
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try
to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Canadian Emissions Compliance
This Class (B) digital apparatus meets all the requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
Cet appareil numérique de la Classe (B) respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
Building Efficiency
507 E. Michigan Street, Milwaukee, WI 53202
Metasys® and Johnson Controls® are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc.
All other marks herein are the marks of their respective owners. © 2009 Johnson Controls, Inc.
Published in U.S.A. www.johnsoncontrols.com

YR Form No.: F001.6
Date: 5.05
Submittal
Flow Regulator & Port Section Supersedes: F001.5 9.03
Port Port
1 2
D
Flow
B
C
Port
3
A
Model YR shown with standard Pressure / Temperature ports.
Product Information
Body: DZR Brass AutoFlow regulator, factory set to automatically limit the flow to
Flow Cartridge: Series 300 Stainless Steel within 5% of the specified amount over 95% of the control
Wear Surfaces with Stainless range. The flow cartridge is removable from the valve body to
Steel Spring provide access for regulator changeout, inspection and cleaning
without breaking the main piping. Internal wear surfaces of the
Accuracy: ±5% valve cartridge are stainless steel. Pressure / Temperature ports
Rating: 400 psig at 250° F (25 bar at 120° C) are standard.
GUT
TER
Dimensions not to be used for construction unless prints certified by factory.

Dimensions
Maximum gpm (lps)†
Control Range psid (kPa)
Model Size A B C D Weight Cv / (Kv) 2-32 5-60
in./(mm) in./(mm) in./(mm) in./(mm) in./(mm) lb./(kg) (14-220) (35-414)
YR0050S 1/2 (15) 3.7 (93) 2.3 (59) 1.9 (49) 2.2 (55) 0.9 (0.41) 7.6 (8.8) 8 (0.5) 12 (0.8)
YR0050F 1/2 (15) 4.0 (101) 2.5 (64) 1.9 (49) 2.2 (55) 0.9 (0.41) 7.6 (8.8) 8 (0.5) 12 (0.8)
YR0075S 3/4 (20) 4.1 (103) 2.5 (63) 1.9 (49) 2.2 (55) 1.0 (0.45) 8.7 (10.1) 8 (0.5) 12 (0.8)
YR0075F 3/4 (20) 4.2 (106) 2.6 (67) 1.9 (49) 2.2 (55) 1.0 (0.45) 8.7 (10.1) 8 (0.5) 12 (0.8)
YR0100S 1 (25) 5.3 (136) 3.2 (80) 2.5 (64) 2.3 (58) 1.9 (0.86) 15.3 (17.7) 18 (1.1) 26 (1.6)
YR0100F 1 (25) 5.5 (140) 3.4 (86) 2.5 (64) 2.3 (58) 1.9 (0.86) 15.3 (17.7) 18 (1.1) 26 (1.6)
YR0125F 1 1/4 (32) 5.8 (148) 3.6 (90) 2.5 (64) 3.1 (80) 2.1 (0.95) 15.2 (17.6) 18 (1.1) 26 (1.6)
YR0150F 1 1/2 (40) 7.0 (177) 5.3 (134) 4.1 (104) 2.5 (64) 4.0 (1.81) 38.7 (44.7) 50 (3.2) 70 (4.4)
YR0200F 2 (50) 7.1 (179) 5.5 (140) 4.1 (104) 2.8 (70) 6.0 (2.04) 42.1 (48.7) 50 (3.2) 70 (4.4)
YR0250F 2 1/2 (65) 9.1 (230) 7.0 (177) 5.2 (132) 2.9 (73) 9.0 (3.63) 87.2 (100.8) 80 (5.0) 120 (7.6)
Notes S = female sweat F = female NPT
Weights based on F X F connections and will vary with mixed options/connections.
All weights and dimensions are subject to minor changes.
Cv’s based on component body without flow regulator.
†For pump head calculations, add the indicated pressure drop of 4.6 ft (14 kPa) for 2-32 (14-220)
or 11.6 ft (35 kPa) for 5-60 (35-414) to calculated drops for other components
1 1/4” - 2 1/2” available with sweat adaptor
Available in ISO7
3 ports only available
8908 Governors Row / Dallas, Texas 75247

1-800-ASK-FLOW / +1 214 631 0011
www.flowdesign.com
YR
Submittal
Flow Regulator & Port Section
Flow Rates
Size psid Range Flow Rate (gpm)

2 - 32 0.5, 0.75, 1.0, 1.25, 1.5, 1.75, 2.0, 2.25, 2.5, 3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 4.5, 5.0, 6.0, 7.0, 8.0
1/2” - 3/4”
5 - 60 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0, 7.0, 8.0, 9.0, 10, 11, 12
2 - 32 0.5, 0.75, 1.0, 1.25, 1.5, 1.75, 2.0, 2.25, 2.5, 3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 4.5, 5.0, 6.0, 7.0, 8.0, 9.0, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18
1” - 1 1/4”
5 - 60 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0, 7.0, 8.0, 9.0, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26
2 - 32 5.0, 6.0, 7.0, 8.0, 9.0, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 32, 34, 36, 38, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50
1 1/2” - 2”
5 - 60 8.0, 9.0, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 28, 30, 32, 34, 36, 38, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 54, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 66, 68, 70
2 - 32 9.0, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 32, 34, 36, 38, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 60, 64, 68, 72, 76, 80
2 1/2” 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 28, 30, 32, 34, 36, 38, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 54, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 66, 68, 70, 72, 76, 80, 84,
5 - 60
88, 92, 96, 100, 104, 108, 112, 116, 120
Size kPa Range Flow Rate (lps)

14 - 220 0.03, 0.05, 0.06, 0.08, 0.09, 0.11, 0.13, 0.14, 0.16, 0.19, 0.22, 0.25, 0.28, 0.32, 0.38, 0.44, 0.50
15 - 20 mm
35 - 414 0.06, 0.09, 0.13, 0.16, 0.19, 0.25, 0.32, 0.38, 0.44, 0.50, 0.57, 0.63, 0.69, 0.76
14 - 220 0.03, 0.05, 0.06, 0.08, 0.09, 0.11, 0.13, 0.14, 0.16, 0.19, 0.22, 0.25, 0.28, 0.32, 0.38, 0.44, 0.50, 0.57, 0.63, 0.69, 0.76, 0.82, 0.88, 0.95, 1.01, 1.07, 1.14
25 - 32 mm
35 - 414 0.06, 0.09, 0.13, 0.16, 0.19, 0.25, 0.32, 0.38, 0.44, 0.50, 0.57, 0.63, 0.69, 0.76, 0.82, 0.88, 0.95, 1.01, 1.07, 1.14, 1.20, 1.26, 1.32, 1.39, 1.45, 1.51, 1.58, 1.64
0.32, 0.38, 0.44, 0.50, 0.57, 0.63, 0.69, 0.76, 0.82, 0.88, 0.95, 1.01, 1.07, 1.14, 1.26, 1.39, 1.51, 1.64, 1.77, 1.89, 2.02, 2.15, 2.27, 2.40, 2.52, 2.65, 2.78,
14 - 220
2.90, 3.03, 3.15
40 - 50 mm
0.50, 0.57, 0.63, 0.69, 0.76, 0.82, 0.88, 0.95, 1.01, 1.07, 1.14, 1.20, 1.26, 1.32, 1.39, 1.45, 1.51, 1.58, 1.64, 1.77, 1.90, 2.02, 2.15, 2.27, 2.40, 2.52, 2.65,
35 - 414
2.78, 2.90 3.03, 3.15, 3.28, 3.41, 3.53, 3.66, 3.79, 3.91, 4.04, 4.16, 4.29, 4.42
0.57, 0.63, 0.69, 0.76, 0.82, 0.88, 0.95, 1.01, 1.07, 1.14, 1.26, 1.39, 1.51, 1.64, 1.77, 1.89, 2.02, 2.15, 2.27, 2.40, 2.52, 2.65, 2.78, 2.90, 3.03, 3.15, 3.28,
14 - 220
3.53, 3.79, 4.04, 4.29, 4.54, 4.79, 5.05
65 mm
0.82, 0.88, 0.95, 1.01, 1.07, 1.14, 1.20, 1.26, 1.32, 1.39, 1.45, 1.51, 1.58, 1.64, 1.77, 1.89, 2.02, 2.15, 2.27, 2.40, 2.52, 2.65, 2.78, 2.90, 3.03 3.15, 3.28,
35 - 414
3.41, 3.53, 3.66, 3.79, 3.91, 4.04, 4.16, 4.29, 4.42, 4.54, 4.79, 5.05, 5.30, 5.55, 5.80, 6.06, 6.31, 6.56, 6.81, 7.07, 7.32, 7.57
Model Order Designation
Options w/ Locations
Model / Size Use for options that require specified locations.
1" Sweat YR Shown Dual P/T's in Ports 1 & 2 Shown GPM
12 gpm Shown
YR0100S - S / 3/4S - DP1&2 - MI - 12

Connections Options
Inlet side first. See specifications for available connections. Use for options that have specific locations.
Female Sweat X 3/4" Reduced Female Sweat Shown Metal ID Tag Shown
S = female sweat F = female NPT M = male NPT
Options Available
AV Manual Air Vent PI Plastic ID Tag SN Standard Nipple

DN Dielectric Nipple PT Pressure / Tempreture Ports XL Ext. P/T Port
HN Hose End Drain PL Plug Various convenience fittings
MI Metal ID Tag SE Stem Extender are available.

1-800-ASK-FLOW / +1 214 631 0011
www.flowdesign.com
AutoFlow Control Valves Form No.: F113.3
Installation, Operation and Maintenance Date: 8.06
Models AC, MC, WB, WG, WR, WS, WT, YR Supersedes: F113.2 11.98
Flow Flow
Flow
Flow
Model AC Model MC Model WB Model WG
Flow
Flow Flow Flow Flow
Flow
Model WR Model WS Model WT Model YR
Descriptions
Model AC • AutoFlow regulator • Ball valve Model WS • AutoFlow regulator • Ductile iron wafer body
1/2” - 2” • Port section • Union • Directional flow 2 1/2” - 30” (150# or 300#) • Directional flow
• Dual P/T ports • SWT or FPT (ball end) • Dual P/T ports • Wafer style • Shipped
by SWT, FPT or MPT (union end) with rods & nuts for use with customer-
One reduction size available on union end - supplied companion flanges
1/2” - 2” SWT, FPT or MPT • 16” - 30” models have fabricated-steel wafer
body for 150# ASA flanges
Model MC • AutoFlow regulator • Ball valve • Union
1/2” - 3/4” • Four accessory port locations • Pressure / Model WT • AutoFlow regulator and butterfly valve
Temperature ports are standard 2 1/2” - 4” with reduced threaded inlet designed to
mate with threaded brass ATC
Model WB • Model WS or WU flow control valve • Dielectric fitting included • Directional flow
2” - 8” with rods, nuts and Model BF butterfly valve. • Dual P/T ports • Shipped assembled
• 4” - 8” models have spacer flanges between
valves • Shipped unassembled. Model YR • AutoFlow regulator • Port section
• Does not include mating flange. 1/2” - 2 1/2” • Directional flow • Dual P/T ports
• Brass body • 1/2” - 1” SWT X SWT or FPT
Model WG • AutoFlow regulator • Grooved Ends X FPT; 1 1/4” - 2 1/2” FPT X FPT SWT X
2 1/2” - 14” • Directional flow • Steel / Iron SWT available for 1 1/4” - 2” with addition of
• Dual P/T ports brass sweat adapters
Model WR • AutoFlow regulator and butterfly valve

3” - 6” with reduced inlet flange designed to mate
with flanged ATC valve • Shipped
assembled • Dual P/T ports • Directional
flow
Flow Design Inc. / 8908 Governors Row / Dallas, Texas 75247 A division of IMI Indoor Climate
1-800-ASK-FLOW / +1 214 631 0011
www.flowdesign.com
Model Designation Example:
Options w/ Locations
Model / Size Use for options that require specified locations.
1" Low Flow AC Shown Dual P/T’s in Ports 2 & 4 and Air Vent in Port 1 Shown GPM
12 GPM Shown
ACL100 - FS / 3/4FS - DP2&4, AV1 - MI - 12

Connections Options
Ball valve end first. See specifications for available connections. Use for options that have specific locations.
Female Sweat X 3/4" Reduced Female Sweat Shown Metal ID Tag Shown
[ L = low flow range (2-32) H = high flow range (5-60) ]
OR
1 (2-32), 2 (5-60), 3 (3-20), 4 (5-40), 5 (7-45)
G = grooved FS = female sweat MS = male sweat FT = female thread MT = male thread
Options Available
AA Automatic Air Vent EH Extended Handle with PL Plug

AV Manual Air Vent Memory Stop SE Stem Extender
DX Dual XL P/T Ports (in lieu of std. HN Hose End Drain Valve T4 1/4” Accessory Port
ports) PI Plastic Tag
Installation
• There are no minimum straight-piping requirements Flange and Groove Body Products
for the inlet or the outlet. Most flange products are not furnished with flange gaskets
or bolts, and unless specified otherwise have 150# raised-
• Valves may be installed in horizontal or vertical lines.
face flanges. Standard installation techniques covering
The vertical flow can be up or down.
flanged products should be followed. All products have a
• The flow arrow on the valve body must be pointing in flow direction arrow. Care must be taken to locate the
the direction of flow. valve so that the arrow is pointed in the direction of the
flow.
• Avoid placing the valve close to a pump discharge.
Allow 10’ before the valve if possible. Grooved end products are to be installed using a “Victaulic-
style coupling”. The same installation techniques used to
• The model number gives the following information:
install standard “Victaulic” products should be followed.
body style, line size, end connections, P/T ports,
Care must be taken to assure the flow direction arrow is in
GPM flow settings.
the proper location.

1-800-ASK-FLOW / +1 214 631 0011
www.flowdesign.com
AutoFlow Control Valves
Installation, Operation and Maintenance
Models AC, WB, WG, WR, WS, WT, YR
Installation (continued)
Wafer Body Valves (Model WB, WG, WR, WS, WT) 3. Make sure the inside diameter of the customer-supplied
1. Make sure the long bolts and nuts to secure the gaskets does not interfere with the flow.
wafer body are included with the valve.
4. The pressure or P/T ports should be vertical up. These
2. Install the wafer body between 150# or 300# flanges ports can be used to vent air from each side of the body
making sure the flow arrow is in the direction of flow. after filling and start-up.
Operation
General b. A differential pressure gauge can simultaneously

Flow control valves are purchased for a specific GPM flow measure from each port and read the DP directly.
rate and are equipped with a spring-loaded piston to main-
Using a Strainer
tain that flow rate. Five spring ranges are available for
A Y-strainer is recommended to prevent clogging. A 40-
AutoFlow valves. The first number is the differential pres-
mesh screen is recommended for flows 1.5 GPM or less.
sure (psi) needed to achieve the GPM rating. The second
number is the maximum D.P. where the rated GPM will be Accuracy
maintained. The model number will show the spring range Accuracy is rated at 5% of the specified flow rate. Accuracy
of the product. will vary with the temperature of the incoming fluid and spe-
cific gravity of the fluid. Rated flow rates are suitable for gly-
Example:
Model XX (-) col solutions up to 50 percent.
(-) can be L = 2-32, H = 5-60 or 1 (2-32), 2 (5-60), 3 (3-20),
4 (5-40), 5 (7-45) Air Purge
Verifying Flow AutoFlow valves will not work properly if air is trapped in the
The flow can be verified by measuring the DP (differential housing. Models with wafer bodies will always have a small
pressure) across the valve using the portsprovided. If it amount of air because its body is higher than the top of the
measures between 2-32 (or other) the flow is usually in the pipe. Air can cause a clicking noise in some valves.
specified flow range. Debris plugging one of the flow ports
Air can easily be vented using the pressure or PT ports. On
will cause the DP to read high, so make sure the unit is
small valves, 2” and under, the upstream port can be used.
clean when verifying flow. There are several ways to mea-
On larger steel valves, both ports should be purged
sure DP:
because air can reside on both sides of the mid-plate. A
a. A pressure gauge with a P/T adapter can measure simple way to purge air with PT ports is to use a 1/4” manu-
the pressure on each side of the valve. The differences al air vent (Model AV) with a long gauge adapter (Model
between these readings is the DP. GA30).
Maintenance
• There is no maintenance required on Flow Control removing the cartridge from the controller. Specific
valves. instructions for making the change come with new car-
tridge assemblies. The change takes only 5 to 15 min-
• If inlet strainers are used they should be inspected and
utes with ordinary tools. Changing cartridges on larger
cleaned after start-up and every six months thereafter.
valves should be done at the factory.
• The controlled flow rate can be changed in the field, on
Call for an RMA number before returning equipment to the
1/2” - 2 1/2” AC, KY & YR Models, by replacing the car-
factory.
tridge assembly in the control valve. This requires
See next page for Troubleshooting information

AutoFlow Control Valves
Installation, Operation and Maintenance
Models AC, WB, WG, WR, WS, WT, YR
Troubleshooting Guide
Possible Cause Possible Solution
• PROBLEM: Low Water Flow
1) Strainer clogged 1) Back-flush or manually clean the coil strainer.
2) Wrong location 2) Make sure the valve is in the proper location with the correct GPM.
3) Low system pressure 3) If possible, check the pressure at the hook-up supply and return
valves. The drop through the coil and ATC valve may be too large
for the available head.
4) Balance valve plugged 4) The AutoFlow valve may have debris. Remove cartridge, clean and
replace.
5) ATC valve port closed or wrong Cv 5) Make sure the ATC is wide open and has proper Cv.
6) System valve is partially closed 6) Open all manual system valves.
• PROBLEM: High Water Flow
1) Wrong location 1) Make sure the valve is in the proper location with the correct GPM.
2) System pressure too high 2) Check the differential pressure across the AutoFlow valve. If larger
then 32 psi, close the return-side ball valve until the difference is less
then 32 psi. The spring range on the cartridge could be changed to 5-60
psi which will also solve the problem.
3) AutoFlow valve backward 3) Check the flow arrow and reverse valve if necessary.
• PROBLEM: Noise or Vibration
1) AutoFlow valve clicking or noisy a) Check the Delta P across the AutoFlow valve. If at or near the
maximum, it may be necessary to replace the cartridge with a different
spring range.
b) Make sure the air is purged from the system. Air can cause a clicking
noise. WS valves require air purging on each side of the
mid-plate.
c) Two AutoFlow valves close coupled in series can cause pulsing.

1-800-ASK-FLOW / +1 214 631 0011
www.flowdesign.com
GE Healthcare
MR450, MR750,
MR450w, MR450w GEM
MR750w, & MR750w GEM
Pre–Magnet Delivery System Installation
Technical Publication
5500097
Rev 6
DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION
All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent,
have notation “damage in shipment” written on all copies of the freight or express
bill before delivery is accepted or “signed for” by a General Electric representative
or a hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be
reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days
after receipt, and the contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier. A
transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not
requested within this 14 day period.
File a report with
D Call 1–800–548–3366 and use option 8.
D Contact your local service coordinator for more information on this process.
Rev. 08/15/2003
© 2008–2011 General Electric Company

GE Medical Systems, a General Electric Company, going to market as GE Healthcare
3000 N. Grandview Boulevard
Waukesha, Wisconsin 53188
USA
www.gehealthcare.com
MR450, MR750, MR450w, MR450w GEM, MR750w & MR750w GEM
GE Healthcare Pre–Magnet Delivery System Installation
REV 6 DIRECTION 5500097
1 of 10
2 of 10
3 of 10
4 of 10
5 of 10
6 of 10
7 of 10
8 of 10
9 of 10
This page left blank intentionally.
10 of 10
REVISION HISTORY
REV DATE PRIMARY REASON FOR CHANGE
1 . . May 12, 2008 . . Preliminary release for verification.
2 . . May 15, 2008 . . Section 1: Minor changes to wording. Section 2: Corrected spelling errors. Added power cord service loop in HEC cabinet.
Release for validation.
3 . . Apr 17, 2009 . . Updated document title to Discovery MR450 & MR750 Pre–Magnet Delivery System Installation. Section 2–6: Added
illustrationshowing service loop on top of power box and the power wire connections to the terminal strip inside the power box
(PQR’s 13233956, 13236584). Section 2–7–1: Revised section to clarify the orientation of the SPW and Penetration Panel
frames. Section 2–9: Added instructions to refer to Direction 5500102 for instructions on installing the curtain covers in the
magnet room (PQR 13224769).
4 . . . Nov 2, 2009 . . Updated document title to Discovery MR450, MR750& MR450w Pre–Magnet Delivery System Installation. Section 2–7–1:
Updated instuctions for installing PEN and SPW mounting frames (PQR 13280034).
5 . . Jun 21, 2010 . . Section 2–3: Removed MDP part number (MRIhc47301). Section 2–4–2: Added note for retaining cabinet shipping brackets
for seismic anchoring (MRIhc49004). Section 2–5: Created sub–sections for customer facililty power and facility waer. Sec
2–5–1: Updated connection of power wiires in HEC power box (SCR DOC0622354). Sec 2–5–2: Added Caution to make sure
connections are secure before performing leak test (MRIhc50333). Updated views with new HEC where applicable (ECO
2100354). Section 2–6: Added instructions for installing HEC–CRY power cord (MRIhc48837 & MRIhc49393) and using the
power box strain relief for securing the cord (MRIhc49317). Section 2–7: Added instructions for installing HEC–CRY cooling
hose kit (SPR’s MRIhc48837 and MRIhc49003). Added instruction for installing insulation sleeves and duct tape between
sections before routing hoses in overhead cable trays (MRIhc50838). Revised flare fitting connectoin instructions at IN and
OUT ports (MRIhc49318). Section 2–8: Added this new section for installing hose insulation kit and applying duct tape between
sections (SPR MRIhc48856). Section 2–9–2: Added equipment room side and magnet room side designation (MRIhc51461).
Section 2–10: Added section 2–10–2, Cable Curtain installation for MR450w magnet enclosure (ECO 2099113 & SPR
MRIhc48838).
6 . . . Jul 22, 2011 . . Updated document title to MR450, MR750, MR450w, MR450w GEM, MR750w & MR750w GEM Pre–Magnet Delivery System
Installation due to introduction of new products. Updated information throughout manual accordingly. Section 2–10: Added
section 2–10–3 and 2–10–4.
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

PAGE REV PAGE REV PAGE REV PAGE REV PAGE REV
Title Page . . . . . . . . . . . 6 TAB 2
Damage in Trans. . . . . – COMPONENT
INSTALLATION
Language Policy . . . . . 6 * 2–1 to 2–34 . . . . . . . . . 6
A ..................6
i...................6
TAB 3
TAB 1 COMPLETION
GETTING STARTED CHECKLIST
1–1 to 1–10 . . . . . . . . . 6 3–1 to 3–2 . . . . . . . . . . 6
A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 – GETTING STARTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
SECTION 2 – COMPONENT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
SECTION 3 – COMPLETION CHECKLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
i TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 – GETTING STARTED
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1–1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
1–2 SITE READY CHECK FOR MECHANICAL INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
1–3 NON–ENGLISH LABEL INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
1–4 REQUIRED TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
1–5 BASIC SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
1–6 PRODUCT DELIVERY INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6
1–7 DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6
1–8 PRODUCT LOCATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7
1–9 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8
1–9–1 INSTALLATION FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8
1–9–2 INSTALLATION FLOWCHART EXPLANATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8
1–10 INSTALLATION FLOWCHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9
1–10–1 PREREQUISITES FOR SYSTEM INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9
1–10–2 PRE–MAGNET DELIVERY MECHANICAL INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–10
1–1
1–1 INTRODUCTION
This manual provides instructions to install the following components of the MR750 3.0T, MR450 1.5T or the MR450w
System prior to delivery and installation of magnet.
Main Disconnect Panel LOTO Placard
HEC Cabinet containing the Cooling Loops, and Gradient Blower.
HEC to Cryogen Chiller hoses and insulation
SPW and PEN Panel mounting frames
Magnet room Curtain Rail/Cable Concealment Kit
This Direction covers the following catalog:
M7000WM – Preinstallation Collector for Discovery MR750 3.0T, MR450 1.5T and Optima MR450w 1.5T.
1–2 SITE READY CHECK FOR MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

Before equipment is delivered, one of the following applicable manuals must be complete to avoid delays and confusion.
Pre–installation work must be complete. Refer to Direction 5500101, Discovery MR750 3.0T
Preinstallation manual
Pre–installation work must be complete. Refer to Direction 5500109, Discovery MR450 1.5T
Pre–installation work must be complete. Refer to Direction 5670001, Optima MR450w 1.5T
Pre–installation work must be complete. Refer to Direction 5670003, Discovery MR750w 3.0T
1–3 NON–ENGLISH LABEL INSTALLATION

Components and accessories delivered to this site may have English labels attached to them. For non–English sites,
optional multi–language labels have also been supplied.
If required, non–English labels should be attached over the English labels.
For Surface Coils and Coil Cables – Apply the appropriate label over the English label. The label is
included with the coil component.
For all other labels, follow the label update procedures in the manual or on the applicable
multi–language label sheet.
Verify at the end of the installation that the original English labels are covered by new labels representing the native
language of the customer.
1–2
1–4 REQUIRED TOOLS
WARNING!
FERROUS MATERIAL HAZARD! IF MAGNET IS ENERGIZED, TOOLS AND PARTS REQUIRED

FOR THIS INSTALLATION THAT CONTAIN FERROUS MATERIAL AND WILL BE STRONGLY
ATTRACTED TO MAGNET AND MAY BECOME DANGEROUS PROJECTILES. KEEP ALL
FERROUS TOOLS AS FAR FROM THE MAGNET AS POSSIBLE.
Tools to install the system are listed below in Table 1–1.
TABLE 1–1
INSTALLATION EQUIPMENT
ITEM GE PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
1 46–271138G1 Restricted Access Control Kit. Contains two plastic warning signs for posting at site during installation
and service activity.
2 2319156 Aluminum platform ladder, 47.5 inches (1206.5mm) (See Note 1)
3 46–320273G3 or G4 Non–Magnetic Tool Kit – Universal (See Note 2)

Both metric and inch Non–Magnetic Tool Kits needed. May substitute both of the following kits:
46–320273G1 Non–Magnetic Tool Kit – Metric
46–320273G2 Non–Magnetic Tool Kit – Inch
4 ––– Volt Meter
5 ––– Extension cords, with ground conductor
6 ––– Power strip, grounded type, with minimum of five outlets
7 ––– Plastic or aluminum flashlight
8 ––– Non–magnetic level
9 ––– Non–magnetic tape rule, 12 ft
10 ––– Assorted drill bits
11 ––– Inspection mirror
12 ––– Hobby and utility knives
Note 1 Supplied as part of System.

2 Supplied by GE until turnover of system to customer, then available as part of a GE Cryogen and/or Service Contract.
1–3
1–5 BASIC SYSTEM

The complete basic system, Illustration 1–1, consists of the following major equipment:
Magnet Enclosure and Magnet Accessories
– 1.5T (15 kilogauss) LCC Magnet
– 1.5T (15 kilogauss) MR450w Magnet
– 3.0T (30 kilogauss) LCC300 Magnet
or
– 3.0T (30 Kilogauss) MR750w Magnet
Shield/Cryo Cooler Compressor Cabinet
Gradient and RF body coils and Head Coil
Main Disconnect Panel
System electronics cabinets:
PGR Cabinet containing XGD Gradient Drivers and Power Distribution Unit module with unregulated
transformer 200/380/400/415/480 Volt, 50/60 Hz with power filter, CAM Chassis with boards for either
16 or 32 channels, components for the Volume Reconstruction Engine (VRE), Narrow Band RF
Amplifier
– HEC Cabinet containing the Cryo Coolers, Cooling Loops, and Gradient Blower.
– PEN Cabinet containing the PHPS, Scan Room power suppply, CAN Fiber I/F, T/R DD Driver
module, and HO Shim Filter (optional)
– SPW (Second Penetration Wall) containing Gradient Filter, Scan Room Filters & I/F, and Ramp/
Shim access
Operator Workspace equipment:

, LCD
Widescreen monitor, keyboard, SCIM, mouse and mouse pad, and chair
Pneumatic Patient Alert System
Patient Transport Table and cradle
Patient accessories such as: a phantom kit, patient log book, head cushion and sponges, chin and
forehead straps, body wedges, knee cushions, and security/restraint straps
Gating accessories which include: patient cardiac leads, peripheral gating probe, and respiratory
bellows
1–4
1–5 BASIC SYSTEM (Continued)
Patient
Transporrt Patient
Transporrt
MR450w GEM MR450

MR750W MR750
MR750W GEM MR450w
Magnet Enclosure Magnet Enclosure
(MG2) (MG2)
Main
Magnet
Monitor
Î
Disconnect (MON)
SPT Phantom Panel
Set Storage Cart (MDP)
Operator
Workspace
(OW)
Cryo Cooler
Heat Exchanger Penetration Secondary Compressor
Power Electronics Penetration Wall Cabinet
Cabinet Cabinet Panel Cabinet
(HEC) (PEN) (SPW) (CRY)
(PGR)
DVMR SYSTEMS
ILLUSTRATION 1–1
1–5
1–6 PRODUCT DELIVERY INSTRUCTIONS

Note
Two or more people are required to accept delivery of equipment due to weight and size of
cabinets and other components.
The “Shipping Document” lists catalog numbers delivered. Review and confirm that order is delivered complete. Check
impact on installation schedule if Catalogs and/or packing boxes are missing and/or noted as shipped short.
Labels that are attached to the outside of packing boxes summarize box contents. The labels are color coded for
different installation areas as follows:
Green – Equipment Room
Purple – Operator’s Room
Orange – Magnet Room
Yellow – Post–installation (Phantoms, Coils).
“Product Delivery Instructions” (PDI) specify box contents, part numbers, and shipping procedure. The PDI is
numbered according to the catalog number (for example, PDI – M3333TA is for the Fixed Site Installation Kit). Lists of
items included with each box are detailed by separate checklists, or a separate sheet that provides a summery of that
box contents. Refer to PDI and packing lists for information specific to your shipment.
A set of service and operator manuals is delivered with the Fixed Site Kit. Refer to checklists packed with “Technical
Publication” boxes for a list of delivered documents.
1–7 DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION

All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent, have notation “damage in
shipment” written on all copies of the freight or express bill before delivery is accepted or “signed for” by a General
Electric representative or a hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be reported to the
carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held
for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested
within this 14 day period.
File a report with
Call 1–800–548–3366 and use option 8.
Contact your local service coordinator for more information on this process.
1–6
1–8 PRODUCT LOCATOR

The Global Install Base Database (also known as Product Locator System) tracks shipment, trans–shipment, and field
location of the serialized models. There are now two methods for submitting Product Locator information.
1. At this time, for U.S. ONLY, the preferred method of submitting information is the FE Site Verification Web Site at:
http://gein2.med.ge.com/gib
The FE Site Verification consists of three components that are available on the web from the main menu. They
are:
Install/deinstall product locator model and serial numbers
Add/modify ship to address information
Update CARES FE data for primary/secondary FEs
To obtain a copy of the FE training tutorial for using this website, a downloadable copy is available at the following:
Product Locator Support Central Page – http://supportcentral.ge.com/15563
2. One “Shipping Card” is filled out and submitted when shipped (extra cards are supplied for trans–shipments be-
tween storage and distribution points), and the “Installation Card” and extra shipment cards are attached.
Verify that serial and model number on each rating plate matches installation card numbers before removing installation
card. Note that there may be one or more shipment cards and bar code labels with the installation card. These shipment
cards are used to trace the transfer of serialized units between various inventory storage and distribution points until the
product reaches its final installation destination. Process just the installation card and discard any extra shipment cards
and labels.
1–7
1–9 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
1–9–1 Installation Flow

Note
All on–site construction must be completed before equipment is delivered and installation starts.
Attempting to install the system while construction is being completed will impact installation
efficiency and further delay site completion. Making sure that all preinstallation and construction work
is completed before equipment is delivered will usually result in an earlier turnover date.
The flow chart on the next page should be followed for an orderly and efficient installation of the Pre–magnet delivery
components of the system being installed. Note that many procedures may be performed in parallel and may be
performed in any order according to the specific situation of each site.
Note
The flow chart references the Tab number and/or Section number for the respective installation
procedures. These procedures are similar to cable maps in that they are to be removed from this
binder and used at the location where hardware installation is being performed. The Procedures must
be returned to the binder for future reference upon completion of the installation.
This installation flowchart has been developed assuming that all components for this part of the installation have been
delivered together. Make sure that every part required is available before starting.
1–9–2 Installation Flowchart Explanation

Shown below are three examples of the flow chart Installation Procedures and an explanation of the areas within the
procedures.
Use the correct Magnet Manual

that applies to the System being DIR 5500101
installed to locate the installation MR750 3.0T System
procedure listed below Preinstallation
Tab within this manual where the

Section listed below is located TAB 6
Section 6–1
UNPACKING CABLES
Section within the Tab where the
Installation Procedure is located
LEGEND FOR FOLLOWING INSTALLATION FLOWCHART
MX INDICATES MILESTONE COMPLETION GOAL IN DAYS
OR INDICATES AND OPTIONAL PATH DEPENDING ON SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
1–8
1–10 INSTALLATION FLOWCHART
1–10–1 PREREQUISITES FOR SYSTEM INSTALLATION
Site Installations Required Prior to System Mechanical Installation
DIR 5670001 DIR 5670003

MR450w & MR450w GEM OR MR750w & MR750w GEM
1.5T System Preinstallation 1.5T System Preinstallation
DIR 5500101 DIR 5500109

MR750 3.0T System OR MR450 1.5T System
Preinstallation Preinstallation
SITE
CUSTOMER MAGNET ROOM MAGNET ROOM ELECTRICAL
SUPPLIED WATER EXHAUST FAN CRYOGEN VENT WIRING AND
COOLING SYSTEM INSTALLED & TO BUILDING HVAC
INSTALLED OPERATIONAL INSTALLED COMPLETE
Procedures to be Completed by FE or
Mechanical Installers
START
TAB 1
Section 1–6
PRODUCT DELIVERY INSTRUCTIONS
FE
TAB 1
Section 1–7
DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION
MARK OFF
FE
PERFORMED TAB 1
ITEMS Section 1–8
PRODUCT LOCATOR
IMPORTANT : PER ISO
9001 REQUIREMENTS
1–9
1–10–2 PRE–MAGNET DELIVERY MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
MARK OFF
A CUSTOMER
PERFORMED ELECTRICAL
ITEMS
CONTRACTOR
IMPORTANT : PER ISO LOCKOUT & TAGOUT FACILITY
9001 REQUIREMENTS POWER MAIN DISCONNECT
GE FE or
CUSTOMER CONTRACTORS MECHANICAL INSTALLER
ELECTRICAL
CONTRACTOR
Section 2–2
Section 2–3 POSITION HEC CABINET
INSTALL MDP
(MAIN DISCONNECT PANEL)
ELECTRICAL Section 2–4
CONTRACTOR INSTALL LOCKOUT–TAGOUT
PLACARD
Section 2–3
CONNECT FACILITY
POWER TO MDP
Section 2–6
ELECTRICAL CONNECT POWER CORD FROM
CONTRACTOR CRYO–COOLER TO HEC
Section 2–5
CONNECT POWER FROM
MDP TO HEC CABINET
Section 2–7 & 2–8
CUSTOMER INSTALLATION OF HEC–CRY
PLUMBER HOSES AND INSULATION
Section 2–5
CONNECT CUSTOMER SUPPLIED
WATER LINES TO HEC CABINET Section 2–9
INSTALL PENETRATION PANEL
GENERAL MOUNTING FRAMES
CONTRACTOR
Section 2–10
INSTALL CURTAIN RAIL FRAME IN
MAGNET ROOM CEILNG
(Customer Option)
Section 3
SYSTEM MECHANICAL
CHECKLIST COMPLETION
PRE–MAGNET
DELIVERY INSTALLATION M1
COMPLETE
1–10
SECTION 2 – COMPONENT INSTALLATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
2–1 COMPONENT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2–2 HEC CABINET INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2–3 INSTALLATION OF MAIN DISCONNECT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–8
2–4 INSTALL LOCK–OUT TAG–OUT PLACARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–8
2–5 CUSTOMER CONNECTIONS TO HEC CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
2–6 CRYO–COOLER COMPRESSOR POWER CORD CONNECTION AT HEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11
2–7 HEC TO CRYO–COOLER HOSE KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–14
2–8 HEC TO CRYO–COOLER HOSE INSULATION KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–16
2–9 INSTALL RF SCREEN ROOM WALL MOUNTING FRAMES AND SPW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17
2–10 MAGNET ENCLOSURE CABLE CURTAIN INSTALLATION (Customer Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–19
2–10–1 MR750 CABLE CURTAIN INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–19
2–10–2 MR450 CABLE CURTAIN INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–25
2–10–3 MR450w GEM CABLE CONCEALMENT KIT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–31
2–10–4 MR750w & MR750w GEM CABLE CONCEALMENT KIT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . 2–33
COMPONENT INSTALLATION

2–1 COMPONENT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

Positioning of cabinets and components is critical for installing cables and post–installation system operation. Refer to
architectural site layouts for:
D Location of all cabinets and related equipment.
D For seismic anchoring (where required)

! " # !
WARNING!
DUE TO WEIGHT OF CABINETS, AT LEAST TWO PEOPLE ARE REQUIRED TO

MOVE ANY CABINET

2–2 HEC CABINET INSTALLATION
2–2–1 HEC CABINET POSITIONING PREPARATION

The illustration below shows a typical layout for the equipment room.
Refer to architectural site layout drawings to determine location of HEC cabinet.
D If available, use the cabinet floor layout templates for positioning cabinets
D If templates are not available, using the minimum spacing distances as noted below, apply tape on floor to
mark final location of front corners of cabinets.
The PEN and PGR cabinets will be delivered and installed after installation of the magnet.
Legend:
A = 4 inch (102mm) minimum space distance from wall
ÎÎ
B = 15 inch (380mm) minimum space distance at side of cabinet
ÎÎ = Final location of PEN and PGR Cabinets. Moved into position
ÍÍ after routing of cables in overhead cable trays.
ÍÍ = Typical location for Cryogen Compressor, which is delivered and

installed with the magnet.
Wall
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
A
CRYO PEN

HEC PGR
COMP
ÍÍÍÍ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
B B B

2–2–2 CABINET WITH SHIPPING PALLET

The HEC cabinets is delivered to site secured to a pallet. The cabinet must be removed from the pallet and positioned
in Equipment Room according to site layout plans. The cabinet moving dollies that were delivered to site on a pallet are
required to move the HEC cabinet off the pallet.
2–2–3 CABINET MOVING DOLLIES

The cabinet moving dollies have been shipped to site on a separate pallet. If dollies are not on site, they can be
ordered online at www.umi–dollyshop.com. For technical questions, contact: UMI, 1–800–638–7457.
Note: The dollies have the following features to aid in their use:
D Wheel Locking Pin – Keeps the wheels locked into a certain direction
D Parking Brakes – For holding the cabinet in position
D Slide and Lock – The dollies can be removed in limited space (15 inches or 380mm)
D Twinning Hardware – hardware to connect each dolly to the other dolly during transport without a cabinet
1. Unfasten and remove dollies from shipping pallet.
2. If dollies need to be moved to different area where the HEC cabinet is located, attach the two dollies together
using the twinning hardware. Refer to note above.

2–2–4 MOVE HEC CABINET INTO EQUIPMENT ROOM

1. Unfasten screws for each angle shipping bracket and remove bracket from each side of cabinet.
IMPORTANT!
The screws and brackets used to secure the cabinets to the pallets during shipment of cabinets are
also used to secure the cabinet to the floor at sites requiring seismic support. DO NOT DISCARD
BRACKETS AND FASTENING SCREWS. Retain and save for customer.
2. Install the six bushings, three on each side, to the bottom of the cabinet.
3. Maneuver the dolly so that all three bushings slip into the slide lock on the attachment plate.
4. Slide the dolly sideways to position the bushings in the lifting part of the attachment plate.
'
&

2–2–4 MOVE HEC CABINET INTO EQUIPMENT ROOM (continued)

5. Raise the dolly by turning the jack screw clockwise. This will lock the dolly into position.
6. Secure to dollies with strap. Make sure the strap goes through the slot of the attachment plate and the clamp is on
flat surface of cabinet.
7. Tighten strap and close clamp.
8. Lift cabinet off of pallet by turning the jack screw clockwise until the cabinet surface is free from the pallet surface.
Note: Alternate raising each dolly in 1/4 inch (6mm) increments until the cabinet is above the pallet.

(
)
9. Slide the pallet out from under the cabinet.

10. Lower the cabinet by turning the jack screw counter–clockwise until the cabinet is about 1 inch (25mm) above the
floor. Note: Alternate lowering each side of cabinet.
11. Move the cabinet into the equipment room.
$
$
$$

2–2–4 MOVE HEC CABINET INTO EQUIPMENT ROOM (continued)

12. Refer to Section 2–2–1 for placement of cabinet and lower cabinet into position.
13. Leave dollies attached to cabinet. They will be used for moving and positioning the PGR and PEN cabinets when
they are delivered to site.
14. Remove strap and store in bag delivered with dollies that contained the bushings.
$&
$%
$'
2–3 INSTALLATION OF MAIN DISCONNECT PANEL

The MDP (Main Disconnect Panel) is to be mounted and connected to facility power by customer electrician. Refer to
architectural site layout drawings for specifications and mounting locations.
2–4 INSTALL LOCK–OUT TAG–OUT PLACARD

The Lock–out Tag–out placard (5197122) must be secured to the wall next to the MDP.
1. Remove covering of double–sided tape on back side of placard.
2. Press and secure to surface next to MDP.
$ %

2–5 CUSTOMER CONNECTIONS TO HEC CABINET

Customer is to provide and install liquid coolant, pipe/hoses, filters and connectors to the HEC cabinet.
Customer shall also provide a flow meter to display coolant flow.
Customer is also providing and installing facility power to the HEC cabinet from the MDP.
D The Power Box in the HEC is hinged so it can be swung out for access to components behind it. Therefore,
hard conduit cannot be used for connecting facility power to the HEC at the connection point.
D Make sure to include a service loop for both the incoming power and the power cable routed to the
Cryo–Cooler or step–up transformer. Refer to following note.
Note
For sites requiring a step–up transformer, customer is to provide transformer and power cable be-
tween HEC cabinet and transformer. Instructions for installing transformer and connection of power
cables are provided with step–up transformer. Run E0009 will be routed and connected between the
step–up transformer and the Cryo–Cooler compressor.
2–5–1 Facility Power Installed by Customer

The space above the power box has been provided for this service loop. Refer to site drawings for specifications.
Connection to
customer supplied
power from MDP
Power Cable
from Cryo–Cooler Power Cable
Service Loop from MDP
Service Loop
TOP VIEW
L2 L3
Power Box L1
RED ORN GND
BLK
FRONT VIEW WIRE CONNECTIONS IN POWER BOX
2–5–2 Facility Water Installed by Customer

The RETURN and SUPPLY connection points are indicated below. Refer to site drawings for specifications on routing
and connections of customer supplied components.
The cooling water to the Cryo–cooler is a direct feed from the facility water through the HEC. The Cryo–cooler
Compressor connection points have pre–installed shipping caps which will be removed when the hoses to the
Cryo–cooler are installed.

Before performing any leak tests at the HEC, the facility water should not be turned on unless
the pre–installed shipping caps are securely in place at the top of the HEC or the Cryo–cooler
hoses from the HEC are completely installed.
Connection to GE Connection to GE
Connection to Connection to supplied Gray hose to supplied Yellow hose to
customer liquid customer liquid Cryo–cooler Compressor Cryo–cooler Compressor
coolant RETURN coolant SUPPLY (shipping cap installed) (shipping cap installed)

2–6 CRYO–COOLER COMPRESSOR POWER CORD CONNECTION AT HEC

Power to the cryogen compressor for MR750/450/450w is fed through the Heat Exchanger Cabinet (HEC). The power
cord (2200835) supplied with the cryogen compressor in the magnet installation collector is to be wired into the power
box inside the HEC.
1. Route power cord (2200835) through overhead cable tray to each cabinet.
2. The power cable installation instructions for connection to the terminal strip at the compressor is located in the
applicable Technical Instruction manual shipped with the compressor.
Note: The power cord is delivered to site with ring terminals at one end and stripped wires at the other end.
D If a Sumitomo CSW–71D compressor is being installed, then the ring terminal end will be connected to the
compressor.
D If a Sumitomo F–50 compressor is being installed, then the ring terminals have to be cut off and the wire
stripped 1/2 inch (13mm) for connection to compressor pressure connectors.
3. Loosen the four captured screws at the front of the HEC power box and remove cover.
4. Remove the strain relief provided on the end of the power cord and discard strain relief. Route power cable to top
of power box.
5. Feed the power cord into the supplied strain relief at the top of the HEC.
'
&

2–6 CRYO–COOLER COMPRESSOR POWER CORD CONNECTION AT HEC (Continued)

6. Attach ground wire to the ground stud in the power box. The incoming main electrical ground shares the same
stud. The cryogen compressor ground terminal should be placed on the stud with a nut between it and the main
electrical ground. This ensures the main electrical ground will never be lifted if the cryogen compressor ground
ever needs to be removed.
IMPORTANT! The cryogen compressor is phase sensitive. Make sure L1, L2, and L3 are connected
appropriately at the cryogen compressor and that the incoming main electrical wires to the HEC are wired to the
correct L1, L2, and L3 locations inside the HEC power box.
7. Route the L1, L2, and L3 cryogen compressor power cord wires to circuit breaker.
8. Insert the stripped ends of the wires into the bottom of the indicated breaker labeld CRY CB in the HEC power
box. The wire sequence, from left to right, is L1, L2, L3. Tighten screws and inspect that each wire is clamped
securely to the circuit breaker.
9. Tighten the strain relief at the top of the power box to securely clamp onto the power cord’s conduit.
10. The conduit MUST be arranged with a service loop as shown.
$

2–6 CRYO–COOLER COMPRESSOR POWER CORD CONNECTION AT HEC (Continued)

The completed installation should look like the following:
11. Reinstall front panel on HEC power box.

2–7 HEC TO CRYO–COOLER HOSE KIT

The HEC–CRY Hose Kit (5268715) is delivered to site and will be connected to Cryo–Cooler Compressor which is
delivered with magnet.
Refer to illustration below for location of hoses routed in Equipment Room in the overhead cable trays. Make sure
cables are in their designated areas of the trays. All future cable and hose locations are shown as reference.
GRAY and
YELLOW Hoses
Power and Data Cables Water, gas, & air hoses

Hose and Fitting Installation Notes:
D To prevent cracking of fittings, hold fittings in the HEC stationary with wrench while flare connections are being
made.
D A small amount of water may be applied to push–lok barbs to facilitate insertion into hoses.
D DO NOT use teflon tape on threads that have a flare fitting.
Air and Water Hose Installation Schematic:
ÍÍ Í Ï
HEC Cryo Supply
Gray
ÍÍ Í Ï Cryo In
HEC Cryo Return
ÍÍ Í
Yellow
Ï Cryo Out
ÍÍÍÍ
0.5” ID Push–Lok Gray Hose
with Insulation sleeves ÍÍÍÍ
ÏÏ
0.5” Ball valve with 0.5” Push–Lok fittings
GE Part Number 5338546
ÏÏ
GE Part # 5264039 & 5197470 0.5” 37 degree JIC Male to 0.375” Male BPST
GE Part Number 5268775 or equivalent
0.5” ID Push–Lok Yellow Hose
with Insulation sleeves 0.5” 37 degree Female Flare to 0.5” push–Lok. 316 SS
GE Part # 5264063 & 5197470 GE Part Number 5272163–2
0.5” 37 degree Female Flare to 0.5” push–Lok.

GE Part Number 5272163
1. Route GRAY and YELLOW hoses from HEC thru the designated overhead cable tray to the designated area
where the Cryogen Compressor will be installed when it is delivered with the magnet in the next system
installation phase. If preferable, insulation sleeves in Section 2–8 can be installed at this time.
2. Cut coolant hoses to length. Make sure there is enough extra hose for a service loop at the Compressor end.

2–7 HEC TO CRYO–COOLER HOSE KIT (Continued)

NOTE: Install the hose barbs and connectors called out in the following steps and not the hose barbs delivered with the
F–50H compressor. This is for ease of disconnecting during service and to ensure proper hose barb connec-
tion to the hose. DO NOT use hose clamps with Push–Lok hose barbs.
3. At the HEC Cabinet end of each hose, install the stainless steel 0.5 inch 37 degree Female Push–Lok Swivel
fittings (5272163–2). DO NOT use teflon tape on threads.
NOTE: To prevent cracking of fittings when attaching flare connectors to cabinet connection points, hold fittings in the
HEC stationary with wrench while flare connections are being made.
4. Connect each hose to designated RETURN inlet (YELLOW) and SUPPLY outlet (GRAY) at top of HEC Cabinet.
5. At the future Compressor location, for both the GRAY and YELLOW hoses, measure 18 inches (457mm) from
end and cut hose.
6. Install Ball Valve assembly (5338546) for each hose between cut ends.
The following steps will be completed after the Cryo–Cooler has been delivered to site. If necessary, store the flared
fittings in a safe place for installation at that time.
7. At the Compressor, in both IN and OUT ports, install a 0.5 inch 37 degree JIC Male to 0.375 inch Male BPST fitting
(5268775) and a brass 0.5 inch Female Flare to 0.5 inch Push–Lok fitting (5272163).
a. Attach teflon tape to the male tapered threads shown below and insert into the cryo compressor IN and OUT
ports.
b. Attach the push–lok hose barb to the cryogen hose.
c. Connect the male and female threads together.
8. Attach YELLOW hose to OUT on Compressor.
9. Attach GRAY hose to IN on Compressor.
10. Check for leaks at all connections.
$ $

(
& '
* +

2–8 HEC TO CRYO–COOLER HOSE INSULATION KIT

Install the Flexible Foam Insulation Kit (5266250).
1. Attach insulation sleeves (5197470) to supply and return hoses.
2. Apply black duct tape to the seams between sections of insulation to prevent gaps.
$ %

2–9 INSTALL RF SCREEN ROOM WALL MOUNTING FRAMES AND SPW

Refer to architectural site layout drawings to determine location of SPW (Secondary Pen Wall) and Penetration Panel
frames.
WARNING!
DUE TO WEIGHT OF SPW, AT LEAST TWO PEOPLE ARE REQUIRED TO LIFT

AND MOUNT SPW INTO FRAME.
2–9–1 INSTALL MOUNTING FRAMES IN RF SCREEN ROOM OPENING

NOTE: The orientation of the Penetration Panel frame is different than the SPW frame.
1. From Equipment Room side of RF Screen Room wall, install the SPW and Penetration panel Frames. The
Penetration Panel and SPW frames can be used as templates for hole locations.
IMPORTANT: Make sure frame is positioned so that gradient cable strain relief bracket mounting studs are at the
top, left side.
2. Secure both frames to Scan Room wall. Customer to provide fasteners and instructions for installation to achieve
RF integrity.
Penetration Panel Frame
SPW Frame
Mounting Frame
RF Shielded Material
%
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
$
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
Finished Wall

2–9–2 INSTALL SPW (if supplied at this time)

1. Move SPW into designated opening and mount to frame using 20 M5 x12mm SS Screws (2381274–2) and M5
Washers (2381270–6).
2. On Equipment Room side, install Gradient Cable Strain Relief Bracket (5182786) and secure on two studs using
a M8 SS Hex Nut (2381089–6) on each stud.
3. Install three U–bolts (2113244) in bracket and loosely fasten with 3/8–16 Brass hex Nut (46–208935P10).
4. On Magnet Room side, place one 1 inch washer (46–251379P4) on each stud.
5. On Magnet Room side, install Gradient Cable Strain Relief Bracket (5182786) and secure on two studs using a
M8 SS Hex Nut (2381089–6) on each stud.
6. Slide Air inlet Filter (5290917) on to end of J105 waveguide.
CAUTION: Do NOT slide filter mounting flange past end of waveguide. Damage to filter may result.
7. Secure Air Filter firmly in place with 4–inch Plastic Hose Clamp (5263772–3).

% &
"
,
"

ÍÍÍÍ $
ÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ '
ÍÍÍÍ )
(

&

"

2–10 MAGNET ENCLOSURE CABLE CURTAIN INSTALLATION (Customer Option)

The optional Cable Curtain Kit is available for the MR750 or the MR450w sites only.
The optional Cable Concealment Kit is available for MR450w GEM, MR750w, and MR750w GEM sites only.
D For MR750, refer to Section 2–10–1.
D For MR450w, refer to section 2–10–2.
D For MR450w GEM, refer to section 2–10–3
D For MR750w & MR750w GEM, refer to section 2–10–4
2–10–1 MR750 CABLE CURTAIN INSTALLATION

The Curtain Kit Collector (5241434) is delivered with this installation. It is provided if the customer site plans to install
the curtain. This option is only installed for MR750.
If curtain is to be installed, the installation instructions are found in the following pages as part of 5267708DDW. The
curtain kit is installed in two stages:
D First Stage – The Curtain Rail Front and Rear Assemblies (5237762 and 5237763) are to be installed prior
to the delivery of the remaining system cabinets and cables, which will be dellivered to site after magnet
installation. Refer to sheet one of 5267708DDW on the next page for location dimentions of Curtain Rail
from magnet iso–center or rear flange.
D Second Stage – The front and rear Curtain Covers (5241217 and 5241217–2) are installed after magnet
enclosure has been installed and the Curtain Rail is in place in the ceiling. Refer to Direction 5500102,
Section 5, for Curtain Cover installation procedures.

2–10–1 MR750 CABLE CURTAIN INSTALLATION (continued)
Refer to Direction 5500102 forinstructions

for installing curtain
NOTE:





2–10–2 MR450w CABLE CURTAIN INSTALLATION

The Curtain Kit Collector (5376552) is delivered with this installation. It is provided if the customer site plans to install
the curtain. This option is only installed for MR450w.
If curtain is to be installed, the installation instructions are found in the following pages as part of 5376548INS. The
curtain kit is installed in two stages:
D First Stage – The two piece Curtain Rail Assembly (5376547), for the front and rear, are to be installed
prior to the delivery of the remaining system cabinets and cables which will be dellivered to site after
magnet installation. Refer to sheet one of 5376548INS on the next page for location dimentions of Curtain
Rail from magnet iso–center or rear flange.
D Second Stage – The front and rear Curtain Covers (5376553 and 5376553–2) are installed after magnet
enclosure has been installed and the Curtain Rail is in place in the ceiling. Refer to Direction 5670002,
Chapter 5, for Curtain Cover installation procedures.

2–10–2 MR450w CABLE CURTAIN INSTALLATION (continued)
Refer to Direction 5670002 forinstructions

for installing curtain
NOTE:





2–10–3 MR450w GEM CABLE CONCEALMENT KIT INSTALLATION

The MR450w GEM Cable Concealment Kit is an option delivered with this installation. It is provided if the customer
site plans to install the kit. This option is only installed for MR450w GEM.
If the concealment kit is to be installed, the installation instructions for the Ceiling Frame are found on the following
page as part of 5418944TPH. The cable concealment kit is installed in two stages:
D First Stage – The Ceiling Frame Kit (5418561) is to be installed prior to the delivery of the remaining system
cabinets and cables which will be dellivered to site after magnet installation. Refer to the instructions on
the next page for location dimentions of curtain rail. There are three methods for locating the curtain rail in
the ceiling. They are:
– Measure to magnet isocenter
– Measure to center of vent pipe
– Measure from centerline and main rear face of magnet
D Second Stage – The four side covers are installed after the magnet enclosure has been installed and the
Curtain Frame is in place in the ceiling. Refer to Direction 5670002for the MR450w GEM side cover
installation procedures.
,-"
#
./0$ 1./0 !(% !2! 3 4 5
# 5!

2–10–3 MR450w GEM CABLE CONCEALMENT KIT INSTALLATION (continued)

2–10–4 MR750w & MR750w GEM CABLE CONCEALMENT KIT INSTALLATION

The MR750w and MR750w GEM Cable Concealment Kit is an option delivered with this installation. It is provided if the
customer site plans to install the kit. This option is only installed for MR750w or MR750w GEM.
If the concealment kit is to be installed, the installation instructions for the Ceiling Frame are found on the following
page as part of 5418898TPH. The cable concealment kit is installed in two stages:
D First Stage – The Ceiling Frame Kit (5418561) is to be installed prior to the delivery of the remaining system
cabinets and cables which will be dellivered to site after magnet installation. Refer to the instructions on
the next page for location dimentions of curtain rail. There are three methods for locating the curtain rail in
the ceiling. They are:
– Measure to magnet isocenter
– Measure to center of vent pipe
– Measure from centerline and main rear face of magnet
D Second Stage – The four side covers are installed after the magnet enclosure has been installed and the
Curtain Rail is in place in the ceiling. Refer to Direction 5670010for the MR450w GEM side cover
installation procedures.
,-"
#
./0$ 1./0 !(% !2! 3 4 5
# 5!

2–10–4 MR750w & MR750w GEM CABLE CONCEALMENT KIT INSTALLATION (continued)

SECTION 3 – COMPLETION CHECKLIST
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
3–1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION COMPLETION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
3–2 GE FIELD ENGINEER RESPONSIBILITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
COMPLETION CHECKLIST

3–1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION COMPLETION

The following steps need to be reviewed and completed by GE Field Engineer, especially if the system was installed by
non–GE personel. Check off boxes at the front of each item below when complete.
- Check mechanical flowchart to make sure all steps are complete
- Resolve shipment shortages
- Resolve ommissions by mechanical contractors
- Make sure all rating plates are installed
- Recheck all wiring connections using cable map
- Correct for wiring errors if necessary
3–2 GE FIELD ENGINEER RESPONSIBILITIES

1. Record and enter applicable data into applicable site configuration files and records.
2. Complete Product Locator information for all installed serialized components, new or updated, via either:
D

D

!"# $ %%
Refer to Section 1–8 for details on submitting Product Locator information.
Note
Failure to fill out and return Product Locator Cards may result in failure of your site to receive future FMI’s.
3. Store the delivered site’s set of service tools and spares kit in service cabinet at site.
4. Leave all Service Manuals on site. Organize and set up reference cabinet for the Manuals.
5. Locate any Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). They must be retained on site. Customer is to be informed that
material with MSDS was brought into site and customer should know/decide where MSDS should be retained at
site.
COMPLETION CHECKLIST

SIGNATM Architect, Discovery* MR750w
Preinstallation Manual
OPERATING DOCUMENTATION
5670003
Revision 8.0
SIGNATM Architect, Discovery* MR750w Preinstallation Manual
Direction 5670003, Revision 8.0
2
Important Information
LANGUAGE
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ Това упътване за работа е налично само на английски език.
(BG) • Ако доставчикът на услугата на клиента изиска друг език, задължение на
клиента е да осигури превод.
• Не използвайте оборудването, преди да сте се консултирали и разбрали

упътването за работа.
• Неспазването на това предупреждение може да доведе до нараняване на

доставчика на услугата, оператора или пациентa в резултат на токов удар,
механична или друга опасност.
警告本维修手册仅提供英文版本。
(ZH-CN) • 如果客户的维修服务人员需要非英文版本，则客户需自行提供翻译服务。
• 未详细阅读和完全理解本维修手册之前，不得进行维修。
• 忽略本警告可能对维修服务人员、操作人员或患者造成电击、机械伤害或其他形式的
伤害。
警告本服務手冊僅提供英文版本。
(ZH-HK) • 倘若客戶的服務供應商需要英文以外之服務手冊，客戶有責任提供翻譯服務。
• 除非已參閱本服務手冊及明白其內容，否則切勿嘗試維修設備。
• 不遵從本警告或會令服務供應商、網絡供應商或病人受到觸電、機械性或其他的危
險。
警告本維修手冊僅有英文版。
(ZH-TW) • 若客戶的維修廠商需要英文版以外的語言，應由客戶自行提供翻譯服務。
• 請勿試圖維修本設備，除非您已查閱並瞭解本維修手冊。
• 若未留意本警告，可能導致維修廠商、操作員或病患因觸電、機械或其他危險而受
傷。
UPOZORENJE Ovaj servisni priručnik dostupan je na engleskom jeziku.

(HR) • Ako davatelj usluge klijenta treba neki drugi jezik, klijent je dužan osigurati prijevod.
• Ne pokušavajte servisirati opremu ako niste u potpunosti pročitali i razumjeli ovaj
servisni priručnik.
• Zanemarite li ovo upozorenje, može doći do ozljede davatelja usluge, operatera ili
pacijenta uslijed strujnog udara, mehaničkih ili drugih rizika.
Important Information 3
VÝSTRAHA Tento provozní návod existuje pouze v anglickém jazyce.

(CS) • V případě, že externí služba zákazníkům potřebuje návod v jiném jazyce, je zajiště‐
ní překladu do odpovídajícího jazyka úkolem zákazníka.
• Nesnažte se o údržbu tohoto zařízení, aniž byste si přečetli tento provozní návod a
pochopili jeho obsah.
• V případě nedodržování této výstrahy může dojít k poranění pracovníka prodejního

servisu, obslužného personálu nebo pacientů vlivem elektrického proudu, respektive
vlivem mechanických či jiných rizik.
ADVARSEL Denne servicemanual findes kun på engelsk.

(DA) • Hvis en kundes tekniker har brug for et andet sprog end engelsk, er det kundens
ansvar at sørge for oversættelse.
• Forsøg ikke at servicere udstyret uden at læse og forstå denne servicemanual.
• Manglende overholdelse af denne advarsel kan medføre skade på grund af elektrisk

stød, mekanisk eller anden fare for teknikeren, operatøren eller patienten.
WAARSCHUWING Deze onderhoudshandleiding is enkel in het Engels verkrijgbaar.

(NL) • Als het onderhoudspersoneel een andere taal vereist, dan is de klant verantwoorde‐
lijk voor de vertaling ervan.
• Probeer de apparatuur niet te onderhouden alvorens deze onderhoudshandleiding

werd geraadpleegd en begrepen is.
• Indien deze waarschuwing niet wordt opgevolgd, zou het onderhoudspersoneel, de

operator of een patiënt gewond kunnen raken als gevolg van een elektrische schok,
mechanische of andere gevaren.
WARNING This service manual is available in English only.

(EN) • If a customer's service provider requires a language other than English, it is the cus‐
tomer's responsibility to provide translation services.
• Do not attempt to service the equipment unless this service manual has been con‐
sulted and is understood.
• Failure to heed this warning may result in injury to the service provider, operator or
patient from electric shock, mechanical or other hazards.
HOIATUS See teenindusjuhend on saadaval ainult inglise keeles.

(ET) • Kui klienditeeninduse osutaja nõuab juhendit inglise keelest erinevas keeles, vastu‐
tab klient tõlketeenuse osutamise eest.
• Ärge üritage seadmeid teenindada enne eelnevalt käesoleva teenindusjuhendiga

tutvumist ja sellest aru saamist.
• Käesoleva hoiatuse eiramine võib põhjustada teenuseosutaja, operaatori või pat‐

siendi vigastamist elektrilöögi, mehaanilise või muu ohu tagajärjel.
4 Important Information
VAROITUS Tämä huolto-ohje on saatavilla vain englanniksi.

(FI) • Jos asiakkaan huoltohenkilöstö vaatii muuta kuin englanninkielistä materiaalia, tar‐
vittavan käännöksen hankkiminen on asiakkaan vastuulla.
• Älä yritä korjata laitteistoa ennen kuin olet varmasti lukenut ja ymmärtänyt tämän
huolto-ohjeen.
• Mikäli tätä varoitusta ei noudateta, seurauksena voi olla huoltohenkilöstön, laitteis‐

ton käyttäjän tai potilaan vahingoittuminen sähköiskun, mekaanisen vian tai muun
vaaratilanteen vuoksi.
ATTENTION Ce manuel d’installation et de maintenance est disponible uniquement en anglais.

(FR) • Si le technicien d'un client a besoin de ce manuel dans une langue autre que l'an‐
glais, il incombe au client de le faire traduire.
• Ne pas tenter d'intervenir sur les équipements tant que ce manuel d’installation et
de maintenance n'a pas été consulté et compris.
• Le non-respect de cet avertissement peut entraîner chez le technicien, l'opérateur

ou le patient des blessures dues à des dangers électriques, mécaniques ou autres.
WARNUNG Diese Serviceanleitung existiert nur in englischer Sprache.

(DE) • Falls ein fremder Kundendienst eine andere Sprache benötigt, ist es Aufgabe des
Kunden für eine entsprechende Übersetzung zu sorgen.
• Versuchen Sie nicht diese Anlage zu warten, ohne diese Serviceanleitung gelesen
und verstanden zu haben.
• Wird diese Warnung nicht beachtet, so kann es zu Verletzungen des Kundendienst‐

technikers, des Bedieners oder des Patienten durch Stromschläge, mechanische
oder sonstige Gefahren kommen.
ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ Το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σέρβις διατίθεται μόνο στα αγγλικά.

(EL) • Εάν ο τεχνικός σέρβις ενός πελάτη απαιτεί το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σε γλώσσα εκτός των
αγγλικών, αποτελεί ευθύνη του πελάτη να παρέχει τις υπηρεσίες μετάφρασης.
• Μην επιχειρήσετε την εκτέλεση εργασιών σέρβις στον εξοπλισμό αν δεν έχετε
συμβουλευτεί και κατανοήσει το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σέρβις.
• Αν δεν προσέξετε την προειδοποίηση αυτή, ενδέχεται να προκληθεί τραυματισμός

στον τεχνικό σέρβις, στο χειριστή ή στον ασθενή από ηλεκτροπληξία, μηχανικούς ή
άλλους κινδύνους.
FIGYELMEZTETÉS Ezen karbantartási kézikönyv kizárólag angol nyelven érhető el.

(HU) • Ha a vevő szolgáltatója angoltól eltérő nyelvre tart igényt, akkor a vevő felelőssége
a fordítás elkészíttetése.
• Ne próbálja elkezdeni használni a berendezést, amíg a karbantartási kézikönyvben

leírtakat nem értelmezték.
• Ezen figyelmeztetés figyelmen kívül hagyása a szolgáltató, működtető vagy a beteg

áramütés, mechanikai vagy egyéb veszélyhelyzet miatti sérülését eredményezheti.
AÐVÖRUN Þessi þjónustuhandbók er aðeins fáanleg á ensku.

(IS) • Ef að þjónustuveitandi viðskiptamanns þarfnast annas tungumáls en ensku, er það
skylda viðskiptamanns að skaffa tungumálaþjónustu.
• Reynið ekki að afgreiða tækið nema að þessi þjónustuhandbók hefur verið skoðuð
og skilin.
• Brot á sinna þessari aðvörun getur leitt til meiðsla á þjónustuveitanda, stjórnanda
eða sjúklings frá raflosti, vélrænu eða öðrum áhættum.
AVVERTENZA Il presente manuale di manutenzione è disponibile soltanto in lingua inglese.

(IT) • Se un addetto alla manutenzione richiede il manuale in una lingua diversa, il cliente
è tenuto a provvedere direttamente alla traduzione.
• Procedere alla manutenzione dell'apparecchiatura solo dopo aver consultato il pre‐

sente manuale ed averne compreso il contenuto.
• Il mancato rispetto della presente avvertenza potrebbe causare lesioni all'addetto al‐
la manutenzione, all'operatore o ai pazienti provocate da scosse elettriche, urti mec‐
canici o altri rischi.
警告このサービスマニュアルには英語版しかありません。
(JA) • サービスを担当される業者が英語以外の言語を要求される場合、翻訳作業はその業
者の責任で行うものとさせていただきます。
• このサービスマニュアルを熟読し理解せずに、装置のサービスを行わないでくださ
い。
• この警告に従わない場合、サービスを担当される方、操作員あるいは患者さんが、
感電や機械的又はその他の危険により負傷する可能性があります。
경고 본 서비스 매뉴얼은 영어로만 이용하실 수 있습니다.

(KO) • 고객의 서비스 제공자가 영어 이외의 언어를 요구할 경우, 번역 서비스를 제공하는
것은 고객의 책임입니다.
• 본 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조하여 숙지하지 않은 이상 해당 장비를 수리하려고 시도하지

마십시오.
• 본 경고 사항에 유의하지 않으면 전기 쇼크, 기계적 위험, 또는 기타 위험으로 인해 서

비스 제공자, 사용자 또는 환자에게 부상을 입힐 수 있습니다.
BRĪDINĀJUMS Šī apkopes rokasgrāmata ir pieejama tikai angļu valodā.

(LV) • Ja klienta apkopes sniedzējam nepieciešama informācija citā valodā, klienta pienā‐
kums ir nodrošināt tulkojumu.
• Neveiciet aprīkojuma apkopi bez apkopes rokasgrāmatas izlasīšanas un sapraša‐

nas.
• Šī brīdinājuma neievērošanas rezultātā var rasties elektriskās strāvas trieciena, me‐

hānisku vai citu faktoru izraisītu traumu risks apkopes sniedzējam, operatoram vai
pacientam.
ĮSPĖJIMAS Šis eksploatavimo vadovas yra tik anglų kalba.

(LT) • Jei kliento paslaugų tiekėjas reikalauja vadovo kita kalba – ne anglų, suteikti vertimo
paslaugas privalo klientas.
• Nemėginkite atlikti įrangos techninės priežiūros, jei neperskaitėte ar nesupratote šio

eksploatavimo vadovo.
• Jei nepaisysite šio įspėjimo, galimi paslaugų tiekėjo, operatoriaus ar paciento suža‐
lojimai dėl elektros šoko, mechaninių ar kitų pavojų.
ADVARSEL Denne servicehåndboken finnes bare på engelsk.

(NO) • Hvis kundens serviceleverandør har bruk for et annet språk, er det kundens ansvar
å sørge for oversettelse.
• Ikke forsøk å reparere utstyret uten at denne servicehåndboken er lest og forstått.
• Manglende hensyn til denne advarselen kan føre til at serviceleverandøren, oper‐
atøren eller pasienten skades på grunn av elektrisk støt, mekaniske eller andre
farer.
OSTRZEŻENIE Niniejszy podręcznik serwisowy dostępny jest jedynie w języku angielskim.

(PL) • Jeśli serwisant klienta wymaga języka innego niż angielski, zapewnienie usługi tłu‐
maczenia jest obowiązkiem klienta.
• Nie próbować serwisować urządzenia bez zapoznania się z niniejszym podręczni‐

kiem serwisowym i zrozumienia go.
• Niezastosowanie się do tego ostrzeżenia może doprowadzić do obrażeń serwisan‐

ta, operatora lub pacjenta w wyniku porażenia prądem elektrycznym, zagrożenia
mechanicznego bądź innego.
ATENÇÃO Este manual de assistência técnica encontra-se disponível unicamente em inglês.

(PT-BR) • Se outro serviço de assistência técnica solicitar a tradução deste manual, caberá ao
cliente fornecer os serviços de tradução.
• Não tente reparar o equipamento sem ter consultado e compreendido este manual
de assistência técnica.
• A não observância deste aviso pode ocasionar ferimentos no técnico, operador ou

paciente decorrentes de choques elétricos, mecânicos ou outros.
ATENÇÃO Este manual de assistência técnica só se encontra disponível em inglês.

(PT-PT) • Se qualquer outro serviço de assistência técnica solicitar este manual noutro idio‐
ma, é da responsabilidade do cliente fornecer os serviços de tradução.
• Não tente reparar o equipamento sem ter consultado e compreendido este manual
de assistência técnica.
• O não cumprimento deste aviso pode colocar em perigo a segurança do técnico, do

operador ou do paciente devido a choques eléctricos, mecânicos ou outros.
ATENŢIE Acest manual de service este disponibil doar în limba engleză.

(RO) • Dacă un furnizor de servicii pentru clienţi necesită o altă limbă decât cea engleză,
este de datoria clientului să furnizeze o traducere.
• Nu încercaţi să reparaţi echipamentul decât ulterior consultării şi înţelegerii acestui

manual de service.
• Ignorarea acestui avertisment ar putea duce la rănirea depanatorului, operatorului

sau pacientului în urma pericolelor de electrocutare, mecanice sau de altă natură.
ОСТОРОЖНО! Данное руководство по техническому обслуживанию представлено только на

(RU) английском языке.
• Если сервисному персоналу клиента необходимо руководство не на
английском, а на каком-то другом языке, клиенту следует самостоятельно
обеспечить перевод.
• Перед техническим обслуживанием оборудования обязательно обратитесь к

данному руководству и поймите изложенные в нем сведения.
• Несоблюдение требований данного предупреждения может привести к тому,

что специалист по техобслуживанию, оператор или пациент получит удар
электрическим током, механическую травму или другое повреждение.
UPOZORENJE Ovo servisno uputstvo je dostupno samo na engleskom jeziku.

(SR) • Ako klijentov serviser zahteva neki drugi jezik, klijent je dužan da obezbedi prevodi‐
lačke usluge.
• Ne pokušavajte da opravite uređaj ako niste pročitali i razumeli ovo servisno uputst‐
vo.
• Zanemarivanje ovog upozorenja može dovesti do povređivanja servisera, rukovaoca

ili pacijenta usled strujnog udara ili mehaničkih i drugih opasnosti.
UPOZORNENIE Tento návod na obsluhu je k dispozícii len v angličtine.

(SK) • Ak zákazníkov poskytovateľ služieb vyžaduje iný jazyk ako angličtinu, poskytnutie
prekladateľských služieb je zodpovednosťou zákazníka.
• Nepokúšajte sa o obsluhu zariadenia, kým si neprečítate návod na obluhu a nepor‐

ozumiete mu.
• Zanedbanie tohto upozornenia môže spôsobiť zranenie poskytovateľa služieb, ob‐

sluhujúcej osoby alebo pacienta elektrickým prúdom, mechanické alebo iné ohroze‐
nie.
ATENCION Este manual de servicio sólo existe en inglés.

(ES) • Si el encargado de mantenimiento de un cliente necesita un idioma que no sea el
inglés, el cliente deberá encargarse de la traducción del manual.
• No se deberá dar servicio técnico al equipo, sin haber consultado y comprendido

este manual de servicio.
• La no observancia del presente aviso puede dar lugar a que el proveedor de servi‐
cios, el operador o el paciente sufran lesiones provocadas por causas eléctricas,
mecánicas o de otra naturaleza.
VARNING Den här servicehandboken finns bara tillgänglig på engelska.

(SV) • Om en kunds servicetekniker har behov av ett annat språk än engelska, ansvarar
kunden för att tillhandahålla översättningstjänster.
• Försök inte utföra service på utrustningen om du inte har läst och förstår den här
servicehandboken.
• Om du inte tar hänsyn till den här varningen kan det resultera i skador på servicete‐
knikern, operatören eller patienten till följd av elektriska stötar, mekaniska faror eller
andra faror.
OPOZORILO Ta servisni priročnik je na voljo samo v angleškem jeziku.

(SL) • Če ponudnik storitve stranke potrebuje priročnik v drugem jeziku, mora stranka za‐
gotoviti prevod.
• Ne poskušajte servisirati opreme, če tega priročnika niste v celoti prebrali in razu‐

meli.
• Če tega opozorila ne upoštevate, se lahko zaradi električnega udara, mehanskih ali

drugih nevarnosti poškoduje ponudnik storitev, operater ali bolnik.
DİKKAT Bu servis kılavuzunun sadece ingilizcesi mevcuttur.

(TR) • Eğer müşteri teknisyeni bu kılavuzu ingilizce dışında bir başka lisandan talep
ederse, bunu tercüme ettirmek müşteriye düşer.
• Servis kılavuzunu okuyup anlamadan ekipmanlara müdahale etmeyiniz.
• Bu uyarıya uyulmaması, elektrik, mekanik veya diğer tehlikelerden dolayı teknisyen,

operatör veya hastanın yaralanmasına yol açabilir.
This page left intentionally blank.
Revision History
April 2016
Location Description
450w 750 750w
All pages Added Gemini product name to publication title. x x
Chapter 3, section 5.4.1 Correction of RF Shield Requirements: Removed “Cryo lines”, which x x x
should not be installed when measuring SE.
Chapter 3, section 5.4.2 Moved items related to RF shield testing from 5.4.1 to 5.4.2, a new x x x
section called “RF Shield Test Requirements”.
Chapter 3, section 6.5 Corrected dimensions on Magnet Mounting Detail illustration(s). x x x
Chapter 3, section 6.5 Added a more accurate magnet image to the “Magnet Room Floor x x x
Levelness Area” illustration.
Chapter 3 section 8.5 Clarified information in “Cryogenic Venting” overview. x x x
Chapter 3 section 8.6.5 Clarified vent construction requirements. x x x
Chapter 4, section 7, illustra‐ Corrected dimensions on PEN and SPW Wall illustrations; added x x x
tions “Pen Panel and SPW Wall Openings” illustration.
Chapter 6, section 3 Updated System Cable List table for DV26. x x x
March 2016
450w 750 750w
Chapter 2 Removed the compliance declaration information for Edition 2.1. Add‐ x x x
ed “MR” before “system.”
Chapter 2, Section 1 Changed the word "Upgrade" to "System Level Requirements for In‐ x x x
stalling into Existing MR Suite"
Chapter 2, Section 3, under Within the caution note, added "The ceiling service area should be x x x
Caution kept clear of overhead items, including soffits, HVAC, plumbing com‐
ponents, and brackets."
Chapter 2, Section 3 Added system pictures to graphics. x x x
Chapter 2, Table 2-1 Added W x D dimensions to equipment room size. x x x
Chapter 2, Illustration 2-4 Added the new vibration plot graphic. x x x

Energy Transmitted Through
Vibro
Chapter 2, Illustration For "MR System Water Cooling Block Diagram": added the shutoff x x x
valves for both supply and return.
Chapter 2, Section 11 Added M7000WL MDP option. Added emergency backup power re‐ x x x
quirements.
Chapter 2, Illustration For “Gradient Coil Cart”: Updated the gradient coil Diameter XRMb to x
892mm.
Chapter 2, Illustration For “Gradient Coil Cart”: Updated the gradient coil Diameter XRMw to x x
907mm.
Chapter 2, Table For “MR System Component Replacement Shipping Specifications”: x x x

Changed the PGR international shipping weight to 3654 lbs, 1657 kg.
Chapter 3, Illustration 3-4 Modified the illustration to show the height of the stud from the floor to x x x
the top of the stud.
Chapter 3, Section 6.2 Changed text in step 6.2.3.g. from "SPW" to "PEN". x
Revision History 11
March 2016
450w 750 750w
Chapter 3, Section 6.2 Added "maintain the minimum service area outside 200G" to step x x x
6.2.1.b.
Chapter 3, Illustration(s) Updated Magnet Mounting Detail illustration(s) and specs for clarifica‐ x x x
tion, and added Ergopad illustration and specs.
Chapter 3, Illustration 3-7 Changed the metric measurement from 2487mm to 2362mm. x
Chapter 3, Illustration 3-10 Removed words in the illustration, and replaced them with callouts. x x x
Chapter 3, Section 8 Added new vent graphics for clarity. Added combined vent illustration x x x
and details.
Chapter 4 Updated equipment room examples. x x x
Chapter 4, illustrations 4-8, Changed the distance between the Pen and SPW from 5.4 to 7.8 in‐ x x x
4-10, 4-11 ches.
Chapter 6, Section 1.2, Ta‐ Changed the usable length value for “PEN cabinet, top panel” to x x
ble 6-4 “GOC, rear panel” from "141.7 (29000)" to "1141.7 (29000)".
Chapter 6, section 2 Added clarity: Removed redundant information in the requirements, il‐ x x x
lustrations and tables; re-organized requirements into smaller sec‐
tions; cross-referenced from dimensions in the requirements to di‐
mensions shown in the illustrations.
Chapter 6, Illustration 6-3, Added dimension detail from the edge of the cable tray to the magnet x x x
6-4 isocenter to make sure the gradient cable aligns with the magnet iso‐
center.
Chapter 6, Illustration 6-1 Added detail to specify the dimensioned offset from magnet isocenter x x x
and cable tray edge (if stacked) or between trays (if side by side).
Chapter 6, Illustration 6-7 Transposed dimensions 13 and 7.25 to their correct positions on the x x x
graphic.
Chapter 6, Section 4 Added backup power specs for crycooler. x x x
Chapter 7, Section 4.3.8 Added a figure to illustrate the setup to measure ground isolation re‐ x x x
sistance. Added step 4 at the end of the procedure to tell the installer
to reconnect the lines to ground after the measurement is complete.
Document review and approval per DOC0841068 R8, March 2014
Location Description Applies To
450 450w 750 750w
Clarified requirement of position of the emergency air intake. The x x x x

emergency air intake must be at the highest point of the finished
ceiling. Additionally, there must be an emergency air intake be‐
Chapter 8, 3 tween the finished ceiling and the RF ceiling.
Updated Magnet Room Exhaust Fan Schematic and Magnet x x x x

Room Exhaust Fan Schematic with Optional Oxygen Monitor illus‐
Chapter 8, 3, Illustrations trations to reflect correct position of the emergency air intake.
Revision 5.0, Document review and approval per DOC0841068 R6, July 2013
450 450w 750 750w
Chapter 2, 2.2.6 Corrected profiling issue to remove a blank requirement. x x x x
12 Revision History
450 450w 750 750w
Chapter 2, 3 Updated values in the Minimum Room Size table to reflect de‐ x x x x
creased cabinet installation area requirements. Corrected inches to
mm conversions.
Chapter 2, 3 Note Replaced text in Note after the Minimum Room Size table to read x x
"Contact PMI to ensure correct ramp leads have been ordered."
Chapter 2, 6-1 Changed the table title to "Acoustic Specifications (Under Ambient x x x x
Conditions)"
Chapter 2, 6.2 Illustration Changed titles on illustration to "Vibration Transmitted through Vi‐ x x x x
2-4, Note at end of 3.6.2 broAcoustic Mat." In Note, corrected references of "energy" to "vi‐
bration."
Chapter 2, 7.4 Clarified the information about non-MR system equipment in the vi‐ x x x x
cinity of the MR system and the potential sensitivity to magnetic
fields. Emphasized that the table listing the types of equipment is
for reference only and the listed gauge limit may not be accurate
for the customer specific equipment.
Chapter 2, 10.1 Updated the Facility Liquid Coolant Requirements table with the in‐ x x
let temperature for the wide bore systems.
Chapter 2, 10-1, Illustra‐ Create new Allowable Facility Water Temperature and Flow illus‐ x x
tion 2-14 tration with temperature range for wide bore systems.
Chapter 2, 11.2 Added new requirement for Main Disconnect Panel (MDP). For the x x x x
emergency-off circuit, the wire size should be 12-22 AWG and is
supplied by the customer.
Chapter 2, 12.3 Removed Note from MR system Component Replacement Ship‐ x x x x

ping Specifications table. Added it to weight tables in Magnet chap‐
ter.
Chapter 2, 12 Checked conversions from inches to millimeters and pounds to x x x x

kilograms. Corrected where needed on tables Delivery Route Re‐
quirements, MR System Component Shipping Specifications, MR
System Optional Component Shipping Specifications, and MR Sys‐
tem Component Replacement Shipping Specifications.
Chapter 3, 2.3 Added table to clarify measurements for Magnet Steady State Vi‐ x x x x
bration Specifications diagramed in Illustration 3-2.
Chapter 3, 5.3.1 Added +/- 0.5 MHz tolerance to frequencies listed in first require‐ x x x x
ment. Added Cyro Lines to the list of items that must be installed
before measuring shielding effectiveness.
Chapter 3, 5.3.2 Added new requirement for the RF Shield Test Report. Added the x x x x
need to perform a dock anchor pull test. Verify pull that is greater
than 600 lbs. Clarified Ground isolation test results by adding the
sentence "this test must be performed before the site is turned
over to the general contractor for electrical installation." Add re‐
quirement "Blank pen wall is installed."
Chapter 3, 7.1 Expanded magnet weight totals in table listing major components x x x x
of magnet assembly. Added Note from MR System Component
Replacement Shipping Specifications table.
Chapter 3, 7.1 Added 450w GEM magnet cover dimensions. x
Chapter 3, 7.3 In MRU Facility Power Requirements table, added qualifier to con‐ x x x x
nection type requirement to read "Hard wired/permanently wired di‐
rectly to facility power, no plugs or connectors allowed."
Revision History 13
450 450w 750 750w
Chapter 3, 8.3.2 Changed "All exhaust vent system components must be non-mag‐ x x x x
netic" to "All items within the RF enclosure must be non-magnetic."
Chapter 3, 8.4.1 Added qualifier to requirement to read "A pressure equalizing vent x x x x
is required in the magnet room ceiling or in the wall, at the highest
point possible."
Chapter 3, 8.6.5 Added "ONLY" to the beginning of the requirement "ONLY one die‐ x x x x
lectric break in the vent system (i.e., Ventglas) is required in the
Magnet room
Chapter 3, 8.7.2 Added requirement "GE Engineering recommends that the cryogen x x x x
vent be constructed to the same specification as required inside
the Magnet Room."
Chapter 3, 8.7.3 Illustra‐ Updated the Cryogenic Venting (Interior) illustration to show the re‐ x x x x
tion 3-15 quired distance for the vent stack between the waveguides.
Chapter 4, 3 Illustration In the Power, Gradient, RF (PGR) Cabinet illustration, corrected x x x x

4-3 the meter measurement of the width of the PGR Cabinet Side
View.
Chapter 6, 2-1 Illustration On the Cable Bends and Obstructions illustration, moved the ca‐ x x x x
6-2 bles closer to the leading edge of the cable tray.
Chapter 6, 2-2, Illustration Added an inset to the Cable Tray Requirements (Side by Side) il‐ x x x x
6-3 lustration, showing a side view of cable trays and the cable and
lines as they are routed around the non-ferrous cable support.
Chapter 6, 2-2, Illustration Added an inset to the Cable Tray Requirements (Stacked) illustra‐ x x x x
6-4 tion, showing a side view of cable trays and the cable and lines as
they are routed around the non-ferrous cable support.
Chapter 6, 2-3 Illustration In the Gradient Cable Drop to SPW (Side View) illustration, includ‐ x x x x
6-6 ed the dimension from the bottom of the cable tray to the floor.
Chapter 6, 2.4 In the table for Minimum Cable Tray Width, changed the compo‐ x x x x
nent type for the PGR from electrical to air/water.
Chapter 6, 4 In the note at the end of Facility Supplied System Interconnects x x x x

Specifications, add a paragraph providing more details about the
RF door switch.
Chapter 7 4.3.8 Change the requirement "To help prevent personal hazard, it is x x x x
necessary for the enclosure to be properly grounded." to a warn‐
ing."
All In the continuing effort to prepare these documents for translation, x x x x

some illustrations were updated with call-outs and descriptive ta‐
bles.
Revision 4.0, Document review and approval per DOC0841068 R5, November 2012
750 450 450w 750w
Ch 2, Sec 3, Table 2–1 Updated the Minimum Room Size values to reflect decreased
X X X X
cabinet installation area requirements.
Ch 2, Sec 11.1 Reorganized and reworded the requirements to support MDP

X X X X
requirements
14 Revision History
Ch 2, Sec 11.1, Table 17 • Removed Power Demand information
• Changed Requirement for Power Availability to read “Fa‐

cility power is required at all times for operation of the
Cyrocooler (CRY) to minimize cryogen consumption.”
X X X X
• Removed MDP information from Power Availability row.
• Removed Emergency Off Button information.
Ch 2, Sec 11.1, Table 18 Added table to provide specifications for System Power De‐
X X X X
mand.
Ch 2, Sec 11.2 Added new section to add requirements for MDP electrical re‐
X X X X
quirements.
Ch 3, Sec 5.3.3.5.I Corrected Newton conversion for torque value specified for the
X X X X
dock anchor.
Ch 3, Sec 8.7.3, Illustration 3-15 Added Item 12 to illustration to show that height from floor to
and Table 3-11 bottom of contractor-supplied wave guide is a maximum of X X X X
116.9 inches.
Ch 3 Sec 8.7.3, Illustration 3-16 Revised cryovent drawing for 450w. X
Ch 4, Sec 1, Illustration 4-1 Updated Equipment Room Layout Example Illustration to re‐
X X X X
flect decreased cabinet installation area requirements.
Ch 4, Sec 1, Illustration 4-1 and • Updated the Equipment Room layout notes to support
Table 4-1 new illustration (.
X X X X
• Added requirement "If you use the minimum service
area, then riggers are required to install the equipment."
Ch 4, Sec 2 Added “optionally” to the introductory sentence. X X X X
Ch 4, Sec 7, Table 4-2 Changed Item 1 to show minimum ceiling height. X X X X
Ch 4, Sec 7, Illustration 4-10, Updated Closet Service Hatch Space illustrations to correct
X X X X
4-11, 4-12 standard to metric conversions.
Ch 6, Sec 1.2, Table 6-3 Added a paragraph and table to explain the order configura‐
X X X X
tions for cables.
Ch 6, Sec 2.2, Table 6-11, Item Added a reference to Illustration 6–3, Item 8.
X X X X
9
Revision 3.0, Document review and approval per DOC0841068 R4, May 2012
750 450 450w 750w
Ch 2, Sec 3, Illustration 2-1 Rear magnet dimension shown as 84”. Changed to 73”. x
Ch 2, Sec 9, Note 3 Removed “(contact install base support in Florence SC for alti‐
tudes from 8100 to 11808 feet (2468.9 to 3600 m) above sea x x x x
level”
Ch 2, Sec 11 Updated Voltage/Frequency power requirements to include

x x x x
415/400/380 VAC 60 ±3 Hz
Ch 2, Sec 11 Updated daily voltage variation to +10% / -10% x x x
Ch 2, Sec 11, Table 2-16 Clarified text to: “Optional customer supplied” backup power
x x x x
must be provided the facility breaker ...
Ch 2, Sec 12.3 Updated magnet shipping dimensions and weights; added lift‐
x x x x
ing bar details; clarified additional shipping details
Revision History 15
Ch 3, Sec 2.2 Clarified environmental steel limits x x x x
Ch 3, Sec 2.3, Illustration 2-3 Changed vibration specification to start at 0.5 Hz x x
Ch 3, Sec 5.3.3.1.5.I Clamping force is 600 lbs (2669 N) x x x x
Ch 3, Sec 5.3.3 Figure 3-4 Updated drawing to show removable portion of dock anchor x x x x
Ch 3, Sec 6.2 Clarified text: “minimum service area” changed to “200 Gauss” x x x x
Ch 3, Sec 8.6.5.1.c Removed note for second Ventglas joint requirement x x x x
Ch 4, Sec 7, Table 4-2 Clarified text: Magnet room service areas for PEN and SPW
x x x x
must not overlap “200 G” in magnet minimum service area
Ch 7, Sec 8.2.f Changed R/D = 0.5 for standard sweep elbows to R/D = 1.0
x x
for standard sweep elbows
Revision Date Description
2.0 Mar2012 Document review and approval per DOC0841068 R3
Reason for Change Location Description
Various Illustra‐ Replace text callouts with numbers and in-line notes to facili‐
tions tate translations
Specification Update Ch 2, Sec 1 Clarified HSS assessment for upgrades. HSS may now be
used instead of vibration testing. Eliminated redundant re‐
quirements and focused on essential requirements
Specification Update Ch 2, Sec 3 Simplified room size table
Specification Update Ch 2, Sec 3 Updated Minimum Magnet Room Size for consistency across
platforms (also revised illustration to show new design tradeoff
area)
Specification Update Ch 2, Sec 6.1 Added note to clarify customer need to contain noise within
each of the three rooms
Specification Update Ch 2, Sec 6.2 Added chart to show energy transmitted through VibroAcoustic
Mat
Specification Update Ch 2, Sec 7.2 Updated moving metal sensitivity distances for cars and trucks
Specification Update Ch 2, Sec 9.2 Added CAD Stream heat load to System Heat Output for Air
Cooling; Added Watts for MRE
Specification Update Ch 2, Sec 10.1 Added requirement for HEC, CRY, and PGR to be located on
the same floor
Specification Update Ch 2, Sec 11 Updated Voltage Variation, Voltage Transients, and Regula‐
tion. Removed requirement for input power neutral wire. Add‐
ed restriction to disallow use of corner grounded DELTA
source. Added note to MDP illustration for backup power re‐
quirement
Specification Update Ch 2, Sec 12.3 Added delivery dimensions for the GEM Table, 750w service
tool, and large FRUs
Specification Update Ch 3, Sec 4 Added detail to allow customer acoustic engineer to design an
MR Suite to contain the air and structure borne noise levels
Specification Update Ch 3, Sec 5 & Ch New RF Shield Effectivity test requirements with a focus on
7, Sec 4 the test methods, equipment, test procedures and report for‐
mat
Specification Update Ch 3, Sec 6 Added subsection for PEN closet requirements
Specification Update Ch 3, Sec 6.2 & Ch Added requirements for Closet service hatch (modified illustra‐
4 Sec 7 tion 4–8 and added 4–10, 4–11, 4–12; Updated 15 in. to 381
mm. Added maximum distance between PEN and SPW
16 Revision History
Revision Date Description
Specification Update Ch 3, Sec 6.3 Added reference to cable concealment kit
Specification Update Ch 3, Sec 6.4 Changed floor levelness requirement from 0.3125 in. over 120
in. to 0.125 over entire floor levelness area
Specification Update Ch 3, Sec 7.2 Added GEM Table per 450w/750w GEM programs
Specification Update Ch 3, Sec 7.1 Updated magnet specifications
Specification Update Ch 3, Sec 8 Added note to prohibit use of magnetic parts in Magnet room
Specification Update Ch 3, Sec 8.3, 8.5, Simplified requirements and updated Cryogen Venting illustra‐
8.6, 8.7 tions (3–15, 16, 17) eliminating nonessential details, focusing
on requirements
Specification Update Ch 3, Sec 9.2 Added note to prohibit use of magnetic parts in Magnet room
Specification Update Ch 4, Sec 1 Added note that optional equipment is not shown
Specification Update Ch 4, Sec 2, 3, 4 Added location of seismic anchors and updated service install
access
Specification Update Ch 4, Sec 4 Removed lifting hole detail from HEC illustration and updated
service clearances
Specification Update Ch 4, Sec 2, 3, 4 Added location of seismic anchors and updated service install
access
Specification Update Ch 4, Sec 5 Dimensioned blower box hose service clearance
Specification Update Ch 4, Sec 6 Added center of gravity dimensions to SPW illustration
Specification Update Ch 4, Sec 7 Updated/added PEN and SPW opening illustrations to show
required service area
Specification Update Ch 5, Sec 5.3.3, Removed magnet floor mounting requirements. All magnets
Ch 3, Sec 6.4.5 must use the VibroAcoustic dampening option
Specification Update Ch 6, Sec 2 Updated allowable obstruction distance to 7 in. above the bot‐
tom of the tray
Specification Update Ch 6, Sec 2.2 Updated cable tray height (104 in to 101.5 in) and distance
from back of magnet (44.5 to 48.9)
Specification Update Ch 6, Sec 2.4 Added minimum cable tray widths between equipment room
components
Specification Update Ch 7, Sec 8 Updated the Magnet Cryogenic Venting Pressure Drop Table.
3T LC pressure drop matrix now matches the 3T G3/LCC
pressure drop matrix
1.0 Nov2010 Initial Release. Document review and approval per DOC0841068 R1 V5
Revision History 17
18 Revision History
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION................................................................................................................... 25
1 Preinstall Manual Introduction....................................................................................................... 25
1.1 Document Purpose...............................................................................................................25
1.2 Intended User....................................................................................................................... 25
1.3 Document Overview............................................................................................................. 25
2 Symbols Key..................................................................................................................................26
Chapter 2 GENERAL SYSTEM LEVEL................................................................................................. 27

1 System Level Requirements for Installing into Existing MR Suite................................................. 27
2 System Components..................................................................................................................... 28
2.1 Magnet Room....................................................................................................................... 28
2.2 Equipment Room..................................................................................................................28
2.3 Control Room....................................................................................................................... 28
2.4 Accessories.......................................................................................................................... 28
3 MR Suite Minimum Room Size Requirements.............................................................................. 29
4 IEC EMC Compliance....................................................................................................................32
5 MR System Seismic Requirements...............................................................................................33
6 MR Suite Acoustic Specifications..................................................................................................34
6.1 Acoustic Specifications.........................................................................................................34
6.2 Structureborne Vibration Control Specifications...................................................................34
7 MR Suite Magnetic Field Specifications........................................................................................ 36
7.1 Magnetic Fringe Field........................................................................................................... 36
7.2 Interference from Changing Magnetic Fields........................................................................38
7.3 Electrical Current.................................................................................................................. 40
7.4 Non-MR System Equipment Sensitivity to Magnetic Fields..................................................41
8 Multiple MR System Requirements............................................................................................... 43
8.1 Multiple Magnets.................................................................................................................. 43
8.2 Shared Equipment Rooms................................................................................................... 43
9 MR Suite Temperature and Humidity............................................................................................ 45
9.1 Temperature and Humidity Requirements............................................................................45
Table of Contents 19
9.2 Equipment Heat Output Specifications.................................................................................45

10 Facility Coolant Requirements.....................................................................................................47
10.1 Heat Exchanger Cabinet (HEC) Coolant Requirements.....................................................47
10.2 Emergency Facility Coolant Requirements........................................................................ 51
11 MR Suite Electrical Requirements...............................................................................................53
11.1 General Electrical Requirements........................................................................................53
11.2 Main Disconnect Panel (MDP) Requirements.................................................................... 55
11.3 Emergency Power Backup Requirements..........................................................................57
12 MR System Shipping and Receiving........................................................................................... 59
12.1 Receiving Requirements.................................................................................................... 59
12.2 Facility Delivery Route Requirements................................................................................ 59
12.3 MR System Component Shipping Specifications............................................................... 59
Chapter 3 MAGNET ROOM................................................................................................................... 63

1 Magnet Room Introduction............................................................................................................ 63
2 Magnet Room Structural Requirements........................................................................................ 65
2.1 Overview...............................................................................................................................65
2.2 Environmental Steel Limits................................................................................................... 65
2.3 Vibration Requirements........................................................................................................ 66
3 Magnetic Shielded Room Requirements.......................................................................................68
4 Acoustic Room Specifications....................................................................................................... 69
5 RF Shielded Room Requirements.................................................................................................70
5.1 RF Shielded Room Purpose.................................................................................................70
5.2 RF Definitions....................................................................................................................... 70
5.3 Customer Responsibilities.................................................................................................... 71
5.4 Requirements....................................................................................................................... 71
5.4.1 RF Shield Requirements..............................................................................................71
5.4.2 RF Shield Test Requirements......................................................................................72
5.4.3 RF Shield Test Report................................................................................................. 73
5.4.4 Dock Anchor Mounting Requirements......................................................................... 74
5.4.5 RF Shielding Integrity Reliability Requirements ..........................................................75
20 Table of Contents
6 Finished Room Requirements.......................................................................................................76

6.1 Walls.....................................................................................................................................76
6.2 Penetration Panel Closet......................................................................................................76
6.3 Doors and Magnet Access Openings................................................................................... 77
6.4 Finished Ceiling.................................................................................................................... 78
6.5 Magnet Room Floors............................................................................................................ 78
7 Magnet Room Equipment Specifications...................................................................................... 81
7.1 Magnet (MAG) Assembly Specifications.............................................................................. 81
7.2 Patient Table Specifications................................................................................................. 82
7.2.1 Patient Table (PT)........................................................................................................82
7.2.2 GEM Table...................................................................................................................82
7.2.3 Optional Surgical Suite Transmobile Table................................................................. 83
7.3 Magnet Rundown Unit (MRU) Specifications and Requirements.........................................84
7.4 Oxygen Monitor Option Sensor Specifications..................................................................... 85
8 Magnet Room Venting Requirements........................................................................................... 86
8.1 Venting System Requirements............................................................................................. 86
8.2 HVAC Vent Requirements....................................................................................................86
8.3 Emergency Exhaust Vent Requirements..............................................................................86
8.4 Pressure Equalization Vent Requirement.............................................................................88
8.5 Cryogenic Venting................................................................................................................ 88
8.6 Vent Requirements Inside the Magnet Room ......................................................................89
8.6.1 General........................................................................................................................ 89
8.6.2 Vent Size..................................................................................................................... 90
8.6.3 Vent Materials..............................................................................................................90
8.6.4 Cryogen Vent Support................................................................................................. 91
8.6.5 Construction.................................................................................................................91
8.7 Vent Requirements Outside the Magnet Room....................................................................93
8.7.1 Cryogen Vent Support................................................................................................. 93
8.7.2 Vent Construction........................................................................................................ 93
8.7.3 Vent Exit...................................................................................................................... 94
8.8 Combined Vent.....................................................................................................................96
9 Magnet Room Electrical and Grounding Requirements................................................................ 98

9.1 Electrical Line and Filter Requirements................................................................................98
9.2 Lighting Requirements..........................................................................................................98
9.3 Grounding Requirements..................................................................................................... 98
Chapter 4 EQUIPMENT ROOM........................................................................................................... 101

1 Equipment Room Overview.........................................................................................................101
2 Main Disconnect Panel (MDP) Specifications............................................................................. 103
3 Power, Gradient, RF Cabinet (PGR) Specifications.................................................................... 104
4 Heat Exchanger Cabinet (HEC) Specifications........................................................................... 105
5 Penetration Panel Cabinet (PEN) Specifications........................................................................ 107
6 Secondary Penetration Wall (SPW) Specifications..................................................................... 109
7 PEN and SPW Wall Opening Requirements...............................................................................111
8 Cryocooler Compressor (CRY) Specifications............................................................................ 117
9 Magnet Monitor (MON) Requirements and Specifications.......................................................... 118
9.1 Requirements..................................................................................................................... 118
9.2 Specifications..................................................................................................................... 118
10 Multi-Nuclear Spectroscopy (MNS) Specifications.................................................................... 120
11 Brainwave Lite (BW) Specifications...........................................................................................122
12 Magnetic Resonance Elastography (MRE) Specifications........................................................ 123
12.1 Requirements................................................................................................................... 123
12.2 Specifications................................................................................................................... 123
Chapter 5 CONTROL ROOM...............................................................................................................125

1 Operator Workspace Equipment Specifications..........................................................................125
1.1 Operator Workspace (OW).................................................................................................125
1.2 Global Operator Cabinet (GOC)......................................................................................... 125
1.3 Host Display....................................................................................................................... 126
1.4 Host Keyboard....................................................................................................................127
1.5 Pneumatic Patient Alert...................................................................................................... 127
2 Oxygen Monitor (OXY) Option Specifications............................................................................. 129
Chapter 6 MR SYSTEM INTERCONNECTS....................................................................................... 131

1 MR System Interconnects Specifications.................................................................................... 131
1.1 Component Designator Definitions.....................................................................................131
1.2 Usable Cable Lengths........................................................................................................ 131
1.3 Multi-Nuclear Spectrocopy Option......................................................................................133
1.4 Brainwave Option............................................................................................................... 133
1.5 Magnetic Resonance Elastography (MRE) Option.............................................................134
2 MR System Interconnects Routing Requirements...................................................................... 135
2.1 General Requirements....................................................................................................... 135
2.2 Magnet Room Requirements..............................................................................................136
2.2.1 Recommended Cable Groupings.............................................................................. 136
2.2.2 Cable Tray Requirements and Examples.................................................................. 137
2.3 Penetration Panel Closet Requirements............................................................................ 140
2.4 Equipment Room Requirements........................................................................................ 141
3 MR System Cable Specifications................................................................................................ 143
4 Facility Supplied System Interconnects Specifications............................................................... 149
Chapter 7 APPENDICES..................................................................................................................... 151

1 Glossary...................................................................................................................................... 151
2 MR Site Vibration Test Guidelines...............................................................................................154
2.1 Test Measurements............................................................................................................154
2.2 Equipment (Spectral Analyzer) Set-Up...............................................................................154
2.3 Data Collection................................................................................................................... 155
2.3.1 Ambient Baseline Condition.......................................................................................155
2.3.2 Normal Condition....................................................................................................... 155
2.4 Presentation/Interpretation of Results................................................................................ 155
3 RF Shielding Guidelines..............................................................................................................161
3.1 Discrete RF Interference.................................................................................................... 161
3.2 Broadband RF Interference................................................................................................ 161
4 RF Shielding Effectiveness and Ground Isolation Testing.......................................................... 162
4.1 Ambient Radio Frequency Interference (RFI).....................................................................162
4.2 Introduction.........................................................................................................................162
4.2.1 Discrete RF Interference............................................................................................162
4.2.2 Broadband RF Interference....................................................................................... 162
4.2.3 Ambient Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) Site Survey........................................ 162
4.3 RF Shielding Effectiveness (SE) and Ground Isolation Test Methods............................... 163
4.3.1 Introduction................................................................................................................ 163
4.3.2 Test Set-Up for RF Shielded Room .......................................................................... 163
4.3.3 Shielding Effectiveness (SE)..................................................................................... 164
4.3.4 Reference Level and Dynamic Range....................................................................... 164
4.3.5 Test Equipment..........................................................................................................164
4.3.6 Test Frequency..........................................................................................................165
4.3.7 Measurement Procedure........................................................................................... 165
4.3.7.1 Shielding Effectiveness Measurement..............................................................166
4.3.7.2 Reference Level Measurement.........................................................................166
4.3.7.3 Attenuated Level Measurement........................................................................168
4.3.7.4 Shielding Effectiveness calculation...................................................................169
4.3.8 RF shielded Room Ground Isolation Resistance Measurement Method ..................169
4.3.9 RF Shield Test Report............................................................................................... 170
5 Acoustic Background and Design Guidelines............................................................................. 172
5.1 Acoustic Background..........................................................................................................172
5.1.1 Airborne..................................................................................................................... 172
5.1.2 Structureborne...........................................................................................................172
5.2 Acoustic Design Guidelines................................................................................................173
5.2.1 Magnet Room............................................................................................................ 173
5.2.2 Inter-Spacial Areas.................................................................................................... 173
5.2.2.1 Wall Construction..............................................................................................173
5.2.2.2 High Bay RF Room...........................................................................................175
5.2.2.3 Miscellaneous Plumbing, RF Windows and RF Doors..................................... 175
6 Sample Calculation AC Power Equipment Minimum Distance................................................... 177
7 Selecting Magnet Anchor Size.................................................................................................... 179
8 Magnet Cryogenic Venting Pressure Drop Reference Tables.................................................... 181
Chapter 1 Introduction
1 Preinstall Manual Introduction
WARNING
EQUIPMENT FAILURE OR PERSONNEL INJURY
FAILURE TO IMPLEMENT ALL REQUIREMENTS AND ADHERE TO ALL
SPECIFICATIONS IN THIS MANUAL MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY,
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE, SCAN FAILURE, OR WARRANTY VOID.
THE IMPLEMENTATION OF ALL REQUIREMENTS AND ADHERENCE TO ALL
SPECIFICATIONS IN THIS MANUAL IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE
CUSTOMER OR ITS ARCHITECT AND ENGINEERS. REFER ANY
QUESTIONS TO THE GE HEALTHCARE PROJECT MANAGER OF
INSTALLATION (PMI).
NOTICE
The customer is responsible for compliance with all local and National codes and
regulations.
1.1 Document Purpose

This preinstallation manual provides the necessary information to prepare a site
for system installation. Specifically, this manual provides information:
1. To define system requirements and interactions
2. For the effective arrangement and interconnection of system components
1.2 Intended User
The primary user of this manual is the customer's architectural planner. Customer is responsible
for:
1. National and local building codes
2. Customer site procedures (medical, MR, safety, etc.)
3. Any special architectural requirements
1.3 Document Overview
This manual describes requirements and specifications for the following:
1. General System Requirements
2. Shipping and Delivery
3. Magnet Room
4. Equipment Room
5. Control Room
6. Interconnects
Chapter 1 Introduction 25
2 Symbols Key
Table 1-1: Symbols Key
Symbol/Unit Definition
in (mm) All units of measurement are inches with millimeters in parentheses, unless otherwise noted.
Center of gravity
Center of magnet
26 2 Symbols Key
Chapter 2 General System Level

1 System Level Requirements for Installing into Existing MR Suite
When planning for the installation of the system in an existing GE Healthcare MR
suite, all requirements in this manual must be met. Ensure the following:
NOTE: When planning installation in a non-GE Healthcare MR suite all requirements in this
manual must be met as these rooms are considered new installations.
When upgrading from an HFO system, extensive building updates are required. The
facility must remove any magnet room isolation system.
1. Magnetic field stability tests (HSS tool) may be used for vibration environmental assessment
(for GE cylindrical magnets only)
NOTE: The customer may have to hire a vibration consultant based on the results of the
analysis
2. Remove, cover, or fill-in abandoned ducts or troughs and remove access/computer room
flooring from the Equipment and Magnet rooms
3. The VibroAcoustic dampening kit must be surface mounted (if the floor is recessed, it must
be filled in)
4. RF vendor responsibilities:
a. The old dock anchor cannot be reused. It must be removed and the hole filled in. The
new anchor is reset after the magnet is installed
b. The RF shield ceiling must support the cable routing mechanism and cables. Reinforce
RF shield ceiling (see Chapter 6, MR System Interconnects Routing Requirements)
c. Two penetration panel openings are required and must meet the requirements in:
Chapter 4, PEN and SPW Wall Opening Requirements (includes PEN and SPW panels)
d. RF shield attenuation must comply with: Chapter 3, RF Shielded Room Requirements
5. Cryogen vent must be relocated to align with the Magnet Cryogen Vent opening (see
Chapter 3, Magnet Room Venting Requirements)
Chapter 2 General System Level 27

2 System Components
The system consists of the following components:
2.1 Magnet Room
1. 3.0T Magnet and Magnet Enclosure (MAG) and VibroAcoustic Dampening Kit
2. Rear Pedestal (PED)
3. Patient Transport Table (PT)
4. Optional: Surgical suite table
5. Magnet Rundown Unit (MRU). Note: An optional remote MRU may be located outside the
magnet room.
2.2 Equipment Room
1. Main Disconnect Panel (MDP) (may be customer supplied)
2. Power, Gradient, RF Cabinet (PGR)
3. Heat Exchanger Cabinet (HEC)
4. Penetration Panel Cabinet (PEN)
5. Secondary Penetration Wall (SPW)
6. Cryocooler Compressor Cabinet (CRY)
7. Magnet Monitor (MON)
8. Optional: Multi-Nuclear Spectroscopy (MNS)
9. Optional: Brainwave Lite (BW)
10. Optional: CADstream
11. Optional: MR Guided Focus Ultrasound (FUS)
12. Optional: Magnetic Resonance Elastography (MRE)
2.3 Control Room
1. Operator Workspace equipment (OW)
2. Pneumatic Patient Alert System (PA1)
3. Optional: Oxygen Monitor (OXY)
2.4 Accessories
1. Patient accessories, including phantoms, cushions, sponges, straps, and wedges
2. Gating accessories, including patient cardiac leads, peripheral gating probe, and respiratory
bellows
28 2 System Components
3 MR Suite Minimum Room Size Requirements

CAUTION
Procedure Failure
The minimum service area shown must be kept clear of permanent or installed
cabinetry, mill work, shelving, coil storage fixtures, furniture, etc.
The ceiling service area should be kept clear of overhead items, including soffits,
HVAC, plumbing components, and brackets. Permanent or installed objects in
this area may prevent or delay magnet service or operation.
Room dimensions shown in the table below lists the minimum finished room space
requirements to properly and safely operate and service the MR system. The items listed below
are not included in the minimum area dimensions:
1. Building code requirements (e.g., exit routes, door placement, local and national electrical
codes, etc.)
NOTE: The customer must provide Equipment and Magnet Room evacuation routes to
comply with facility emergency procedures.
2. System requirements, including cable run locations, cryogen venting, patient observation
requirements, and penetration panel placements (e.g., the Equipment room and Magnet
room must share a common wall to allow penetration panel installation)
3. Penetration panel closet and all associated areas (must be outside the minimum finished
room dimensions)
4. Non-GEHC equipment options (such as additional AC or water cooling equipment in the
Equipment room)
5. Accessory storage. Refer to the Customer Site Storage Requirements manual (document
number 5182674) or contact the GE Healthcare Project Manager of Installation (PMI) for
any additional accessory storage requirements
Table 2-1: Minimum Room Dimensions
Configuration Equipment Room Magnet Room Control Room Total System

(See the illustrations below for specific Area
dimensions) ft2 (m2)
WxD Area Ceiling WxD Area Finished WxD Area
in. (mm) ft2 (m2) Height in. (mm) ft2 (m2) Ceiling in. (mm) ft2 (m2)
in. (mm) Height
in. (mm)
Minimum Room Size 124.75 (3167) 143.5 x 253 60 x 84

228.3
(2050 mm Scan x 112.75 85 (7.9) 114 (2896) (3645 x 98.5 (2500) (1524 x 35 (3.2) 348 (32.3)
(21.2)
Range) (2863) 6426) 2134)
With MR Guided Fo‐ Contact the Project Manager of Installation (PMI) for FUS site planning details.
cused Ultrasound
With MNS Add: 15 (1.4)
With CADStream Add:

1.25
(0.11)
With Brainwave Add: 13.25 (1.25)

Illustration 2-1: Minimum Magnet Service Area (Top View)
Table 2-2: Minimum Magnet Service Area Notes
Shaded area within solid lines indicates minimum service area; dashed line indi‐
cates alternate design tradeoff area
NOTE: Shaded area within solid lines indicates floor to ceiling minimum height of 98.5 (2500)
NOTE: Special service procedures are required if ceiling height is between 98.5 in. (2500
mm) and 105 in. (2667 mm). Contact PMI to ensure the correct ramp leads have been
ordered.
30 3 MR Suite Minimum Room Size Requirements

Illustration 2-2: Minimum Magnet Ceiling Height (Top View)
NOTE: Contact the GE Healthcare Project Manager of Installation (PMI) for additional
information or to request designs.

4 IEC EMC Compliance

Per IEC 60601-1-2 Medical Electrical Equipment requires special precautions regarding
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) and must be installed and put into service according to the
EMC information provided in the following tables. Full declaration is stored on-site in the user
manual delivered with the system.
The MR system is designed and tested to the following standards:
Table 2-3: Guidance And Manufacturer’s Declaration – Electromagnetic Emissions
The system is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of the system should
assure that it is used in such an environment.
Emissions Test Compliance Electromagnetic Environment – Guidance
RF Emissions CISPR 11 Group 2 The system must emit electromagnetic energy in order to perform its
intended function. Nearby electronic equipment may be affected
RF Emissions CISPR 11 Class A The system is suitable for use in all establishments other than domestic
and those directly connected to the public low-voltage power supply
network that supplies buildings used for domestic purposes
Table 2-4: Guidance And Manufacturer’s Declaration – Electromagnetic Immunity
The system is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of the system should
assure that it is used in such an environment.
Immunity test IEC 60601 test level Compliance Level
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) IEC ±6 kV contact ±6 kV contact

61000-4-2
±8 kV air ±8 kV air
Electrical fast transient / burst IEC ±2 kV for power supply lines ±2 kV for power supply lines
61000-4-4
±1 kV for input/output lines ±1 kV for input/output lines
Surge IEC 61000-4-5 ±1 kV line(s) to line(s) ±1 kV differential mode
±2 kV line(s) to earth ±2 kV common mode
Voltage dips, short interruptions and volt‐ <5 % UT (>95 % dip in UT) for 5 sec. <5 % UT (>95 % dip in UT) for 5 sec.
age variations on power supply input
lines IEC 61000-4-11
Power Frequency (50/60Hz) magnetic 3 A/m 3 A/m

field IEC 61000-4-8
Conducted RF IEC 61000-4-6 3 Vrms 150 kHz to 80 MHz 3 Vrms
Radiated RF IEC 61000-4-3 3 V/m 80 MHz to 2,5 GHz 3 V/m
32 4 IEC EMC Compliance

5 MR System Seismic Requirements

Contact the Project Manager of Installation with any questions.
1. The customer is responsible for seismic anchoring of GE components
2. Center of gravity, weight, physical dimensions, and attachment points are provided for
seismic calculations. Refer to the specifications or illustrations for each component (see
Chapter 3, Magnet Room Equipment Specifications, Chapter 4, Equipment Room, and
Chapter 5, Control Room)

6 MR Suite Acoustic Specifications

6.1 Acoustic Specifications
The following table lists the acoustic output of GE Healthcare equipment:
Table 2-5: Acoustic Specifications (Under Ambient Conditions)
GE Equipment Acoustic Output Notes
Control Room 62 dBA
Equipment Room 80 dBA The 80 dBA level is for GE equipment only.

The Equipment room acoustic level must
not exceed 85 dBA
Magnet Room See Chapter 3, Acoustic Room Specifications
The customer must use acoustic noise containment solutions to control leakage of acoustic
noise from one room to the next. Refer to Chapter 7, Acoustic Background and Design
Guidelines for guidance to contain the noise within the magnet room.
NOTE: All GE equipment acoustic output values are for base equipment configuration in each
room.
6.2 Structureborne Vibration Control Specifications
Structureborne acoustic issues tend to occur at MR installations above the ground floor of the
facility. Two options to mitigate structureborne acoustic transmission are:
1. GE Healthcare provides a VibroAcoustic Dampening kit (which must be surface mounted).
Contact the GE Healthcare Project Manager of Installation for information
2. The customer may design and implement a custom solution in addition to the VibroAcoustic
Dampening kit (see Illustration 2-3 for the plot of spectral vibration transmitted through the
VibroAcoustic mat into the floor. If required, the customer should consult an acoustic
engineer for a solution to further attenuate this transmitted vibration)
NOTE: The amount of vibration attenuation provided by the VibroAcoustic Dampening kit will
be site dependent.
Illustration 2-3: Vibration Transmitted through VibroAcoustic Mat
34 6 MR Suite Acoustic Specifications

Illustration 2-4: Low Frequency Magnet Floor Vibration (Vibration Amplitude at Each Foot)
NOTE: Low Frequency Magnet Floor Vibration Notes:

1. Illustrations above define the potential vibration level that may pass into the
customer site. Illustration 2-3 is the high frequency audible vibration. Illustration
2-4 is low frequency vibration that may dynamically displace the floor
2. Vibration transfer may be the result of customer specific building construction as
low levels of vibration transmit into the building via air- and structureborne paths.
Customer MR clinicians recognize the vibration defined in the tables is typically
short bursts of vibration repeated multiple times as the scan progresses
3. The customer should consider the impact of this vibration for evaluation and
design solution

7 MR Suite Magnetic Field Specifications

7.1 Magnetic Fringe Field
The following illustrations show the static magnet isogauss plot lines for a 3.0Tmagnet. This
information must be used to evaluate potential site interaction of GE Healthcare equipment with
other non-GE Healthcare equipment, interaction with magnetic materials on the site, and to
locate personnel and equipment within the site.
The 5 gauss line can expand to 19.7 ft (6.0 m) axially and 14.8 ft (4.5 m) radially for up to 8
seconds in the rare event of a quench.
The isogauss plots show an idealized magnetic field relative to magnet isocenter. The actual
field strength can be affected by any of the following:
• Magnetic shielding
• Earth's magnetic field
• Other magnetic fields
• Stationary or moving metal
Illustration 2-5: Magnetic Fringe Field Side View
36 7 MR Suite Magnetic Field Specifications

Illustration 2-6: Magnetic Fringe Field Top View

Illustration 2-7: Magnetic Fringe Field Front View
7.2 Interference from Changing Magnetic Fields

Metal objects moving within the magnet sensitivity lines can produce a field disturbance during
clinical imaging. If the metal object is moving it will produce a fluctuating dipole type of field
which causes image artifacts. As an example, a car driven inside the moving metal line will act
as a dipole and produce a time varying field which changes the magnet's main field during the
imaging time. The same vehicle may park within the moving metal line and remain parked
during clinical scanning without impact to the main field.

Illustration 2-8: Magnet Moving Metal Sensitivity Line Plot (Side View)
Illustration 2-9: Magnet Moving Metal Sensitivity Line Plot (Top View)

Table 2-6: Magnet Moving Metal Requirements
Metal Objects Category Definition Of Distance Location Magnet Minimum Distance Radial X Axial ft (m) See Note
1
Objects 100 - 400 lbs Distance from isocenter radial x axial 3 Gauss line
Cars, Minivans, Vans, Distance from isocenter measured to center of driving 20 x 25 (6.05 x 7.65)
Pickup Trucks, Ambu‐ or parking lane radial x axial
lances
Bus, Trucks (Utility, Distance from isocenter measured to center of driving 23.3 x 29.2 (7.10 x 8.90)
Dump, Semi) or parking lane radial x axial
Objects > 400 lbs, Ele‐ Place a directional probe (e.g. flux gate sensor) at iso‐ Refer to the notes below:
vators, Trains, Subways center of proposed magnet location aligned along the
Z-axis. Measure peak-to-peak magnetic field change
(DC).
Notes:
1. Radial distances are magnet X and Y axis. Axial distances are magnet Z axis.
2. EMI disturbances must not exceed 5.6 milligauss peak-to-peak.
7.3 Electrical Current

1. Electrical current in high voltage power lines, transformers, motors, or generators near the
magnet may affect magnetic field homogeneity
2. Magnetic field interference at 50 or 60 Hz must not exceed 16.22 or 17.10 milligauss RMS
respectively at the magnet location (refer to Illustration 2-10)
3. The following equation can be used as a general guide in determining allowable current in
feeder lines at a given distance from the magnet isocenter:
a. For 3.0T Magnet: I= (8.55X2)/S, where:
b. I = Maximum allowable RMS single phase current (in amps) or maximum allowable RMS
line current (in amps) in three phase feeder lines
c. S = Separation (in meters) between single phase conductors or greatest separation
between three phase conductors
d. X = Minimum distance (in meters) from the feeder lines to isocenter of the magnet

Illustration 2-10: Magnet Allowable Milligauss vs. Line Frequency for AC Equipment
Refer to Chapter 7, Sample Calculation AC Power Equipment Minimum Distance for additional
examples.
7.4 Non-MR System Equipment Sensitivity to Magnetic Fields
This section lists equipment known to be sensitive to high magnetic fields. Recommended limits
given are based on general MR site planning guidelines. Actual susceptibility of specific devices
may vary significantly depending on electrical design, orientation of the device relative to the
magnetic field, and the degree of interference considered unacceptable.
Site plans must include consideration for magnetic field interaction with all customer equipment.
Use the table for reference only. The gauss limits in the table are approximate for that type of
equipment. Refer to OEM manuals for the equipment at your site to determine the actual Gauss
limits.
Table 2-7: Magnetic Proximity Limits (For Reference Only)
Gauss (mT) Limit Equipment
0.5 gauss (0.05mT) Nuclear camera
1 gauss (0.1mT) Positron Emission Tomography scanner Video display (tube)
Linear Accelerator CT scanner

Gauss (mT) Limit Equipment
Cyclotrons Ultrasound
Accurate measuring scale Lithotriptor
Image intensifiers Electron microscope
Bone Densitometers
3 gauss (0.3mT) Power transformers Main electrical distribution transformers
5 gauss (0.5mT) Cardiac pacemakers Biostimulation devices
Neurostimulators
10 gauss (1mT) Magnetic computer media Telephone switching stations
Hard copy imagers Water cooling equipment
Line printers HVAC equipment
Video Cassette Recorder (VCR) Major mechanical equipment room
Film processor Credit cards, watches, and clocks
X-ray tubes
Large steel equipment, including:
Emergency generators Air conditioning equipment
Commercial laundry equipment Fuel storage tanks
Food preparation area Motors greater than 5 horsepower
50 gauss (5mT) Metal detector for screening Telephones
LCD panels
No Limit Digital Detectors

8 Multiple MR System Requirements

8.1 Multiple Magnets
When installing multiple magnets, the 3 gauss lines must not intersect or the magnets will be
interactive. Contact the GE Healthcare Project Manager of Installation (PMI) for any questions
regarding magnetic field interaction.
Illustration 2-11: Two Magnet Installation
8.2 Shared Equipment Rooms

When installing multiple MR systems in a shared equipment room, the following conditions must
be met:
1. RF cabinets must be separated by at least 79 in. (2000 mm)
Refer to Illustration 2-12 for cabinet location examples.
2. Cables from different MR systems must not be routed together
3. Penetration panels must be separated by at least 118 in (3000 mm)

Illustration 2-12: Equipment Room Cabinet Separations (Equipment Room, Top View)
44 8 Multiple MR System Requirements

9 MR Suite Temperature and Humidity

CAUTION
Equipment Failure
Failure to maintain the required temperature or humidity at all times (i.e., both
working and non-working hours) may result in equipment failure, scanning failure,
or warranty void.
Ensure the HVAC system has the correct capacity for the room size, equipment
heat output, and environmental conditions to maintain proper temperature and
humidity.
This section provides temperature and humidity requirements for the MR suite. Specific
construction requirements for each room can be found in the following sections:
• Magnet Room
• Equipment Room
• Control Room
9.1 Temperature and Humidity Requirements

Table 2-8: Room Temperature and Humidity Requirements
Temperature Humidity
Room
Range °F (°C) Change °F/Hr (°C/Hr) 1 Range %RH Change %RH/Hr2
Equipment Room (at Inlet to Equip‐ 59-89.6 (15-32)3 5 (3) 30-70 5

ment)
Magnet Room 59-69.8 (15-21) 5 (3) 30-60 5
Operator Room 59-89.6 (15-32) 5 (3) 30-70 5
Notes:
1. Operating temperature gradient limits shall be between -5° F/Hr (-3° C/Hr) and 5° F/Hr (3° C/Hr), when averaged over 1 hour
2. Operating humidity gradient limits shall be between -5% RH/hour and 5% RH/hour, when averaged over 1 hour
3. Maximum ambient temperature is derated by 1 degree C per 300 m above 2000 m (not to exceed 2600 m)
1. The customer is responsible for HVAC system design, purchase, and installation
2. The temperature requirements must not be exceeded at any point during the day (both
working or non-working hours)
3. A separate thermostat must be provided for the Magnet room
9.2 Equipment Heat Output Specifications
This section details the heat output for specific components. These heat outputs define the
minimum, maximum and an assumed average condition over a 12 hour period. Actual heat
output and room temperature may vary due to environmental factors, room insulation, actual
usage, and any non-GE Healthcare equipment used in the MR suite. Also, due to large
variations in heat loads, the HVAC system may require unloaders, hot gas bypass, and reheat
to maintain humidity levels.

Table 2-9: System Heat Output for Air Cooling
Component Magnet Room Equipment Room Control Room

BTU/hr (W) BTU/hr (W) BTU/hr (W)
Maximum Average Idle Maximum Average Idle Maximum Average Idle
Magnet (MAG) and Patient Transport 8,189 4,095

1,915 (561)
Table (PT) (2,400) (1,200)
Blower Box 1,535 (450) 1,535 (450) 1,535 (450)
Penetration Panel Cabinet (PEN) 1,024 (300) 512 (150) 0 10,697 5,349 5,349
(3,135) (1,568) (1,568)
Secondary Penetration Wall (SPW) 0 0
Main Disconnect Panel (MDP) 901 (264) 450 (132) 450 (132)
Power, Gradient, RF Cabinet (PGR) 20,940 10,470 8,530

(6,137) (3,068) (2500)
Cryocooler Compressor (CRY) 1,706 (500) 1,706 (500) 1,706 (500)
Heat Exchanger Cabinet (HEC) 3,412

1,706 (500) 1,706 (500)
(1,000)
Magnet Monitor (MON) 819 (240) 819 (240) 819 (240)
Operator Workspace equipment (OW) 4,947 (1,450)
Table 2-10: System Options Heat Output for Air Cooling
Component Magnet Room Equipment Room Control Room

BTU/hr (W) BTU/hr (W) BTU/hr (W)
Maximum Average Idle Maximum Average Idle Maximum Average Idle
Multi-Nuclear Spectroscopy Cabinet

24,584 (7,205)
(MNS)
BrainWave HW Lite Cabinet (BW) 2337 (685) base (2781 (815) with op‐
tions)
MR Elastography 480 (141)
CADstream 6049 2725 (799) 1209 (354) Note: May be located in either Equip‐
(1773) ment or Control Room per site re‐
quirements
46 9 MR Suite Temperature and Humidity

10 Facility Coolant Requirements

NOTICE
Equipment Failure. A continuous supply of facility liquid coolant to the Heat
Exchanger Cabinet (HEC) is required at all times for proper system operation.
Failure to provide liquid coolant with the requirements listed in this section may
cause equipment failure.
10.1 Heat Exchanger Cabinet (HEC) Coolant Requirements
1. The facility must provide liquid coolant to the Heat Exchanger Cabinet (HEC)
2. The facility must provide pipe/hose, filter, and connectors to the HEC
3. The facility must provide an uninterrupted supply of liquid coolant to the HEC at magnet
delivery
4. The vertical distance between the coolant connection points of the HEC and the Gradient
Coil must be less than 196.8 in. (5 meters)
5. The HEC, CRY, and PGR Cabinets must be located on the same floor
6. The customer must provide and install an in-line flow meter on either the supply or return
facility coolant hose. The flow meter must be capable of visually displaying volumetric flow
between 20 and 50 gpm (76 and 189 L/min) and configured for the properties of the cooling
fluid in use
Table 2-11: Facility Liquid Coolant Requirements
Parameter Requirements
Availability Continuous
Antifreeze no more than 40% propylene glycol
Minimum Flow 30 gpm (114 L/min)
Maximum Flow 35 gpm (132 L/min)
Maximum Pressure Drop in HEC at Mini‐ 34.8 psi (2.4 bar) with 40% propylene glycol-water; 1021 kg/m3 density
mum Flow
Maximum Pressure Drop in HEC at Max‐ 47.8 psi (3.3 bar) with 40% propylene glycol-water; 1021 kg/m3 density
imum Flow
Temperature rise at Minimum Flow 17.3°F (9.6°C) with 40% propylene glycol-water; 3730 J/(kg K) specific heat; 1021 kg/m3 density; 70 kW heat
Temperature rise at Maximum Flow 15.1°F (8.4°C) with 40% propylene glycol-water; 3730 J/(kg K) specific heat; 1021 kg/m3 density; 70 kW heat
Maximum Inlet Pressure to HEC 87 psi (6 bar)
Chiller Size Minimum 70 KW
Condensation Protection Facility Plumbing to the HEC must be properly routed and insulated to prevent equipment damage or safety
hazards
Minimum Continuous Heat Load 7.5 KW
Inlet Temperature 42.8 to 53.6°F (6 to 12°C) measured at the inlet to the HEC
Customer supplied feeder hose (from 1.5 inch (38.1 mm) minimum hose inside diameter
main water supply to HEC)
Hose connections to the HEC 1.5 inch (38.1 mm) male NPT

Illustration 2-13: Allowable Facility Water Temperature and Flow
Illustration 2-14: Pressure Drop through HEC (40% PGW, 1021 kg/m3)
48 10 Facility Coolant Requirements

Illustration 2-15: Temperature Rise through HEC (40% PGW, 3730 J/kg-K, 1021 kg/m3)

Illustration 2-16: Temperature Rise through HEC (0% PGW, 4182 J/kg-K, 997 kg/m3)
Table 2-12: Facility Water Quality Requirements
pH Value 6.5 to 8.2 at 77 °F (25 °C)
Electrical Conductivity < 0.8 mmho/cm
Chloride Ion < 200 ppm
Sulfate Ion < 200 ppm
M-Alkalinity < 100 ppm
Total Hardness < 200 ppm
Calcium Hardness < 150 ppm
Ionic Silica < 50 ppm
Iron < 1.0 ppm
Copper < 0.3 ppm
Sulfide Ion None, not detectable
Ammonium Ion < 1.0 ppm
Residual Chlorine < 0.3 ppm
Free Carbon Dioxide < 4.0 ppm
Stability Index 6.0 to 7.0

Suspended Matter < 10 ppm
Particle Size < 100 micron (with field changeable filter)
Illustration 2-17: MR System Water Cooling Block Diagram
10.2 Emergency Facility Coolant Requirements

The facility may provide an optional backup coolant supply in one of the following
configurations:
1. Full system functionality: Backup coolant is routed through the HEC and meets all HEC
coolant requirements in Section 10.1
2. Cryocooler operation only: Backup coolant is routed through the HEC and meets all HEC
coolant requirements except temperature. Temperature must meet the requirements listed in
Illustration 2-18. (Note: Full HEC flow requirements must still be met. The HEC will split off 6
L/min to the cryocooler compressor)
3. Cryocooler operation only: Coolant may be routed directly to the Cryocooler compressor at
the location indicated in with the following requirements:
a. The facility is responsible for coolant, pipe/hose, filters, and connectors to supply the
coolant to the CRY
b. The emergency coolant supply must isolate the Cryocooler Compressor and not back-
feed the HEC
c. Coolant must meet all other HEC coolant requirements listed in Table 2-12

d. The charts below shows the coolant flow rate and temperature requirements for the
Cryocooler Compressor:
Illustration 2-18: Cryocooler Water Cooling Requirements

11 MR Suite Electrical Requirements

11.1 General Electrical Requirements
1. Customer is required to install a Main Disconnect Panel (MDP)
a. GEHC supplied MDP option, M7000WL
b. Customer Supplied Option
i. MDP Design Requirements (see Section 11.2)
ii. MDP Design Setup (see Illustration 2-19)
2. The facility must provide system power to the MDP
3. All associated transformers and cables must be correctly sized for system power
requirements
4. The facility must provide cabling from the MDP to the Power, Gradient, RF (PGR) cabinet
and from the MDP to the Heat Exchanger Cabinet (HEC)
Table 2-13: Facility Power Requirements
Component Parameter Requirements
At Main Dis‐ Voltage / Frequency 480 VAC 60 ±3 Hz

connect Pan‐
el (MDP) 415 VAC 50 ±3 Hz, 60 ±3 Hz
400 VAC 50 ±3 Hz, 60 ±3 Hz
380 VAC 50 ±3 Hz, 60 ±3 Hz
Daily Voltage Variation Customer to provide +7.5% / -10% from nominal at MDP input under all line and load
conditions. This includes variation of power source and transmission losses up to the
MDP.
Phase Input power to the MDP may use one of the following configurations:
• A 3 phase solidly grounded WYE with Ground (4-wire system)
If a neutral wire exists, it must be terminated prior to or inside the MDP
• A 3 phase floating DELTA with Ground (4-wire). Do not connect a corner

grounded DELTA source
Note: Some UPS options may require a neutral (refer to manufacturer documentation
for requirements).
Phase Balance Difference between the highest phase line-to-line voltage and the lowest phase line-
to-line voltage must not exceed 2%
Power Quality Recommended THD of less than 2.5%
Facility Zero Voltage • The facility ground for the MR system must originate at the system power source
Reference Ground (i.e., transformer or first access point of power into the facility) and be continu‐
ous to the MR system Main Disconnect Panel (MDP) in the room.
• Main facility ground conductor to Main Disconnect Panel (MDP) must be appro‐
priately sized insulated copper wire.
• The main facility ground to the Main Disconnect Panel (MDP) must meet local
codes.

Component Parameter Requirements
Power Availability Continuous facility power is required at all times for operation of the Cryocooler (CRY)
to minimize cryogen consumption.
Service re‐ Voltage / Frequency 100-120 VAC 50/60 Hz Receptacle required for small power tools. Local volt‐
ceptacle in age and portable transformers for voltage values.
Magnet Phase 1
Room Maximum Amps 2.0
Table 2-14: System Power Demand
Equipment Power Draw (kVA)
PDU Continuous Power 79
PDU 5 Second Power 103
HEC Continuous Power (including Cyro) 20
Cryo Compressor Continuous Power 9
Total System 5 Second Power 123
Total system Continuous Power 99
Standby Consumption (no scan) (PDU, HEC, CRY) < 17
54 11 MR Suite Electrical Requirements

Illustration 2-19: MR System Main Disconnect Panel (MDP) Set-Up
NOTE: Optional customer supplied backup power must be provided to the facility breaker
(see Standby Power Demand for minimum power requirement)
11.2 Main Disconnect Panel (MDP) Requirements
WARNING
PERSONNEL INJURY OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
CUSTOMER SUPPLIED MDP MUST HAVE CORRECTLY SIZED WIRES AND
RATED COMPONENTS TO MEET THE MR SYSTEM POWER
REQUIREMENTS.

WARNING
PERSONNEL INJURY OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
IF THE HEC POWERS THE CRYO COMPRESSOR, THE MDP EMERGENCY-
OFF FUNCTION MUST DISABLE THE AUTO RESTART FUNCTIONALITY
WHEN ACTUATED.
1. MDP to provide Auto-Restart. Auto-Restart to provide power to the Cryo compressor. See
Table 2-14
2. Manual Restart Capability
a. A low voltage release feature to disconnect the PDU upon power loss
b. The PDU circuit must require a manual restart when power is reapplied to the main
panel
3. Emergency Off Circuit
a. The MDP must have an emergency off control circuit that disables power to the entire
MR system
b. The emergency off circuit must be actuated by remotely located push button(s) (see
Illustration 2-19)
c. The wire size for the emergency-off circuit is 12–22 AWG and is supplied by the
customer.
d. The manual reset must be required to restore power to the entire system
e. Two sets of isolated, normally closed contacts that open when an emergency off button
is actuated must be provided for optional accessories
4. Lock-out/Tag-out
a. The MDP break must have capability to lock-out for single point Lock-out/Tag-out
requirements
b. A standard sized hasp for lock-out
5. The MDP must be marked as required by national/local regulations
6. The MDP must provide terminations for all grounds entering, leaving and residing within the
panel
7. The MDP must provide terminations of appropriate size for all power wiring entering and
leaving the panel
a. Terminal blocks that can accept 3/0 AWG on the main panel
b. Terminal blocks to accept 8 AWG on the HEC
c. Terminal blocks to accept 1/0 AWG on the PDU
8. The optional GE Healthcare DV MDP consists of the following:
a. A 3-pole 200A main circuit breaker rated for the total current of all the sub-breaker
circuits

b. A 3-pole 150A circuit breaker rated for the current of the PDU circuit
c. A 3-pole 50A circuit breaker rated for the current of the HEC circuit
d. All circuit breakers have a short circuit current interrupting rating of 25000 Amps
e. Auto restart on the HEC circuit
f. Emergency off circuit including 2 pushbuttons to be installed external to the MDP
g. Terminal blocks that can accept 3/0 AWG on the main, 8 AWG on the HEC and 1/0
AWG on the PDU
h. Input neutral terminal block
i. Multiple ground terminal blocks as required by panel design
j. Listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Lab (NRTL) in accordance with
UL 508A and IEC/EN 60204–1 and bear the CE Marking in accordance with the EU Low
Voltqage Directive (2006/95/EC) and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (2004/108/
ED).
k. Power on indicators
l. Two isolated, normally open contact pairs that open when e-OFF is pressed for use with
optional accessories
11.3 Emergency Power Backup Requirements
If facility power is interrupted, the cryogen compressor and MagMon3 must continue to operate.
Thus, the facility must provide backup power to these units.
NOTE: The compressor requires emergency chilled water backup defined in the Emergency
Facility Coolant Requirements.
• The facility must provide a dedicated, single power supply to the compressor
• The MagMon3 must always have power, including emergency power (110V / 220V, 2A).
Refer to Chapter 4, Magnet Monitor (MON) Requirements and Specifications.
• Emergency Off Circuit (EOF) is required for the emergency backup to the compressor.
LOTO is also required for the power source between the generator and compressor.
• The customer must provide a transfer switch to remove the primary power source from the
compressor when in emergency backup power mode.
Table 2-15: Emergency Power Requirements to Cyrocooler Compressor
Power Line Voltage AC 380, 400, 415V / 50 Hz, 3 phase (3W+PE)

AC 460, 480V / 60 Hz, 3 phase (3W+PE)
Commercial Power Source
WARNING
DO NOT USE AN INVERTER FOR THE MAIN POWER
SOURCE.

Operating Current Max. 13A (Both 50 and 60 Hz)
Starting current 75 / 80 A (50/60 Hz)
Minimum Circuit Ampacity 17A
Maximum Fuse or Circuit Breaker Size 30A
Power Requirement Minimum 9 kVA
Power Consumption Max. 8.3 kW / Steady State 7.5 kW at 60 Hz

Max. 7.2 kW / Steady State 6.5 kW at 50 Hz

12 MR System Shipping and Receiving

NOTICE
All shipping dimensions and weights are approximate and may vary based on
ship-to location, required rigging, or other requirements. Some shipping or
access routes may have requirements in addition to those listed in this section.
Contact the GE Healthcare Project Manager of Installation (PMI) to verify magnet
shipping, rigging, and access.
12.1 Receiving Requirements
1. The customer must provide an area for unloading system components from the truck and
delivering to the MR suite
NOTE: Contact the GE Healthcare Project Manager of Installation (PMI) for a list of
experienced rigging companies.
2. The customer is responsible for ensuring:
a. All floors along the route will support the weight of the magnet (GE Healthcare
recommends a structural analysis)
b. Doors or other openings are sufficiently wide to allow passage
c. Sufficient room is provided for any required rigging tools
12.2 Facility Delivery Route Requirements
The following table lists the delivery dimensions of system components. Upon delivery, verify
the component dimensions and weight. The delivery route must be planned to accommodate
the dimensions listed.
Table 2-16: Delivery Route Requirements
Width Depth Height Weight

Component Notes
in mm in mm in mm lbs kg
Magnet See Magnet shipping dimensions Table 2-17
Cryogen Dimensions vary depending on dewar type used. Verify with cryogen supplier.
PGR Cabinet 78.75 2000 34.3 871 83 2108 3459 1569 Cabinets are moved with
dollies attached to each
HEC Cabinet 55.2 1402 34.3 871 75 1905 1130 513 side (adding 20 in. (520
PEN Cabinet mm) to the width and 180
lbs (82 kg) to the weight).
Cabinets must be raised to
44.1 1120 39.4 1001 76 1930 819 371 remove the pallet but may
be lowered almost to floor
level while moving.
12.3 MR System Component Shipping Specifications

MR system component shipping dimensions and weight are listed below:

Table 2-17: MR System Component Shipping Specifications
WxDxH Weight
MR Component Notes
in. mm lbs kg
Magnet (as shipped but 89 x 82 x 93 2261 x 2083 x 2362 16,790 7,616 Tarped wood frame
without lifting bars) — See
Illustration 2-20
Magnet (as shipped with 89 x 94 x 93 2261 x 2388 x 2362 17,050 7,734

lifting bars)
Magnet (Crated for Inter‐ 96 x 114 x 96 2438 x 2896 x 2438 19,250 8,732
national Shipping)
Magnet Accessory Equip‐ 48 x 48 x 28 1219 x 1219 x 711 400 182 Crate

ment
VibroAcoustic Damping 36 x 65 x 12 914 x 1651 x 305 575 261 Box on pallet

Kit
Cryocooler Compressor 26 x 28 x 42 660 x 711 x 1067 275 125 Pallet with box cover
Rear Pedestal Assembly 34 x 58 x 48 864 x 1473 x 1219 310 141 Box on pallet
with Rear Split Bridge As‐
sembly, Low Profile Car‐
riage Cover
GEM Enclosure 93 X 39 X 34 2362 x 991 x 874 150 68 Box on a pallet
GEM Enclosure 94 X 66 X 28 2388 x 1675 x 711 150 68 Box on a pallet
Patient Table 618 280

94 x 29 x 38 2388 x 737 x 965 Pallet
GEM Patient Table 663 301
Power Gradient RF Cabi‐ 67.25 x 41 x 1701 x 1041 x 2235 3654 1657 Pallet
net (PGR) (Domestic) 88
Power Gradient RF Cabi‐ 68.25 x 42 x 1727 x 1067 x 2337 3654 1657 Pallet
net (PGR) (International) 92
Penetration Panel Cabinet 43.75 x 35.25 1117 x 895 x 2051 710 322 Pallet
(PEN) (Domestic) x 80.75
Penetration Panel Cabinet 44.75 x 35.25 1137 x 895 x 2153 770 350 Pallet
(PEN) (International) x 84.75
Heat Exchanger Cabinet 45 x 44.75 x 1143 x 1137 x 2032 1075 488 Pallet
(HEC) (Domestic) 80
Heat Exchanger Cabinet 46 x 45.75 x 1168 x 1162 x 2134 1150 522 Pallet
(HEC) (International) 84
Secondary Penetration 21 x 24 x 64 533 x 610 x 1626 101 46 Pallet with cardboard cover
Wall
SPT Phantom Set 34 x 32.5 x 864 x 826 x 1524 350 159 On cart casters with box cover
60
Operator Workspace Cab‐ 24 x 35 x 31 610 x 889 x 787 243 110 Wood pallet with cardboard cover
inet
Operator Workspace Dis‐ 27 x 33 x 27 686 x 838 x 686 125 57 Pallet

play
Operator Workspace 32 x 32 x 23 813 x 813 x 584 100 45 Box

equipment
Operator Workspace Ta‐ 45 x 54 x 37 1143 x 1372 x 940 180 82 Box

ble
60 12 MR System Shipping and Receiving

Table 2-18: MR System Service Component Shipping Specifications
Shim Tray Extraction Tool 40 x 102 x 1016 x 2591 x 648 477 216 Case on pallet (pallet weight 225 lbs,
(Box 1) 25.5 102 kg)
Shim Tray Extraction Tool 48 x 58 x 54 1219 x 1473 x 1372 591 268 Case on pallet (pallet weight 200 lbs,
(Box 2) 91 kg)
Table 2-19: MR System Optional Component Shipping Specifications
4kw MNS Amplifier Cabi‐ 23 x 39 x 50 584 x 991 x 1270 600 272 On cabinet casters, wrapped with plas‐
net tic
8kw MNS Amplifier Cabi‐ 24 x 37 x 71 610 x 940 x 1803 180 82 On cabinet casters, wrapped with plas‐
net tic
BrainWaveHW Lite Cabi‐ 24 x 23 x 72 610 x 584 x 1829 320 145 On cabinet casters, wrapped with plas‐
net tic
Illustration 2-20: Magnet Dimensions (as Shipped)
Table 2-20: MR System Component Replacement Shipping Specifications
WxDxH Weight
Component Notes
in. mm lbs kg
Split Bridge 21.5 x 77.3 546 x 1963 x 178 40 18

x7
Power Gradient RF Cabinet 67.25 x 41 x 1708 x 1041 x 2335 3654 1657 Pallet
(PGR) (Domestic) 88
Power Gradient RF Cabinet 68.25 x 42 x 1734 x 1069 x 2336 3654 1657 Pallet
(PGR) (International) 92

WxDxH Weight
Component Notes
in. mm lbs kg
3.0T RF Amplifier 19 x 27 x 24 483 x 686 x 610 400 181 Pallet
HEC Pump 41 x 25 x 39 1041 x 635 x 991 220 100
HEC Blower 41 x 25 x 39 1041 x 635 x 991 150 68
Replacement RF Body Coil 30 x 30 x 60 762 x 762 x 1524 255 116 Replacement coil is shipped in a pro‐
tective case. Weight & dimensions
are for coil & case.
Replacement XRM Gradient 39 x 99.84 x 991 x 2536 x 1499 3194 1449 Initial Gradient Coil Assembly is ship‐
Coil Assembly on a Shipping 59 ped installed in the Magnet. Shipping/
Cradle/Cart See Note installation cart is used to install re‐
placement coil assembly only.
Gradient Coil Replacement 30 x 86 x 28 762 x 2184 x 711 750 340 Gradient Coil Assembly and shipping
Tool Kit Crate cart dimensions are with cart in low‐
est position. Cart can be adjusted to
maximum height of 61.88 in. (1572
mm).
Illustration 2-21: Gradient Coil Cart
NOTE: Dimensions are in inches. Bracketed dimensions are in millimeters.
62 12 MR System Shipping and Receiving

Chapter 3 Magnet Room

1 Magnet Room Introduction
The Magnet Room is best understood as a series of layers, or “rooms within a room.” Each of
these rooms has a specific function and associated requirements. All requirements in this
chapter must be followed to ensure safe and proper operation of the MR system.
1. The Magnetic shielded room contains the MR Magnet fringe field within a confined space. A
site survey is required to determine magnet shield requirements (not all sites require
magnetic shielding). Because of the added cost of magnetic shielding, room location should
be carefully considered.
2. The Acoustic room is a layer used to help attenuate the noise produced during a scan. An
acoustic engineer is strongly recommended to assess the environment.
3. The RF Shielded room is critical to the proper MR system operation. RF shielding prevents
interaction of external RF radiation with MR system operation and it also prevents MR
system RF radiation from interfering with external systems, such as aircraft control. Special
care must be used when installing all fixtures penetrating the RF shield (e.g., vents,
electrical conduit, penetration panels) to ensure the integrity of the RF shield is maintained.
4. The Finished room includes the wall coverings, ceiling tile, ceiling grid, other fixtures,
Magnet (MAG) and Patient Table (PT). When planning the finished room, ensure the
following:
a. All building codes are met (such as maintaining egress routes)
b. Items which may generate or create RF interference (including florescence lighting) are
not allowed for installation within the Magnet room
c. Customer is responsible for the selection and installation of all locally required safety
devices (e.g., smoke detectors, oxygen monitors, etc.)
d. Ferrous or metallic items which could become projectiles when the magnet is installed
(including wall coverings, ceiling tile, ceiling grid, or other fixtures) are not used or
properly secured
Chapter 3 Magnet Room 63

Illustration 3-1: Magnet Room Layers
Table 3-1: Magnet Room Layers Notes
1 Penetration panels 5 RF shielding
2 Window 6 Acoustic barrier
3 Door 7 Magnetic shielding
4 Finished room
64 1 Magnet Room Introduction

2 Magnet Room Structural Requirements

This section lists the structural requirements that must be considered when performing site
evaluation and planning of the Magnet room.
2.1 Overview
1. When preparing a building plan or evaluating a potential site for an MR system, care should
be taken to ensure the MR suite will not interact with the surrounding environment (i.e.,
magnetic, acoustic, environmental steel, and vibration)
2. The customer is responsible for vibration testing required to verify suitability of a proposed
site. All test results and any questions regarding testing, results, or analysis must be
forwarded to the GE Healthcare Project Manager of Installation (PMI)
2.2 Environmental Steel Limits
A static magnetic field extends in a three-dimensional space around the magnet isocenter.
Environmental steel within the static magnetic field affects the uniformity (or homogeneity) of the
field. Field uniformity is critical to both image quality and chemical shift analysis (spectroscopy).
An analysis of the environmental steel is required within a 5 feet (1.524 meters) spherical radius
of the magnet isocenter. Environmental steel includes ferrous pipes, beams, concrete rebar, or
any other structural steel in the floors, walls, or ceiling.
The following floor items must be limited per Table 3-2.
1. Non-movable steel construction material such as rebar and metal decking
2. Existing or proposed RF/magnetic shielding or shim plates
3. Table 3-2 defines the limits of use as a guideline to help the customer understand allowable
amounts of ferrous rebar, steel decking, or other components as they design the MR suite
and magnet room floor structure
4. The customer must provide detail defining ferrous material below the magnet to the Project
Manager so the GE Healthcare MR Siting and Shielding team can review for compliance.

Table 3-2: Steel Mass Limits to Magnet Isocenter (10 ft. x 10 ft. Area Under Magnet)
Limits Of Steel Mass lbs/ft2 (kg/m2) Distance From Magnet Isocenter in. (mm) Distance Below Top Surface Of Floor in.
(mm)
0 (0) 0-45 (0-1143) 0-3 (0-76)
2 (9.8) 45-47 (1143-1194) 3-5 (76-127)
3 (14.7) 47-52 (1194-1321) 5-10 (127-254)
8 (39.2) 52-55 (1321-1397) 10-13 (254-330)
20 (98.0) 55+ (1397+) 13+ (330+)
2.3 Vibration Requirements

Excessive vibration can affect MR image quality. Vibration testing must be performed early in
the site planning process to ensure vibration is minimized. Both steady state vibration (exhaust
fans, air conditioners, pumps, etc.) and transient vibrations (traffic, pedestrians, door slamming,
etc.) must be assessed (see Illustration 3-2). Specific requirements for vibration mitigation,
include:
1. The Magnet (MAG) cannot be directly isolated from vibration. Any vibration issue must be
resolved at the source
2. MR Suite HVAC must have vibration isolation
3. A vibration analysis must be performed at the proposed site with the results (and any
mitigation) forwarded to the GE Healthcare Project Manager of Installation (PMI). See the
Chapter 7, MR Site Vibration Test Guidelines
4. A transient vibration test must only be performed after a steady-state test has been
performed and all steady-state sources of vibration have been mitigated
5. Transient vibration levels above the specified limits in the Chapter 7, MR Site Vibration Test
Guidelines must be analyzed
6. Any transient vibration that causes vibration to exceed the steady-state level must be
mitigated
7. Vibration test consultant must account for non-mechanically induced signals such as test
equipment instabilities, thermal drift or RF interference
66 2 Magnet Room Structural Requirements

Illustration 3-2: Magnet Steady State Vibration Specifications
Table 3-3: Magnet Steady State Vibration Specifications
Acceleration (g) 10-6 (RMS) above ambient baseline Excitation frequency (Hz)
65 0–7
70 7 – 25
100 25 – 29
300 29 – 33
500 33 – 39
750 39 – 45

3 Magnetic Shielded Room Requirements

NOTICE
All sites, including upgrade sites, must be evaluated for magnetic shielding
requirements. Existing magnetic shielding at an upgrade site may not be
sufficient for the new system. Contact the GE Healthcare Project Manager of
Installation (PMI) to request a site evaluation.
Magnetic shielding prevents interaction between the magnet and nearby sensitive devices.
Because of the added cost of magnetic shielding, room location should be carefully considered
(not all sites require magnetic shielding). See Chapter 2, MR Suite Magnetic Field Specifications
for detailed magnetic proximity limit information.
1. The GE Healthcare Project Manager of Installation (PMI) works with the customer to
coordinate the magnetic shielding site evaluation
2. If required, the GE Healthcare Project Manager of Installation (PMI) coordinates the delivery
of the magnetic shielding design
3. The customer is responsible for installation of all magnetic shielding
68 3 Magnetic Shielded Room Requirements

4 Acoustic Room Specifications

The acoustic room is a layer used to help contain the noise (within the Magnet Room) which is
produces during clinical scanning. The following information is provided for the acoustic
engineer to design for acoustic noise containment within the Magnet room.
Table 3-4: Acoustic Specifications
Maximum Sound Pressure Level1 Frequency Range
Magnet Bore Isocenter 127 dBA 2
See Illustration 3-3

Front of Magnet - 800 mm from bore measurement 120 dBA
Notes:
1. Maximum Sound Pressure Levels is defined as the maximum allowable level any MR scanner can produce while protecting
the patient to the IEC 60601-2-33 code.
2. The total energy, SPL, is derived through the log sum of each 1/3 band octave totaling the 127 dBA. That is, the maximum
single 1/3 band is lower than the published values at both the isocenter and at the front of the magnet
Illustration 3-3: Sound Pressure Spectral Distribution (1/3 Band Relative SPL)
NOTE: The MR product clinical operation will generate sound pressure proportional to the
specific clinical application. The entire spectra (envelope) shown above (Illustration
3-3) represents the relative 1/3 band octave sound pressure the MR scanner may
transmit into the air. The acoustic room will best suit the customer when the 127 dBA
proportionally distributed as defined by the Illustration
Refer to Chapter 7, Acoustic Background and Design Guidelines for acoustic design
information.

5 RF Shielded Room Requirements

5.1 RF Shielded Room Purpose
The RF shielded room is critical to the proper clinical operation of the MR system. RF shielding
attenuates the external RF electromagnetic fields. Low RF environments present lower risk to
RF impacts to image quality. The RF shielding must also prevent the MR system RF emissions
from interfering RF receiving systems such as other MR systems, aircraft control and
communication systems.
RF shielding requirements consider the current RF environment at the site as well as future
conditions, such as expansion, with the addition or upgrade of multiple MR systems, as well as
changes to the RF environment at the time of installation. The RF shielding requirement also
considers the expected degradation over time from the RF shielded room from corrosion and
use.
The overall RF shielding performance aims to address:
1. IEC EMC Regulatory Compliance
2. MR Clinical image quality for the life of the product
5.2 RF Definitions
Broadband Interference
Broadband interference is caused by electrical discharge within the Magnet room. Potential
sources of interference can be reduced by limiting static discharge, ensuring all metal-to-metal
contact is tight and secure, and ensuring all electrical and grounding requirements are met.
Discrete Interference
Discrete interference is fixed-frequency, narrowband RF noise. Potential sources of discrete
interference are radio station transmitters and mobile RF transmitting devices. Magnet room RF
shielding prevents external RF energy from entering the room and degrading the MR system RF
receivers.
Electromagnetic Environment
The totality of electromagnetic phenomena existing at a given location.
Plane Wave
An electromagnetic wave which predominates in the far-field region from an antenna (or
source), and with a wave front which is essentially a flat plane.
Penetration
The passage through a partition or wall of an equipment or enclosure by a wire, cable, pipe,
waveguide, or other conductive object.
Shield
A housing, screen, or cover which substantially reduces the coupling of electric and magnetic
fields into or out of circuits or prevents the accidental contact of objects or persons with parts or
components operating at hazardous voltage levels.
70 5 RF Shielded Room Requirements

Shielding Enclosure (Faraday Cage)

An area (box, room, or building) specifically designed to attenuate electromagnetic radiation, or
electromagnetic radiation and acoustical emanations, originating either inside or outside the
area.
Shielding Effectiveness (SE)
A measure of the reduction or attenuation in the electromagnetic field strength at a point in
space caused by the insertion of a shield between the source and that point.
Primary Ground
All RF Shield components (walls, floor, ceiling, etc) must be electrically bonded together to form
one common ground plane which is connected to the Facility Grounding Conductor
Secondary Ground
Other grounds that connect the outside of the RF Shield room to earth grounds are called
secondary grounds
5.3 Customer Responsibilities
The Customer is responsible for:
1. The selection of a quality RF shielded room vendor who understands the RF shielding room
purpose described in Section 5.1.
2. Contracting with a RF shielded room vendor to design and install (including installation of
dock anchor) the RF shielded room to meet requirements in Section 5.4.
3. Maintenance and repair of RF shielded room, to include, but not limited to, shielding
effectiveness (SE), door threshold and door seal, pressure equalization vent operation for
the life of the MR System.
NOTE: • On request, the GE Healthcare Project Manager of Installation (PMI) can supply a
list of RF shielding room vendors.
• The RF shielded room may not be in a temperature or humidity controlled

environment, the customer must take local measures to prevent RF shield
effectiveness degradation.
• Special care should be used when installing all fixtures penetrating the RF shield
(e.g., vents, electrical conduit, penetration panels, etc.) to ensure the integrity of
the RF shielded room is maintained.
5.4 Requirements
5.4.1 RF Shield Requirements
1. The RF shielded room with installed blank penetration panels shall provide a minimum of
100 dB of shielding effectiveness (SE) for the entire room at the following frequencies:
a. 127.72 MHz +/- 0.5 MHz
b. 102.20 MHz +/- 0.5 MHz
c. 153.30 MHz +/- 0.5 MHz

NOTE: ○ The RF shielded room is designed and installed to meet or exceed the 100 dB
of SE. Acceptance of lower SE performance is a customer responsibility with
an absolute lower limit of 90 dB. The Customer must recognize the risk to
accepting a lower quality RF shielded room. The RF shielded room
performance degrades over time. Accepting a RF shielded room of low
performance will result in additional cost to the customer on repairs after room
construction is complete impacting clinical use of the product.
○ The final shielding effectiveness performance of the RF shielded room is

determined based on the lowest measurement of all test point locations.
2. The RF shielded room must be isolated from earth ground by more than 1000 ohms DC
resistance during construction (before electrical installation)
3. The RF shielded room must be grounded to the RF common ground stud (which is
grounded back to the Power Distribution Unit in the Power, Gradient, RF cabinet)
See Grounding Requirements for RF Shield room grounding details
4. RF shielded room installation materials must meet steel mass limits listed in Magnet Room
Structural Requirements to keep magnetic field homogeneity
5. Any moving part (such as doors) must not contain magnetic materials
5.4.2 RF Shield Test Requirements
1. The minimum tests points for shielding effectiveness must be the following locations:
a. Walls
b. Penetration panels
c. Doors
d. Blower box removal hatch
e. All windows, including patient viewing window
f. Skylights
g. Penetration waveguides installed for GE Healthcare and Non-GE Healthcare options
h. Power filters
2. Chapter 7, RF Shielding Effectiveness and Ground Isolation Test Methods provides details
for shielding effectiveness measurement based on IEEE Std 299-2006
3. When measuring shielding effectiveness (SE), the following must be installed for the RF
shielded room:
a. All floor mounting bolts (including dock anchor bolt)
b. RF shielded door(s)
c. Waveguide penetrations, HVAC, cryogen vents, medical gas lines, system options
(including FUS, MRE, etc.)
d. AC power supplied through low-pass filters

e. Patient view window, skylights, windows, hatches, etc.

f. PEN Panel frames and blank penetration panels installed, dimensionally equivalent to
the GE panel and the same mounting hardware to be used with the GE penetration
panels
4. GE Healthcare Field Engineer must be present during RF SE testing and a test report must
be delivered to the PMI
5. Shielding Effectiveness (SE) test equipment must be calibrated
NOTE: The calibration cycle of equipment must be no greater than 2 years.
5.4.3 RF Shield Test Report
A test report must be prepared by the testing organization performing the shielding
effectiveness and ground isolation resistance tests for the RF shielded room. The test report
includes data necessary for the evaluation of the shielding effectiveness performance and
ground isolation of the RF shielded room. The test report must contain as a minimum the
following information:
1. Name of the owner organization or hospital
2. Name of testing organization
3. Identification name for the RF shielded room being tested
4. Name of test personnel
5. Date of test
6. Frequencies tested
7. Shielding effectiveness measured for each test point location (each test point location must
be identified in the test report)
8. RF shielded room drawing showing each test point location
9. List any changes pertinent to the test setup or SE results (e.g., limited separation distance of
antennas, limited access to test points, etc.)
10. Perform a dock anchor pull test that is greater than 600 lbs.
11. Ground isolation test results and the condition of the room when tested (e.g., RF room
completed without internal finishes and no electrical connections). This test must be
performed before the site is turned over to the general contractor for electrical installation
12. Blank Pen Panel is installed
13. Pass/Fail conclusion
14. The following information for each piece of all calibrated equipment used for measurement:
a. Manufacturer
b. Model
c. Serial number

d. Current calibration date and calibration due date

15. Results of the dock-table anchor pull test.
5.4.4 Dock Anchor Mounting Requirements
Illustration 3-4: Dock Anchor Mounting Options
1. The RF Shield vendor must design and install the dock anchor bolt
2. The dock anchor hole must be drilled after the Magnet is installed
3. The dock anchor must not contact floor rebar or other structural steel
4. The dock anchor must electrically contact the RF shield at point of entry
5. The dock anchors must have the following properties:
a. Anchors must be two-part assembly (male/female)
b. Female side must be expansion- or epoxy-type
c. Male side must be a bolt or threaded rod with appropriate-sized nut (bolt or rod must be
removable--not epoxied or cemented in place)
d. Anchors must be electrically conductive
e. Anchors must be non-magnetic
f. Anchors must not induce galvanic corrosion with the RF shield
g. Anchors must be commercially procured

h. The anchor rod hole clearance in the dock anchor base is 0.43 in. (11). The anchor rod
diameter must be sized appropriately
i. Anchors must meet the following clamping force: 600 lbs (2,669 N)
j. The anchor rod must extend 2.25 in. ±0.5 in (60 mm ±13 mm) above the finished floor
k. The anchor rod must be less than 6 in (152 mm) in total length (length above the floor
plus embedded length)
l. If underside of deck is metallic, then insulating bushing must be added to through bolt
hardware to prevent grounding of shield at this point.
6. The RF shield vendor must perform a pull test on the anchor (equal to the clamping force).
Results must be provided to the GE Healthcare Project Manager of Installation (PMI)
7. The RF shield vendor must provide instructions for removal / replacement of the table
anchor without using a torque wrench. Instructions must be given to the GE Healthcare
Project Manager of Installation (PMI).
5.4.5 RF Shielding Integrity Reliability Requirements
1. Ensure all joints and mechanical connections remain secure:
a. All solder joints clean and properly prepared
b. All mechanical fasteners sufficiently tightened and secured
c. Do not use rivets or self-tapping screws (as these tend to loosen over time due to
vibration)
2. Prevent RF shield corrosion:
a. Avoid contact between dissimilar metals
b. Ensure all joints and seams are properly dressed using proper materials
NOTE: Sacrificial anodes are recommended
3. Doors and door frames must be structurally stiff to prevent physical changes to the RF
shield

6 Finished Room Requirements

CAUTION
Personnel Injury or Equipment Damage
Metallic objects may become projectiles if not properly secured.
Remove or properly secure any metallic objects within the finished room.
1. Non-ferrous/non-metallic materials or components should be used in the Magnet room
2. Ferrous components or material in the Magnet room that could be removed for servicing,
cleaning, or replacement must be secured to prevent the ferrous material from becoming a
projectile (ferrous components or material must also be identified as ferrous to prevent
untrained personnel from working on the ferrous material while the magnet is energized)
6.1 Walls
See Acoustic Room Specifications. Hard, bare wall surfaces may create a harsh scan room
environment. Finished walls with acoustic detailing can reduce reflected noise.
1. GE Healthcare recommends finished walls to protect the RF shielding
2. Walls and any millwork, cabinets, storage areas, acoustic coverings, etc. must remain
outside the minimum service area
3. Metallic electrical conduit inside walls and ceilings may be used. Conduit for receptacles
must be metallic
6.2 Penetration Panel Closet
1. An enclosure (i.e., PEN closet) must be provided to restrict access to the PEN panels and
for storage of excess interconnections
a. The PEN closet must have a mechanical locking mechanism to restrict access to the
PEN panels
b. The PEN closet must maintain the minimum service area outside 200G in the Magnet
room as shown in Chapter 4, PEN and SPW Wall Opening Requirements.
c. The PEN closet may be expanded to provide an area for excess cable storage with the
following requirements:
i. Excess cable must not be stored within the minimum closet service area
ii. Excess cable must not interfere with access or servicing of the PEN panel or SPW
iii. The area within the PEN closet to store the cable should be sized to accept a 28 in
(711 mm) cable loop (2x the minimum bend radius of the largest cable)
d. PEN closet must allow free air exchange of 400 cfm (680 m3/hour) between the Magnet
room and PEN closet for MR system blowers. Airflow may be achieved through door
louvers or other openings in the PEN closet that meet all other PEN closet requirements
NOTE: The primary source of airflow must be from the Magnet room. Openings into
the area above a false ceiling or other storage areas should be minimized.
76 6 Finished Room Requirements

e. The penetration panel and SPW may be enclosed by separate closets with the following
requirements:
i. The maximum distance between the PEN panel and SPW is 108 in. (2743 mm)
ii. The separate closets must meet all other service area requirements for each
penetration panel
iii. Airflow as listed above must be provided for both closets
iv. Both closets must have mechanical locks
2. A closet service hatch must be provided if the room does not allow the PEN panel blower
box removal path to remain completely outside the 200 Gauss line (see Chapter 4, PEN and
SPW Wall Opening Requirements for location and service area requirements).
NOTE: If the room size is sufficiently large so the SPW blower box can be removed
without entering the 200 Gauss line, a closet service hatch is not required.
3. The closet service hatch must meet the following requirements:
a. Must be located within the PEN closet on the RF wall allowing access to the Equipment
room
b. May be located anywhere within the PEN closet with unobstructed pass-through. See
Chapter 4, PEN and SPW Wall Opening Requirements.
c. Must be minimum 20 in. x 20 in. (508 mm x 508 mm)
d. Must maintain RF shield integrity for all service access
e. May use any design (quick disconnect RF panel, blanker panel, hinged door, etc.) as
long as all other requirements are met
f. The closet service hatch removal must take less than 15 minutes (replacement must
also take less than 15 minutes)
g. If two penetration panel closets are used, the closet with the PEN panel must contain
closet service hatch
6.3 Doors and Magnet Access Openings
1. The finished opening of the Magnet room main door must be at least 43 in. (1092 mm) wide
to allow for helium dewars and patient tables
2. The customer must select the location of the Magnet room main door to allow for efficient
clinical patient flow and service procedures
3. Threshold height must not exceed 1 in. (25 mm) on both sides of the door with a maximum
10 degree threshold inclination
4. Patient viewing windows recommended dimensions are 48 in. wide by 42 in. high (1219 mm
x 1067 mm) and 72 in. (1829 mm) above the finished floor
NOTE: IEC requires the patient, while in the bore, be in full view of the operator. GE
Healthcare recommends using a window, although other means (e.g., camera and
video display) may be used as long as all IEC requirements are met

5. The magnet delivery requires opening into the room to allow access for the magnet delivery,
rigging, and personnel access
6.4 Finished Ceiling
1. The customer is responsible for the finished ceiling
2. Finished ceiling grid must be non-magnetic
3. An optional cable concealment kit is available
6.5 Magnet Room Floors
1. The finished floor must support the weight of all components (e.g., patient table, gradient
coil replacement cart) throughout operation and service life
2. The finished floor must be water resistant to protect the subfloor and shielding from water
damage
3. The customer is responsible for providing flooring to prevent the buildup to 8 kV
4. Magnet, Enclosure, and Patient Table areas must be flat and level within 0.125 in. (3 mm)
within the shaded area shown in Illustration 3-7
5. The VibroAccoustic Dampening kit to calculate floor loading. Seismic Kit M1060MA. See the
illustration below.
○ 2 pads per magnet, 255 lbs (116 kg) each

○ Nominal size: 24 in. x 65 in. (610 mm x 1651 mm) each
○ Magnet anchor option 1: Corner seismic anchor points (x4). Customer to address rebar
free zone in those areas
○ Magnet anchor option 2: Seismic anchor holes (x4) (1.5 in., 38 mm)
NOTE: Seismic anchors shall have a 3 in. (76) rebar-free area around the anchor and
shall install with assistance of the RF shield vendor.
A 4 in. (102 mm) rebar-free area is necessary under the table dock anchor, in
the position shown in the illustration below.
NOTICE
Table dock anchor hole is drilled only after magnet installation

Illustration 3-5: Magnet Mounting Detail (seismic)
6. The VibroAccoustic Dampening kit to calculate floor loading. ErgoPads Kit M7000VA (non-
seismic):
○ Weight: 17 lbs (8 kg) each

○ Size: 15.25 in. x 19.25 in. (390 mm x 495 mm) each
○ Anchor holes (x4) (1.5 in., 38 mm)
○ A 4 in. (102 mm) rebar-free area is necessary under the table dock anchor, in the
position shown in the illustration below.
NOTICE
Table dock anchor hole is drilled only after magnet installation

Illustration 3-6: Magnet Mounting Detail (non-seismic)
7. RF shield seams, joints, or overlaps must not be located under the VibroAcoustic mats
NOTE: Contact GE Healthcare PMI for magnet mounting details.

Illustration 3-7: Magnet Room Floor Levelness Area

7 Magnet Room Equipment Specifications

7.1 Magnet (MAG) Assembly Specifications
Rear Pedestal weight: 212 lbs (96 kg)
Table 3-5: Magnet Assembly Weight Table
Item Description Max Weight
Magnet (bare, plus cryogens) 14060 lbs (6378 kg)
Magnet (dry) 13540 lbs (6142 kg)
Gradient Coil (XRMw) 1890 lbs (857 kg)
Enclosures 365 lbs (166 kg)
Cryogens 520 lbs (236 kg)
Body coil 95 lbs (43kg)
Total weight shipped (excludes 96 inch crate) 16790 lbs (7816 kg)
Total weight air ship config (includes 96 inch crate) 18040 lbs (8183 kg)
All dimensions are for reference and are controlled on the component level drawings.
The replacement Gradient Coil Assembly weight is approximately 1900 lbs (860 kg), the shipping cradle is 132 lbs (60 kg), and the
Gradient Coil Assembly shipping/installation cart weighs 855 lbs (388 kg). The coil assembly outside diameter x length dimensions
are 35.7 x 57.2 in. (908 x 1452 mm).
Illustration 3-8: Magnet (MAG) and Rear Pedestal

7.2 Patient Table Specifications

7.2.1 Patient Table (PT)
Weight, empty: 418 lbs (190 kg)
Weight with maximum patient weight of 500 lbs (227 kg): 918 lbs (416 kg)
Illustration 3-9: Patient Table (PT)
Table 3-6: Patient Table Notes
All dimensions are in inches; bracketed dimensions are in millimeters
1 Top View
2 Front View
3 Side View
7.2.2 GEM Table

82 7 Magnet Room Equipment Specifications

Illustration 3-10: GEM Table
Table 3-7: GEM Table Notes
1 Top View
2 Side View
7.2.3 Optional Surgical Suite Transmobile Table


Illustration 3-11: Optional Surgical Suite Transmobile Table
Table 3-8: Surgical Suite TransMobile Table Notes
1 Top View
2 Side View
7.3 Magnet Rundown Unit (MRU) Specifications and Requirements

1. Location: The bottom edge of the MRU must be mounted 60 in. (1524 mm) above the
Magnet room floor near the front of the magnet enclosure
2. Weight: 7 lbs (3.2 kg)
3. Magnetic field limit: 200 gauss (20 mT)
4. The MRU is installed by the facility contractor
5. The MRU requires the following facility supplied power:
NOTE: Note: An optional remote MRU may be installed outside the magnet room. The
remote MRU does not require facility power. For more information, refer to MRU
vendor manual.
Table 3-9: MRU Facility Power Requirements
Voltage / Frequency 100-120 VAC 50/60 Hz
200-220 VAC 50/60 Hz
Phase 1
Maximum Amps 1.0
Connection type Hard wired/permanently wired directly to facility power, no plugs or connectors allowed. 1/2 in. PVC
Schedule 40 Conduit recommended
Availability Continuous
84 7 Magnet Room Equipment Specifications

Circuit Breaker Dedicated AC disconnect required for both live and neutral connections
Illustration 3-12: Magnet Rundown Unit (MRU)
Illustration 3-13: MRU Mounting Pattern
7.4 Oxygen Monitor Option Sensor Specifications

See Chapter 5, Oxygen Monitor (OXY) Option

8 Magnet Room Venting Requirements

8.1 Venting System Requirements
The Magnet Room requires the following venting systems:
1. HVAC
2. Emergency Exhaust
3. Pressure Equalization
4. Cryogenic venting
8.2 HVAC Vent Requirements
1. HVAC vendor must comply with Magnet room temperature and humidity specifications and
RF shielding specifications
2. RF Shield vendor must install open pipe or honeycomb HVAC waveguides
3. All serviceable parts in the Magnet room (e.g., diffusers) must be non-ferrous
4. Waveguides must be non-ferrous and electrically isolated
5. Incoming air must contain at least 5% air from outside the Magnet room (inside or outside
the facility) to displace residual helium
8.3 Emergency Exhaust Vent Requirements
1. Exhaust vent system is supplied by the customer
2. All items within the RF enclosure must be non-ferrous
3. The exhaust vent system must be tested and operational before the magnet is installed
4. The exhaust intake vent must be located near the magnet cryogenic vent at the highest
point on the finished or drop ceiling
5. Any space between finished ceiling and the RF ceiling must contain an additional exhaust
intake vent (to prevent helium from pooling above the finished ceiling)
6. If there is no space between the RF ceiling and finished ceiling, the intake vent may be
located on a side wall (must be on the coldhead side of the magnet, near the coldhead, with
the top edge of the vent flush to the finished ceiling)
NOTE: If used, vent diffusers must not extend beyond the vent opening to prevent helium
from pooling between the edge of the diffuser and the ceiling.
7. The Magnet room exhaust fan and exhaust intake vent must have a capacity of at least
1200 CFM (34 m3/minute) with a minimum 12 room air exchanges per hour
8. The exhaust fan must be installed outside of the RF shield and must remain fully functional
in the magnetic field per the fan specification sheet
9. The exhaust fan must have appropriate waveguides and di-electric break to maintain the RF
shield requirements (see RF Shielded Room Requirements)
86 8 Magnet Room Venting Requirements

10. The system must have a manual exhaust fan switch near the Operator Workspace (OW)
and in the Magnet room near the door (the switches must be connected in parallel)
NOTE: If the Magnet room contains an optional oxygen monitor, the Magnet room switch
is not required.
11. All system components must be accessible for customer inspection, cleaning, and
maintenance
12. Electromechanical fire dampers must not be used. Fusible link fire dampers may be used
(with annual inspection)
Illustration 3-14: Magnet Room Exhaust Fan Schematic

Illustration 3-15: Magnet Room Exhaust Fan Schematic with Optional Oxygen Monitor
8.4 Pressure Equalization Vent Requirement

1. A pressure equalizing vent is required in the magnet room ceiling or in the wall, at the
highest point possible
2. The vent minimum size must be 24 in. x 24 in. (610 mm x 610 mm) or equivalent area
3. The pressure equalization vent must be located so any Helium gas is not vented into
occupied areas
NOTE: Location may affect acoustic noise transmission into occupied spaces.
8.5 Cryogenic Venting
WARNING
CRYOGENIC BURNS OR ASPHYXIATION
FAILURE OF THE CRYOGENIC VENT MAY CAUSE EXTREMELY COLD
HELIUM GAS TO ENTER THE MAGNET ROOM OR OTHER OCCUPIED
BUILDING SPACE. DIRECT CONTACT COULD CAUSE CRYOGENIC BURNS
AND ASPHYXIATION COULD RESULT FROM OXYGEN DISPLACEMENT.
THE CUSTOMER IS RESPONSIBLE CRYOGENIC VENTING. DESIGNERS
AND INSTALLERS OF THE VENT MUST BE FAMILIAR WITH INDUSTRIAL
PIPING SYSTEMS.

The MR System (magnet) requires a cryogenic venting system to direct helium gas to an
unoccupied space if the magnet quenches. The cryogen venting system must direct all the
helium gas outside the facility, and it must keep all helium out of all facilities. The helium in the
magnet is a cold gas, which rapidly expands as it becomes warmer. The cryogen vent designer
must adhere to the following requirements for the material, construction and maintenance of the
vent. The customer is responsible for all of the cryogenic venting system.
Note the following:
1. All pipe or tube dimensions specified in this document are outside diameters unless
otherwise noted
2. See Chapter 7, Magnet Cryogenic Venting Pressure Drop Reference Tables to calculate
pressure drop for a specific system
Table 3-10: Magnet Cryogen Specifications
Magnet Types Helium Volume gallons (liters) Peak Helium Flow During Magnet Vent Pipe OD inches
Quench ft³ per min (m³ per min) (mm)
LC (3.0T) Magnet 515.14 (1950) 3214 (91) [Gas] 8 (203.2)
8.6 Vent Requirements Inside the Magnet Room

8.6.1 General
Refer to
1. The customer is responsible for design, installation, and maintenance of all cryogenic
venting materials inside the Magnet room
a. The cryogenic vent must be connected to the magnet within 24 hours of magnet delivery
b. Appropriate ventilation must be provided to evacuate the helium gas in the case of a
quench before the magnet is connected to the cryogenic vent. See,Section 8.3
2. The cryogenic vent must not transfer load to the magnet adaptor
3. GE Healthcare provides a flanged vent adapter that is 8 in. (203 mm) OD and 24 in. (610
mm) long. GE installs it straight up from the magnet (inline with the waveguide in the RF
shield). The vent tube can be cut as short as 4 in. (102 mm). See Illustration 3-16.
4. The customer must provide any additional vent tube (above the 1.0 ±0.25 in.gap) beyond
the 24 in. (610 mm) provided
5. Other cryogenic venting systems are allowable (e.g., sidewall, ceiling offset) as long as all
other cryogenic venting requirements are met
6. Do not remove or modify the vent adaptor bolted to the magnet
NOTE: The GE Healthcare supplied flanged adapter must be bolted directly to the magnet
vent adaptor bolt flange
7. The vent must be located within 0.25 in (6.35 mm) of the location (in relation to isocenter)
shown in Illustration 3-21

8. A 1.0 ±0.25 inch (25.4 ±6 mm) isolation gap must be included at the top of the GE
Healthcare supplied vent tube
Illustration 3-16: Flanged Magnet Vent Adapter
8.6.2 Vent Size

The total pressure drop of the cryogenic vent system (from the magnet vent interface to, and
including, the vent cap) must be less than 20 psi (138 kPa). The pressure drop of the RF shield
waveguide must be included in the overall calculation.
Refer to Chapter 7, Magnet Cryogenic Venting Pressure Drop Reference Tables
8.6.3 Vent Materials
1. The 8 in. (203 mm) OD vent material must be one of the following materials with the wall
thickness indicated:
a. SS 304: Minimum 0.035 in. (0.89 mm); Maximum 0.125 in. (3.18 mm)

b. AL 6061-T6: Minimum 0.083 in. (2.11 mm); Maximum 0.125 in. (3.18 mm)
c. CU DWV, M or L: Minimum 0.083 in. (2.11 mm); Maximum 0.140 in. (3.56 mm)
2. Either tubes or pipes may be used and must be seamless or have welded seams
3. Corrugated pipe or spiral duct must not be used
4. If required, bellows pipe less than 1 ft (30 cm) in length may be used as a thermal expansion
joint
5. The vent pipe must withstand a maximum pressure of 35 psi (241.4 kPa)
6. Waveguide vent material must match the outside diameter of the magnet flanged vent
adapter
8.6.4 Cryogen Vent Support
1. The venting system (including supports) must be sized to withstand 2500 lbs (11125 N)
helium flow reaction force at vent elbows
2. Any vent support connected to the RF shield must have a dielectric break
3. The Ventglas joint (GEHC-supplied) must not be used as a vent system support
8.6.5 Construction
1. A single dielectric break (i.e., Ventglas connection) in the vent system is required in the
Magnet room
a. Gap between the RF waveguide and GEHC-supplied vent tube must be 1.0 ±0.25 inch
(25.4 ±6 mm)
b. The outside diameter of the waveguide must match the outside diameter of the GE vent
tube within ± 0.125 in. (3 mm)
c. The Ventglas connection inside the scan room must be accessible for maintenance and
annual inspection
d. The distance between the bottom of the RF waveguide and the magnet room floor
cannot be more than 116.9 in. (2969 mm)
2. The Ventglas connection may also serve as a thermal expansion joint
3. All pipe section connections must be welded or brazed
4. All isolation/thermal expansion elements (except the Ventglas joint) must be rated to 4.5 K
(-451°F or -268°C) and 35 psi (241.4 kPa)
5. The vent system must be insulated with 1.5 inch (38 mm) thick flexible unicellular insulation
to prevent condensation during magnet ramping. Exposed insulation must be covered with a
white PVC jacket

Illustration 3-17: Waveguide
Illustration 3-18: Pipe Supports to Remove Vent Load from Ventglas Connection

8.7 Vent Requirements Outside the Magnet Room

The customer is responsible for design, construction, and maintenance of all cryogenic venting
materials outside the Magnet room from the shielded room waveguide to the vent cap.
8.7.1 Cryogen Vent Support
1. The venting system (including supports) must be sized to withstand 2500 lbs (11125 N)
helium flow reaction force at vent elbows
2. The customer supplied dielectric break must not be used to support the outside cryogenic
vent pipe
8.7.2 Vent Construction
1. GE Engineering recommends that the cryogen vent be constructed to the same specification
as required inside the Magnet Room.
2. The vent must be routed as directly as possible to the vent cap (i.e., venting system external
protective cover)
3. Expansion/contraction elements must be provided for temperature decrease from ambient to
4.5 K (-451°F or -268 °C)
4. A dielectric break must be installed adjacent to the waveguide
a. The dielectric break gap must be 1.0 ± 0.25 inch (25 ± 6 mm)
b. A customer supplied clamp may be used to connect the dielectric break
c. The dielectric break must be accessible for inspection or maintenance
5. All components must be rated to withstand the helium flow reaction force at temperatures
from ambient to 4.5 K (-451°F or -268°C)
6. Electromechanical fire dampers must not be used. Fusible link fire dampers may be used
(with annual inspection)
7. Vent cap must prevent ingress of weather elements (e.g., rain, snow, hail, sand, etc.) and
foreign material debris (e.g., leaves, bird nests, etc.)
8. Condensate must be prevented from pooling inside any section of the venting system (e.g.,
downward tilted vent system or local minima with weephole)

Illustration 3-19: Outside Dielectric Break (Customer-supplied)
8.7.3 Vent Exit
WARNING
CRYOGENIC BURNS OR ASPHYXIATION
DURING A QUENCH, EXTREMELY COLD GAS OR PARTICLES ARE
RELEASED FROM THE CRYOGENIC VENTING SYSTEM. A QUENCH MAY
OCCUR AT ANY TIME.
ENSURE ACCESS TO CRYOGEN VENT EXHAUST AREA IS RESTRICTED
AND THE RELEASED GAS DOES NOT REENTER THE BUILDING. REFER TO
THE SPECIFICATIONS BELOW.
1. An exhaust area in front of the vent 35 feet (10.7 m) long x 15 feet x (4.6 m) wide
(Illustration 3-20):
a. The facility is responsible for any exhaust area barriers, restrictions, and warning signs
b. Must not include air intake vents to prevent cryogen exhaust from reentering the facility
c. Must not include any personnel, building components, or objects (movable or stationary)
2. For a rooftop exit:
a. Use either a horizontal exhaust vent with a 90° elbow and minimal pressure drop or
other low pressure drop, high flow rate roof cap

b. The bottom of the 90° elbow must be at least 3 feet (0.9 meters) above the roof deck (or
higher if at risk of being blocked by drifting snow, sand, etc.)
c. The outlet must be covered with a 0.5 inch (12.7 mm) square screen mesh
d. The exhaust vent must be included in the pressure drop calculation
3. For a sidewall exit:
a. You can use an exhaust vent with a 45° elbow (with a deflector rated for the helium
reaction force), a 90° elbow, or vent cap with no restriction in gas flow
b. The exhaust exit must be at least 12 feet (3.66 meters) above the ground
c. The outlet must be covered with a 0.5 inch (12.7 mm) square screen mesh
d. The vent exit must be covered to prevent foreign material from entering or blocking the
opening (e.g., louvers, etc.)
e. The exhaust vent exit must be included in the pressure drop calculation
Illustration 3-20: Cryogenic Exterior Venting Volume

Illustration 3-21: Magnet Cryogenic Vent Location
8.8 Combined Vent

A site can combine cryogen venting from two GEHC MR systems.
NOTE: The customer chooses this option with the risk that a magnet quench may quench the
second magnet.
The waveguides of each system can connect via 45 degree elbow connectors to a 12 in. (305)
pipe as shown in the illustration below. The pipe must be sealed at the bottom, and a plate must
be fully welded to the inside of the pipe to correctly direct all cryogens out of the magnet room.
The plate and pipe used for the combined vent must be the same as the waveguide material.
1. The total pressure drop of the cryogenic venting system for each magnet (from the flanged
vent adaptor to the vent exit including the vent exit) must be less than 20 psi (138.0 kPa).
2. The pressure drop in the shared section of the vent must not exceed 4 psig
3. The combined vent pipe diameter selected to maintain the pressure drop will require the
combined pipe section diameter meet the back pressure and 35 psi internal pressure forces
4. The two magnet vents require a plate separating the entering pipes to prevent one magnet
quench from imposing a back pressure to the other magnet
5. The separation plate must be able to withstand the quench up to 35 psi internal pressure
caused by the impinging gas flow. Inspection/replacement of combined pipe section should
the separation plate distort post quench.
6. The venting system must have a structural support along any pipe section elbow and at the
joining of the two (2) magnet vents to the combined vent.

Illustration 3-22: Combined Vent
Combined Vent Illustration Notes:

1. The distance between the magnet and the tie-in point to the large diameter common pipe
should be minimized as much as possible.
2. The maximum pressure drop for each magnet between the magnet tie-in to the common
pipe and the vent exit to outside shall be less than or equal to 4 psi.
3. An additional pressure drop, equivalent to a standard 90 degree elbow, shall be added to
each magnet branch due to the entrance effect to the common pipe section.
4. Use the hydraulic diameter (instead of pipe diameter) when calculating the pressure drop
after a magnet branch ties-in to common vent pipe until it leaves the edge of the splitter
plate (yellow dashed lines in figure)
5. For a circular cross section of diameter D1, with the divider of height D1:
Hydraulic diameter = (πD1) / (π+2)
6. D2 is typically 8(203) in diameter (Illustration 3-22 is not to scale).

9 Magnet Room Electrical and Grounding Requirements

9.1 Electrical Line and Filter Requirements
1. RF Shielded Room vendor and electrical contractor must design and install all electrical
lines through the RF shielding
2. The RF Shielded Room vendor must supply electrical line filters for all lines through the RF
shielding (excluding electrical lines through the GE supplied Penetration panels) to ensure
compliance with the RF Shielded Room attenuation requirements
3. Electrical line filters must be located outside the 200 gauss (20 mT) line
9.2 Lighting Requirements
1. All lighting fixtures and associated components must meet all RF Shielded Room and RF
Grounding requirements (e.g., track lighting is not recommended due to possible RF noise)
2. All removable lighting fixtures and associated components must be non-magnetic
3. All lighting must use direct current (the DC must have less than 5% ripple)
4. 300 lux must be provided at the front of the magnet for patient access and above the
magnet for servicing
5. Fluorescent lighting must not be used in the Magnet Room
6. Lighting must be adjusted using a discrete switch or a variable DC lighting controller
7. SCR dimmers or rheostats must not be used
8. DC LED lighting may be used if the DC power converter is located outside the Magnet
Room RF Shield
9. Battery chargers (e.g., used for emergency lighting) must be located outside the Magnet
Room
10. Short filament length bulbs are recommended
11. Linear lamps are not recommended due to the high burnout rate
9.3 Grounding Requirements
1. The Penetration Panel Pen Wall and Secondary Pen Wall (SPW) are connected to the RF
Common Ground Stud with the GE Healthcare supplied ground cable (refer to Illustration
3-23Chapter 4, PEN and SPW Wall Opening Requirements )
2. All RF Power Filters over 30V (incomming) must be located within 40 in. (1016 mm) of the
RF Common Ground Stud
3. All power lines into the RF shielded room require an RF filter
4. All electrical devices (e.g., outlets, light fixtures, etc.) must have a ground wire from device
power source and be grounded to the RF Shield at the RF Common Ground Stud
5. Resistance between any two grounded devices must not exceed 0.1 ohm to ensure equal
potential ground system within the Magnet Room (e.g., MGD to PDU)
98 9 Magnet Room Electrical and Grounding Requirements

6. Do not ground non-MR equipment to the MR ground system

7. All metallic pipes (including water, medical gas, sprinklers, etc.) entering the RF Shield,
excluding the Cryogenic Vent and floor drains, must be located within 56 inches (1422 mm)
of the RF Common Ground Stud
8. The illustration below shows a typical ground layout
Illustration 3-23: Typical Magnet Room Grounding
NOTE: See Chapter 6, MR System Interconnects Specifications for usable cable lengths.

100 9 Magnet Room Electrical and Grounding Requirements

Chapter 4 Equipment Room

1 Equipment Room Overview
The illustration below shows an Equipment room layout example.
NOTE: Colored areas indicate service/installation areas. These areas can overlap as
necessary as shown below. See individual component descriptions and room
requirements for service area details. Magnet Monitor (MON) can be mounted on the
side of the wall near the HEC. Optional equipment is not shown; additional space is
required for options such as BrainWave, MNS, DC lighting, etc. If you use the
minimum service area, it will be necessary to use riggers to install the equipment.
Chapter 4 Equipment Room 101

Illustration 4-1: Equipment Room Layout Example
102 1 Equipment Room Overview

2 Main Disconnect Panel (MDP) Specifications

The Main Disconnect Panel (MDP) is optionally provided with the MR system.
1. Weight: 130 lbs (59 kg)
2. Magnetic Field Limit: 50 Gauss (5 mT)
Illustration 4-2: Main Disconnect Panel

3 Power, Gradient, RF Cabinet (PGR) Specifications

1. Weight (GEM or non-GEM): 3279 lbs (1487 kg)
Illustration 4-3: Power, Gradient, RF (PGR) Cabinet
104 3 Power, Gradient, RF Cabinet (PGR) Specifications

4 Heat Exchanger Cabinet (HEC) Specifications

Facility coolant is supplied to the Heat Exchanger Cabinet (HEC). The HEC provides closed
loop chilled water circuits for the Power, Gradient, RF (PGR) Cabinet in the equipment room
and the Gradient Coil inside the Magnet Enclosure. The HEC also routes facility chilled coolant
to the Cryocooler Compressor (CRY).
1. Weight (approximate):
a. Dry (shipping – no fluid): 950 lbs (431 kg)
b. Wet (with cooling fluid): 1350 lbs (612 kg)

Illustration 4-4: Heat Exchanger Cabinet (HEC)
106 4 Heat Exchanger Cabinet (HEC) Specifications

5 Penetration Panel Cabinet (PEN) Specifications

The Penetration Cabinet Penetration Panel provides interconnects from the PEN Cabinet
through the Magnet Room RF Shield.
2. PEN Panel Magnetic Field Limit: 200 Gauss (20 mT) for the entire PEN Panel (i.e., the
blower box must be outside the 200 Gauss line)
PEN Cabinet Magnetic Field Limit: 50 Gauss (5 mT)
3. The PEN cabinet must be positioned directly in front of the PEN Panel. See PEN and SPW
Wall Opening Requirements for PEN panel mounting and location requirements

Illustration 4-5: PEN Cabinet
108 5 Penetration Panel Cabinet (PEN) Specifications

6 Secondary Penetration Wall (SPW) Specifications

The Secondary Penetration Wall (SPW) provides interconnects from the Equipment Room
through the Magnet Room RF Shield.
1. Maximum Magnetic Field: 200 Gauss (20mT)
2. See PEN and SPW Wall Opening Requirements mounting and location requirements
3. The service area for the SPW is 36 in (914mm) from both sides the RF wall, and from floor
to cable trays.

Illustration 4-6: Secondary Penetration Wall (SPW)
110 6 Secondary Penetration Wall (SPW) Specifications

7 PEN and SPW Wall Opening Requirements

1. The Equipment Room and the Magnet Room must share at least one common wall to mount
the PEN panel and SPW
2. Penetration panel frames must be installed on the Equipment Room side of the RF shield by
the RF Shield vendor
3. The penetration panel opening requirements are shown below (see Illustration 4-7 and
Illustration 4-8).
4. See Illustration 4-10 for Closet Service Hatch location
The closet service hatch may be located to the left, right, or between the PEN and SPW
openings with the minimum spacing shown below.
Magnet room service areas for PEN and SPW must not overlap 200 G in magnet minimum
service area
Service area clearance for PEN cabinet: See Penetration Panel Cabinet (PEN)
Specifications for detailed dimensions

Illustration 4-7: PEN and SPW Panel Openings and Service Clearance (Top View), Example 1
112 7 PEN and SPW Wall Opening Requirements

Illustration 4-8: PEN and SPW Panel Openings and Service Clearance (Top View), Example 2

Illustration 4-9: Pen Panel and SPW Wall Openings

Illustration 4-10: Hatch for Blower Box

Illustration 4-11: PEN Frame Detail (Top View) Notes
Table 4-1: PEN Frame Detail (Top View) Notes
Wall Detail cross section is not to scale
1 RF Shield Material
2 Bolts are provided by screen room vendor and bolt holes are drilled
at installation. Bolt length varies by wall thickness
3 PEN Frame
4 Magnet room side
5 Equipment room side
6 Minimum exposed RF shield material (all around)
7 Maximum wall thickness
8 RF shield supporting structure (wall or double-sided galvanized pan‐

els, etc.)

8 Cryocooler Compressor (CRY) Specifications

Water cooling for the F-50 Cryocooler Compressor (CRY) is provided from the Heat Exchanger
Cabinet (HEC) or facility supplied emergency backup water supply.
Illustration 4-12: Cryocooler Compressor

9 Magnet Monitor (MON) Requirements and Specifications

9.1 Requirements
1. Customer must supply T100 network connection with RJ45 connector to the Magnet Monitor
(MON)
2. The network connection must not be routed through the Ethernet switch in the Global
Operator Cabinet (GOC)
3. The Magnet Monitor requires a 110/220 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 2.0 A facility supplied outlet. Power
at the outlet must be continuously available
9.2 Specifications
1. Mounting location: On either side of the Heat Exchanger Cabinet (HEC)
2. Weight: 10 lbs (4.5 kg)
3. Maximum gauss limit: 200 gauss (20 mT)
4. Power cord length: 72 in. (1829 mm)
118 9 Magnet Monitor (MON) Requirements and

Specifications
Illustration 4-13: Magnet Monitor (MON)

10 Multi-Nuclear Spectroscopy (MNS) Specifications

Illustration 4-14: MNS Amplifier Cabinet (MNS) for 8 kW MNS Option
120 10 Multi-Nuclear Spectroscopy (MNS) Specifications

Table 4-2: MNS Amplifier Cabinet (MNS) for 8 kW MNS Option Notes
All dimensions are in inches. All bracketed dimensions are in millimeters.
Graphic is not to scale.
The maximum magnetic field in which the cabinet can be located is 50 Gauss (5 mT),
The cabinet weights approximately 1150 pounds (523 kg).
This symbol indicates the direction of air flow:
A Top view
B Front view
C Side view
1 Service door
2 Service access requirement
3 Rear interconnect cable access
4 Service anchor mounting holes 3/8 – 16 threads
5 Center of gravity

11 Brainwave Lite (BW) Specifications

Illustration 4-15: Brainwave Lite Cabinet (BW)
122 11 Brainwave Lite (BW) Specifications

12 Magnetic Resonance Elastography (MRE) Specifications

12.1 Requirements
1. Customer must work with the RF shield vendor to provide a waveguide for the 1 in. (25.4
mm)
2. MRE Resoundant Acoustic Driver location is limited to the length of the 1 in. (25.4 mm) tube
(see the usable cable lengths in Chapter 6, Section 1.5, Magnetic Resonance Elastography
(MRE) Option)
3. The MRE Resoundant Acoustic Driver module requires a 110/220 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 2.0 A
facility supplied outlet. Power at the outlet must be continuously available
12.2 Specifications
1. Weight: 53.4 lbs (24.22 kg)
2. Gauss Limit: 50 gauss
3. Power Cord Length:
○ 60 Hz: 240 in. (6096 mm)

○ 50 Hz: 300 in. (7620 mm)
Illustration 4-16: Magnetic Resonance Elastography (MRE) Resoundant Acoustic Driver

124 12 Magnetic Resonance Elastography (MRE)

Specifications
Chapter 5 Control Room

1 Operator Workspace Equipment Specifications
The operator seated at the Operator Workspace must have an unobstructed view of the patient
on the Patient Table docked to the Magnet.
1.1 Operator Workspace (OW)
NOTE: The Operator Workspace table is optional.
Illustration 5-1: Operator Workspace (OW)
1.2 Global Operator Cabinet (GOC)

1. Weight: 141.75 lbs (64.3 kg)
Chapter 5 Control Room 125

Illustration 5-2: Global Operator Cabinet (GOC)
1.3 Host Display

1. Weight 26 lbs (11.8 kg)
126 1 Operator Workspace Equipment Specifications

Illustration 5-3: Host Display
1.4 Host Keyboard

Illustration 5-4: Host Keyboard
1.5 Pneumatic Patient Alert

The Pneumatic Patient Alert system allows the patient to contact the operator. The Control Box
audible and visual alarm will be activated by the patient squeeze bulb which is located on the
Magnet Enclosure and connected by pneumatic tubing through the Penetration Panel to the
Control Box.
1. Weight 0.5 lbs (0.2 kg)
3. The Control Box must be mounted within sight of operator and within 5 ft. (1.5 m) of an
electrical outlet

Illustration 5-5: Pneumatic Patient Alert (PA)
128 1 Operator Workspace Equipment Specifications

2 Oxygen Monitor (OXY) Option Specifications

The optional Oxygen Monitor system consists of the Oxygen Monitor, the Remote Oxygen
Sensor Module, and interconnects through the Secondary Penetration Wall (SPW). The Oxygen
Monitor alarm is located near the Operator Workspace is activated by the Remote Oxygen
Sensor Module in the Magnet Room.
1. Oxygen Monitor Weight: 8 lbs (3.6 kg)
2. Oxygen Sensor Module Weight: 2 lbs (0.9 kg)
3. The Oxygen Monitor requires facility supplied power:
Table 5-1: Oxygen Monitor Facility Power Requirements
Voltage / Frequency 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Phase 1
Maximum Amps 0.9
Connection type Hard wired in unit
Illustration 5-6: Oxygen Monitor and Remote Sensor

130 2 Oxygen Monitor (OXY) Option Specifications

Chapter 6 MR System Interconnects

1 MR System Interconnects Specifications
1.1 Component Designator Definitions
GE Healthcare uses Component Designators to identify system components. All subsystem
cabinets and other components are referred to by their component designators in the
Interconnect Data diagrams and tables.
Table 6-1: MR System Component Designators
Component Designator Description
CRY Cryocooler Compressor Cabinet
E01, E02, etc. Emergency Off Buttons
MDP Main Disconnect Panel
HEC Heat Exchanger Cabinet
MAG Magnet and Enclosure (all magnet enclosure components in Magnet Room)
Modem Modem for Magnet Monitor
MON Magnet Monitor
MRU Magnet Rundown Unit
OW Operator Workstation
PA1 Pneumatic Patient Alert Control Box
PDU Power Distribution Unit (PDU) is a module in the PGR cabinet
PED Magnet Rear Pedestal
PEN Penetration Panel Cabinet
PGR Power Gradient RF Cabinet
PT Patient Transport Table
DS, DS1 Door Switch
SPW Secondary Pen Wall
Table 6-2: MR System Options Component Designators
Component Designator Description
BW Brainwave Lite Cabinet
MNS MNS Cabinet
OXY Oxygen Monitor
OM2 Remote Oxygen Sensor Module
1.2 Usable Cable Lengths

Three configurations of cable lengths are available for order. Measure the distances between
the equipment and compare them to the distances specified in the tables. If the your distance is
less than the shortest distance specified, the Site Option is “Short”; if your distance is longer
Chapter 6 MR System Interconnects 131

than the longest distance specified, the Site Option is “Long.” If all of your Site Options are
“Long-Long,” the configuration of the equipment will have to change.
Table 6-3: Order Configuration Options
Configuration Equipment Room — Site Option Magnet Room — Site Option
A Short Short
B Long Short
C Short Long
Table 6-4: Usable Cable Lengths
Site Option: Short Site Option: Long
Point A Point B in. (mm)
Equipment Room
CRY Magnet Monitor 370.1 (9400)
Magnet Monitor SPW, bottom edge 661.4 (16800)
HEC, top panel CRY 354.3 (9000)
HEC, top panel Customer-Supplier Network 1102.4 (28000)
PEN cabinet, top panel GOC, rear panel 1141.7 (29000)
PEN cabinet, top panel Magnet Monitor 645.7 (16400)
PEN Ground stud RF common ground stud 86.6 (2200)
SPW Ground stud RF common ground stud 85.6 (2200)
PGR, top panel GOC, rear panel 1133.9 (28800)
PGR, top panel HEC, top panel 346.5 (8800)
PGR, top panel Magnet room door switch 960.6 (24400)
PGR, top panel PEN cabinet, top panel 370.1 (9400) 645.7 (16400)
PGR, top panel SPW, bottom edge 362.2 (9200) 637.8 (16200)
PGR, top panel RF common ground stud 362.2 (9200) 637.8 (16200)
SPW, bottom edge CRY 551.2 (14000)
E-off switch, Control room or

SPW, bottom edge Equipment room 385.8 (9800) 661.4 (16800)
SPW, bottom edge GOC, rear panel 1149.6 (29200)
Magnet Room
MAG, gradient cable clamp

PEN panel, bottom edge block 354.3 (9000) 511.8 (13000)

SPW, bottom edge block 303.2 (7700) 460.6 (11700)
SPW, bottom edge E-off switch, Magnet Room 1173.2 (29800)

GOC, rear panel block 1496.1 (38000) 1653.5 (42000)

MRU block 972.4 (24700)
132 1 MR System Interconnects Specifications


RF common ground stud block 393.7 (10000) 551.2 (14000)
1.3 Multi-Nuclear Spectrocopy Option

Table 6-5: MNS Option Usable Cable Lengths
Site Option A: Site Option B: Site Option C:

Short ER, Short Long ER, Short Short ER, Long
SR SR SR
Cable Part number Point A Point B in. (mm)
PGR, top panel MNS Cabinet 383.9 (9750)
5169804-15 J200 J5
5169804-16 J201 J6
5169804-17 J202 J7
5169804-18 J203 J8
5169227-4 J204 J1
5310317 J205 J12
PEN cabinet, top

panel MNS Cabinet 622 (15800)
5169804-19 J4 J11
5270425 J16 J3
PEN cabinet PGR cabinet 653.5 (16600)
MNS BB Exciter
5265483 H1 J12
PEN cabinet SPW 551.2 (14000)
5265976 J4 J129
Note:
All cable lengths include a 24 in. (600 mm) service loop
1.4 Brainwave Option

Table 6-6: Brainwave Option Usable Cable Lengths

SR SR SR
Brainwavew Cabi‐
PEN Wall/Cabinet net
LG408 Empty 9 pin D-sub Lumina Controller 720 (18,288)
J16 in PEN Cabi‐

LU001-60 net Lumina Controller 720 (18,288)

1.5 Magnetic Resonance Elastography (MRE) Option

Table 6-7: MRE Option Usable Cable Lengths

SR SR SR
1 in (2.54 mm) Resoundant Active Nominal 288 (7315)

Tubing Driver Magnet (Isoceter) Maximum 396 (10058)
Resoundant Active
BNC Driver PEN Cabinet J6 600 (15,240)
Resoundant Active Ethernet Hub in

Ethernet Driver PGR 600 (15,240)
Resoundant Active Customer Sup‐ 60 Hz: 240 (6096)

Power Driver plied Outlet 50 Hz: 300 (7620)
134 1 MR System Interconnects Specifications

2 MR System Interconnects Routing Requirements

2.1 General Requirements
1. The customer is responsible for the purchase and installation of all cable support
mechanisms
2. Any type of nonferrous cable support may be used, such as commercially available ladder
or wire rack style cable trays, provided the cable trays meet all MR system requirements
3. The distance between cable supports must be less than 12 in. (305 mm). For example, the
distance between rungs on a ladder tray, or the distance from the end of a cable tray to a
final nonferrous cable support must be 12 in. (305 mm) or less
4. The cable supports must have the minimum cable bend radius per MR System Cable
Specifications. For example, the vertical and horizontal bends of the gradient cables must
have a bend radius of 13 in. (330 mm)
5. Cable supports may be stacked or side-to-side
6. Cables must be accessible on at least one side of the cable support and require a minimum
of 10 in. (254 mm) from the top of the tray. (For example, see Illustration 6-4.) If this is not
possible due to obstructions, see the exceptions below
7. All individual cable supports (e.g. rungs) require lateral support to maintain the positions
specified in the illustrations both during installation and after installation of the interconnects
(e.g. cables).
Exceptions for Obstructions:

1. The top of the cable tray must not touch an obstruction. A minimum of 10 in. (254 mm) of
clearance is required on either side of the obstruction. See Illustration 6-1.
2. A minimum of 7 in. (178 mm) of clearance is required from the top of the tray rung to the
lowest point of any obstruction. The illustration below.
NOTE: The illustration below shows how to route cable trays around HVAC ducts, light
fixtures, medical gases, structural beams, and other obstructions. If local code
permits, a tray with a bend can route the cables underneath an obstruction. At the
rear of the magnet, the cable tray must be installed at the minimum height. The part of
the cable tray that is under the obstruction can be installed at a lower height. The tray
bend must provide the minimum cable bend radius.

Illustration 6-1: Obstruction Example
2.2 Magnet Room Requirements

1. Two cable trays must be used, each at least 18 in. (457 mm) wide
2. Installation and routing of cable trays must be coordinated with the RF shield vendor
3. Side-to-side trays in the Magnet room must not touch to prevent RF broadband noise
caused by metal-to-metal sidewall contact
4. If trays are stacked, the air, water, and cryogen lines must be run in the lower support (see
Illustration 6-2)
5. Each cable tray must support a weight of at least 50 lbs/ft (74.8 kg/m)
NOTE: If stacked, each cable tray must support the weight of both cable trays: i.e., 100
lbs/ft (149.6 kg/m)
6. Ceiling grid work, medical gas lines, lighting fixtures, etc. must not touch MR system cabling
or cable supports
7. Excess cable length in the Magnet room must be stored in either:
a. Penetration Panel closet
b. Magnet room cable trays (excess cable must be at least 36 in. (915 mm) from the
magnet end of the tray)
2.2.1 Recommended Cable Groupings

We recommend the grouping order shown below. The cable groups must not touch. Local code
may require dividers, channeling, bundling, etc.
136 2 MR System Interconnects Routing Requirements

• Group a — Gradient and RF common ground cables. In the Magnet room, the gradient
cable group must be laid in a single layer. The center of cable group “a” is 3.5 in. (89 mm)
from the inside edge of the tray, in line with the magnet center. See Illustration 6-2.
• Group b — Coax, RF, and AC power cables with jacket rating of 600V and above
• Group c — Data and fiber optic and 300V coax or RF clock cables
• Group d — 300V signal, 300V power, and 300V power/signal cables
• Group e — Air, water, and cryogen lines

Illustration 6-2: Cable Groupings
2.2.2 Cable Tray Requirements and Examples

1. The gradient cable support must end at the back of the magnet 49 ±0.5 in. (1245 ±12 mm)
from geometric isocenter. See Illustration 6-3, Illustration 6-4, and Illustration 6-5.
2. Supports for all other cables and hoses must end at the back of the magnet 34 ±0.5 in. (864
±12 mm) from geometric isocenter.
3. Cable supports must have a minimum height of 101.5 in. (2581 mm) at the back of the
magnet measured from the floor. See Illustration 6-3.
NOTE: Supports may be lower at other points along the route to clear obstructions as
long as all other requirements are met
4. The top of the cable tray must be less than 128 in. (3251 mm) above the finished floor. See
Illustration 6-3.

Illustration 6-3: Cable Tray Requirements Example (Side-By-Side)

Illustration 6-4: Cable Tray Requirements Example (Stacked)
Illustration 6-5: Cable Tray Requirements Example (90° Magnet Interface)

2.3 Penetration Panel Closet Requirements

1. The end of the cable support must be contained within the Penetration Panel closet (see
Illustration 6-6)
2. The end of the gradient cable support must be parallel to the Secondary Pen Wall (SPW)
3. The gradient cable support height and distance from the SPW must support a minimum
cable bend radius of 13 in. (330 mm) to accommodate gradient cables
Illustration 6-6: Gradient Cable Drop to SPW (Side View)
Table 6-8: Gradient Cable Drop to SPW (Side View) Notes
1 Secondary Pen Wall (SPW)
2 Gradient Cable Clamps
3 Gradient Cable drop nearest to the cable tray must have a minimum
bend radius of 13 (330).
4 Drop from bottom of cable tray to floor

5 Floor
Illustration 6-7: Gradient Cable Drop to SPW (Top View)
Table 6-9: Gradient Cable Drop to SPW (Top View) Notes
Cables must drop through the bottom or from the end of the tray
1 Secondary Pen Wall (SPW)
2 Gradient Cable Clamps
3 Gradient Cable drop nearest to the cable tray must have a minimum
bend radius of 13 (330).
4 The end of the cable tray must be contained in the PEN closet (ca‐
bles must not rest directly on the wall opening)
2.4 Equipment Room Requirements

1. All equipment interconnects must route overhead (except helium hoses)
2. Cables/hoses must drop through the bottom or off the end of the cable support directly to
the top of the cabinets (see individual components in Chapter 4 for height requirements)
3. Cable supports do not have minimum height restrictions except above Equipment room
components (to maintain the 13 in. (330 mm) bend radius drop to the cabinet)
4. The end of the gradient cable support must be parallel to the Secondary Pen Wall (SPW)
5. The gradient cable support height and distance from the SPW must support a minimum
cable bend radius of 13 in. (330 mm) to accommodate the gradient cable bend radius
6. Excess cable length must be stored in the Equipment room
7. For multiple MR system installations, cables from different MR systems must not share the
same cable support

8. The table below lists the minimum width for cable trays between Equipment Room (and
Operator Workspace) components
Table 6-10: Minimum Cable Tray Width
PEN SPW PGR HEC OW
6 in. (150 mm) 6 in. (150 mm) 6 in. (150 mm)

PEN N/A
Electrical Electrical Electrical
12 in. (300 mm) 6 in. (150 mm) 6 in. (150 mm)

SPW N/A
Electrical Electrical Electrical
6 in. (150 mm) 6 in. (150 mm) 6 in. (150 mm)

PGR N/A
Air/Water Electrical Electrical
18 in. (450 mm) 6 in. (150 mm)

HEC N/A N/A
Air/Water Air/Water
OW N/A N/A N/A N/A

3 MR System Cable Specifications

Cables are marked with an X in the column for that system. The other cables are not used with
that system.

Illustration 6-8: System Cable List (Page 1)
144 3 MR System Cable Specifications





4 Facility Supplied System Interconnects Specifications

The following table lists the required facility supplied system interconnects. Refer to Illustration
6-13 for additional information.
Table 6-11: Facility Supplied System Interconnects
Between Units
Group Comments Requirements
From To
C01 Facility Power MDP Facility Power and Ground Chapter 2, MR Suite Electri‐
cal Requirements
C02 MDP HEC HEC Power
C03 MDP PGR PDU Power
Facility Cooling HEC Cooling Water Supply Chapter 2, MR System Fa‐

Water cility Water Requirements
Facility Cooling HEC Cooling Water Return

Water
C04 Facility Network MON Facility must provide network ac‐ Chapter 4, Magnet Monitor
cess for the Magnet Monitor (MON) (MON) Requirements and
and Global Operator Cabinet Specifications
(GOC). The MON connection must
Facility Network GOC be available at all times.
C05 MDP E-Off Switch Facility must supply cable from Chapter 2, MR Suite Electri‐
MDP to E-Off Switch in Equipment cal Requirements
Room
Facility Power Outlet near MON Facility outlet for MON power Chapter 4, Magnet Monitor
(MON) Requirements and
Specifications
Facility Power MRU Facility power to MRU Chapter 3, Magnet Room

Equipment Specifications
C06 GE Healthcare E-Off Switch in Facility must supply additional wir‐ Chapter 2, MR Suite Electri‐
Supplied Cable Control room or ing between the GE Healthcare cal Requirements
from SPW Equipment room supplied cable and the E-Off switch
if the length needed is greater than
the usable length listed in MR Sys‐
tem Interconnects Specifications
Table 6-12: Optional Facility Supplied System Interconnects
Group Between Units Comments Requirements
Facility Power Outlet near MRE Facility outlet for MRE power (option‐ Chapter 4, Magnetic Reso‐
al, not shown) nance Elastography (MRE)
Specifications

Illustration 6-13: Facility Supplied System Interconnects
NOTE: GE Healthcare recommends installing the RF Door switch on the outside wall of the
Magnet room.
The RF shielded room vendor must supply and install RF door switches on all RF
shielded doors. These switches must be wired in series and a GE supplied cable (two
loose lead conductors) will attach to one door switch. RF Switches must be rated for
10V DC maximum and the switches must be in the open position when the doors are
open (switch contacts close when the doors are completely closed).
150 4 Facility Supplied System Interconnects Specifications

Chapter 7 Appendices
1 Glossary
BB
Abbreviation for Broadband
Cryogen
A substance for producing low temperatures. Liquid helium is the cryogen used to cool the
magnet to approximately 4 Kelvin (-269°C or -452°F).
Cryostat
An apparatus maintaining a very low constant temperature. The cryostat consists of one
concentric, cylindrical container housed in an outer vacuum tight vessel. The magnet and shim
coils are mounted in the inner container. The container is filled with liquid helium. The shields
surrounding the inner container are kept cold by a refrigeration device.
Dewar
A container with an evacuated space between two highly reflective walls used to keep low
temperature substances at near-constant temperatures. Liquid helium is usually stored and
shipped in dewars.
Exclusion Zone
Area where the magnetic flux density is greater than five gauss. Personnel with cardiac
pacemakers, neurostimulators and other biostimulation devices must NOT enter this zone.
Signs are posted outside the five gauss line alerting personnel of this requirement. Since the
magnetic field is three-dimensional, signs are also posted on floors above and below the
Magnet Room in which the five gauss line exists.
Ferrous Material
Any substance containing iron which is strongly attracted by a magnetic field.
Gauss (G)
A unit of magnetic flux density. The earth's magnetic field strength is approximately one half
gauss to one gauss depending on location. The internationally accepted unit is the tesla (1
Tesla = 10,000G and 1 milli Tesla = 10G).
Gradient
The amount and direction of the rate of change in space of the magnetic field strength. In the
magnetic resonance system, gradient amplifiers and coils are used to vary the magnetic field
strength in the x, y, and z planes.
Homogeneity
Uniformity. The homogeneity of the static magnetic field is an important quality of the magnet.
Isocenter
Center of the imaging volume ideally located at the magnet center.
Isogauss Line
An imaginary line or a line on a field plot connecting identical magnetic field strength points.
Chapter 7 Appendices 151

Magnetic Field (B)

A condition in a region of space established by the presence of a magnet and characterized by
the presence of a detectable magnetic force at every point in the region. A magnetic field exists
in the space around a magnet (or current carrying conductor) and can produce a magnetizing
force on a body within it.
Magnetic Resonance (MR)
The absorption or emission of electromagnetic energy by nuclei in a static magnetic field, after
excitation by a suitable radio frequency field.
Magnetic Sheilding
Using material (e.g. steel) to redistribute a magnetic field , usually to reduce fringe fields.
NB
Abbreviation for Narrow Band
Quench
Condition when a superconducting magnet becomes resistive thus rapidly boiling off liquid
helium. The magnetic field reduces rapidly after a quench.
Radio Frequency (RF)
Frequency intermediate between audio frequency and infrared frequencies. Used in magnetic
resonance systems to excite nuclei to resonance..
Radio Frequency Shielding
Using material (e.g. copper, aluminium, or steel) to reduce interference from external radio
frequencies. A radio frequency shielded room usually encloses the entire magnet room.
Resonance
A large amplitude vibration caused by a relative small periodic stimulus of the same or nearly
the same period as the natural vibration period of the system. In magnetic resonance imaging,
the radio frequency pulses are the periodic stimuli which are at the same vibration period as the
hydrogen nuclei being imaged.
Security Zone
Area within the Magnet Room where the magnet is located. Signs are posted outside the
Magnet Room warning personnel of the high magnetic field existing in the Magnet Room and
the possibility of ferrous objects becoming dangerous projectiles within this zone.
Shield Cooler Coldhead
An external refrigeration device which maintains the shields inside the cryostat at a constant
temperature.
Shim Coils
Shim coils are used to provide auxiliary magnetic fields in order to compensate for
inhomogeneities in the main magnetic field due to imperfections in the manufacturing of the
magnet or affects of steel in the surrounding environment.
152 1 Glossary
Shimming
Correction of inhomogeneity of the main magnetic field due to imperfections in the magnet or to
the presence of external ferromagnetic objects.
Superconducting Magnet
A magnet whose magnetic field originates from current flowing through a superconductor. Such
a magnet is enclosed in a cryostat.
Superconductor
A substance whose electrical resistance essentially disappears at temperatures near zero
Kelvin. A commonly used superconductor in magnetic resonance imaging system magnets is
niobium-titanium embedded in a copper matrix.
Tesla
The internationally accepted unit of magnetic flux density. One tesla is equal to 10,000 gauss.
One milli Tesla is equal to 10 gauss.

2 MR Site Vibration Test Guidelines

2.1 Test Measurements
1. Vibration measurements must be in the range of 10-6 g. Test equipment must have the
required sensitivity to these levels
2. Instrumentation must have a low tolerance to temperature effects since many times the low
frequency thermal drift may influence the measurements
3. All measured data must be acquired real time. Recording of vibration data will not allow for a
proper site survey, specifically when studying transient vibration and when searching for
specific vibration sources
4. All analyses must be narrow-band Fast Fourier Transforms (FFT) over the frequency bands
listed in Table 7-1
5. Time histories of the vibration must be recorded as acceleration levels vs. time. The
resolution of the time history must be adjusted to clearly capture the transient event. The
analyzer set-up will be site dependent and, in special cases, vibration response dependent.
It is the responsibility of the vibration consultant to study the transient environment, capture
data to confirm that transient activity exceeds the trigger level, then expand the time history
data to exhibit the structural response
Table 7-1: Frequency Bands for FFT
Frequency Band Frequency Resolution
0.2 to 50 Hz Δf= 0.125 Hz
2.2 Equipment (Spectral Analyzer) Set-Up

1. Frequency average should be a minimum of 20 linear averages (Do not use peak hold or
1/3 octave analysis)
2. Average and store should be a minimum of 20 plots steady state and 20 plots transient to
support the consistency of the site vibrations
3. Hanning windows must be applied to the entire spectra
4. Spectrum analyzers capable of these measurements are readily available for purchase or
rental. Models, such as the HP 3560A, Nicolet Phaszer, B&K Pulse, and HP 35670, are all
capable of making the site vibration measurements. Accelerometers must have the
capability to measure from 0.2 Hz beyond 50 Hz. Time histories can be recorded using any
of the analyzers listed above
NOTE: The equipment mentioned is for example only. It is the responsibility of the
Engineering Test Firm to provide equipment that will allow measurements
compliant with this guideline.
154 2 MR Site Vibration Test Guidelines

2.3 Data Collection

2.3.1 Ambient Baseline Condition
1. All of the measurements listed above must be made in a “quiet” environment--i.e., areas
where excessive traffic, subway trains, etc. do not exist. A vibration measurement must also
be made during periods without traffic or during periods of light traffic. Measurements must
define the lowest levels of vibration possible at the site
2. The source of any steady state vibration, whose level exceeds the magnet specifications
found in Chapter 3, Magnet Room Structural Requirements, must be identified. A second
measurement should be made with all of the identified contributors powered down if
possible. In situations where it is not possible to power down equipment, vibration data must
be collected to identify the specific source of the vibration concern. The majority of steady
state vibration problems can be negated by isolating the vibration source
2.3.2 Normal Condition
1. All of the vibration measurements listed above must be repeated during periods of “normal”
environmental conditions, including the FFTs and time histories. The transient
measurements must be provided to define the dynamic disturbances the MR system may be
exposed to. Transient analysis is required for a true assessment of the site
2. Special attention must be paid to the site assessment during the entire analysis. Since
transient vibration is not easily addressed once the MR suite is fully constructed, the test
consultant must fully understand the needs for this analysis. The source of any transient
vibration must be identified and supported with vibration plots. If the source of any transient
vibration is not locatable, it is recommended that the customer have an alternate location
identified and the vibration studied
3. Transient vibration can be difficult to assess if the details are not understood. The 0.0005g,
zero-to-peak trigger level is a starting point to understanding the vibration stability. The
transient vibration peak amplitude, structural (time variant) response, decay rate and an
estimate of the number of events per unit of time would constitute a complete transient
analysis. All transient failures must be supported by time history plots. The plots must clearly
show the structural response, the frequency of the signature and the decay rate. From this
data, GE Heatlhcare can help determine compliance with the vibration guidelines
4. The test consultant must provide site data to show the design recommendations for all sites/
building structures meet the Magnet specifications found in Chapter 3, Magnet Room
Structural Requirements
2.4 Presentation/Interpretation of Results
1. The recommended format for site vibration data collection, presentation, and analysis is
demonstrated in the examples in Illustration 7-1, Illustration 7-2, Illustration 7-3, and
Illustration 7-4. Presentation of the data in any other format (linear units only) may result in
incorrect interpretation and diagnosis of the site. Additional data collection or presentation
methods are at the option of the vibration testing service
2. All plots must be properly annotated with:
a. Instrumentation setup including number of averages, frequency resolution, etc.

b. Test location
c. Test conditions:
i. Steady state
ii. Transient
iii. Heel drop
iv. Normal environment
v. Typical traffic
vi. Any other conditions necessary to demonstrate understanding of potential sources of
vibration
3. The customer's vibration testing service is responsible for interpreting the results and
determine if that site meets GE Healthcare specifications
4. If the vibration levels are too high, additional data acquisition may be necessary to:
a. Determine the source of the vibration
b. Propose a solution to the problem
c. Find an alternate site location
5. Any questions regarding test equipment requirements, test parameters, or general questions
should be discussed with the GE Healthcare Project Manager of Installation (PMI)

Illustration 7-1: Example of Site Environmental Vibration Levels

Illustration 7-2: Example Site Environmental Vibration

Illustration 7-3: Acceleration Time History

Illustration 7-4: Acceleration Time History (Zoomed In on Transient Event)

3 RF Shielding Guidelines
RF sources which can adversely affect image quality may be generated by discrete frequency
or broadband noise (RF) sources.
3.1 Discrete RF Interference
Discrete RF interferences are narrowband and are fixed frequency in nature. The Magnet Room
must be RF shielded from RFI sources so external RF energy does not degrade the MR system
RF receivers at the system imaging frequencies. Some potential sources for discrete frequency
signals are radio station transmitters, mobile or hand-held RF transmitting devices, in general
any intended RF transmitter or non-intended transmitters but with clocked digital electronic
circuits.
3.2 Broadband RF Interference
Broadband RF noise is a single transient or continuous series of transient disturbances caused
by an electrical discharge. Low humidity environmental conditions will have higher probability of
electrical discharge. The electrical discharge can occur due to electrical arcing (micro arcing) or
merely a static discharge. Some potential sources capable of producing electrical discharge
include:
1. Loose hardware/fasteners vibration or movement (electrical continuity must always be
maintained)
2. Flooring material including raised access flooring (panels & support hardware) and carpeting
3. Electrical fixtures, including:
a. Lighting fixtures
b. Track lighting
c. Emergency lighting
d. Battery chargers
e. Outlets
4. Ducting for HVAC and cable routing
5. RF Shield seals (walls, doors, windows, etc.)

4 RF Shielding Effectiveness and Ground Isolation Testing

4.1 Ambient Radio Frequency Interference (RFI)
The MR System operates with a highly sensitive RF receiving front end to be able to capture the
signal of an object scanned. A Limited level of RF interference (RFI) at the installation site is
needed for the proper operation for the MR System. The RFI level will depend on the
electromagnetic environment and the equipment installed at the vicinity of the installation site,
some examples are radio stations, land mobile radio transmitter stations. RF sources which can
adversely affect image quality may be generated by discrete frequency or broadband noise (RF)
sources.
4.2 Introduction
4.2.1 Discrete RF Interference
Discrete RF interferences are narrowband and fixed frequency. The Magnet Room must be RF
shielded from RFI sources so external RF energy does not degrade the MR system RF
receivers at the system imaging frequencies. Some potential sources for discrete frequency
signals are radio station transmitters, mobile or hand-held RF transmitting devices, in general
any intended RF transmitter or non-intended transmitters but with clocked digital electronic
circuits.
4.2.2 Broadband RF Interference
Broadband RF noise is a single transient or continuous series of transient disturbances caused
by an electrical discharge. Low humidity environmental conditions will have higher probability of
electrical discharge. The electrical discharge can occur due to electrical arcing (micro arcing) or
merely a static discharge. Some potential sources capable of producing electrical discharge
include:
1. Loose hardware/fasteners vibration or movement (electrical continuity must always be
maintained)
2. Flooring material including raised access flooring (panels & support hardware) and carpeting
3. Electrical fixtures, including:
a. Lighting fixtures
b. Track lighting
c. Emergency lighting
d. Battery chargers
e. Outlets
4. Ducting for HVAC and cable routing
5. RF Shield seals (walls, doors, windows, etc.)
4.2.3 Ambient Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) Site Survey
When a RFI site survey is considered, it is recommended to be completed before the purchase
and installation of the RF shielded room.
162 4 RF Shielding Effectiveness and Ground Isolation

Testing
1. The ambient RFI measured should be less than 100 millivolt per meter (100 dB microvolt per
meter)
2. The recommended centerband and bandwidth frequencies to be used when measuring RFI
are listed in the table below. (This table includes frequency bands important for both imaging
and spectroscopy):
Table 7-2: Radio Frequency Survey Specifications
Isotope Bandcenter MHz Bandwidth Hz

1
H 127.72 681,183
19
F 120.23 641,229
31
P 51.75 276,010
23
Na 33.80 180,291
13
C 32.13 171,335
3. RFI site surveys are to be performed by cycling through the preceding frequency bands and
a broad band range up to 145 MHz ± 10 MHz . Special emphasis, however, should be
placed on the 1H band since this is used in proton imaging. The RFI site survey should be
performed for a length of time necessary to determine, within a reasonable degree of
certainty, the maximum field strength.
To ensure that RF noise peaks outside the bandwidths specified above do not actually
extend into these bandwidths and exceed the 100 millivolt per meter limit, adjust the
resolution of the test equipment (spectrum analyzer) according to the equation:
BW (resolution) = f0 /50
where: BW = Bandwidth (resolution)
f0 = Center frequency (for 1H: at 3.0 Tesla 127.72 MHz)
4.3 RF Shielding Effectiveness (SE) and Ground Isolation Test Methods
The shielding effectiveness test method defined within this appendix is in accordance with
methods and requirements from IEEE Std 299-2006 - IEEE STANDARD METHOD FOR
MEASURING THE EFFECTIVENESS OF ELECTROMAGNETIC SHIELDING ENCLOSURES.
4.3.1 Introduction
This appendix provides details on shielding Effectiveness (SE) the test method. MRI scanner is
highly sensitive to RF energy from sources outside of the RF shielded room. To ensure proper
operation of the MRI scanner, the RF shielded room is installed to reduce the interaction of
external RF electromagnetic fields with the MR scanner operation (it also prevents MR system
RF radiation from interfering with external RF systems, such as aircraft control).
NOTE: Impinging Electromagnetic fields at the frequencies to test the RF shielded room may
not be planar.
4.3.2 Test Set-Up for RF Shielded Room
The RF shielded room is set up for shielding effectiveness testing with a normal configuration
consisting of:

1. Magnet installed including all floor mounting bolts (including dock anchor bolt)
2. RF shielded door(s)
3. Waveguide penetrations, HVAC, vents, medical gas lines, etc.
4. AC power supplied through low-pass filters
5. Patient view window, skylights, windows, hatches, etc.
6. Frames and blank penetration panels installed, dimensionally equivalent to the GE panel
and the same mounting hardware to be used with the GE penetration panel.
NOTE: A GE Field Engineer is responsible for disconnecting cryocooler lines. For safety
reasons, the enclosure will be electrically grounded during the shielding effectiveness
test. Any variances from the normal configuration will be noted in the RF shield test
report
4.3.3 Shielding Effectiveness (SE)
The final shielding effectiveness performance of the RF shielded room is determined based on
the lowest measurement of all test point locations.
4.3.4 Reference Level and Dynamic Range
1. The reference level is the value of signal measured by the receiver equipment with the
receiving antenna located at a prescribed distance from the transmit antenna and located
outside of the shielded enclosure
2. The dynamic range (DR) is the range of amplitudes over which the receive system operates
linearly. The dynamic range must be at least 6 dB greater than the SE to be measured. For
SE measurement, the dynamic range is the difference of the reference level to the noise
floor
4.3.5 Test Equipment
1. Test equipment must be selected to provide measuring capabilities as described in this test
method
2. Any piece of equipment, whose operation directly affects the numerical value of the
Shielding Effectiveness (SE), must be in calibration before any critical measurements are
begun. Dates of calibration traceable to a national standard must be provided in the test
report (see Section 4.3.9 for test report requirements) and must be within the calibration
cycle of the equipment. The calibration cycle of equipment must be no greater than 2 years.
3. All equipment must be verified for proper operation between and after each series of tests
by repeating the reference readings at the specified frequency.
4. Required equipment for transmit chain of measurement system:
a. Frequency Synthesizer or Signal Generator.
b. RF Power Amplifier (if required)
c. DC Power Supply (if required)
d. Tuned λ/2 Dipole antenna at the test frequencies or broadband biconical antenna

Testing
NOTE: Considering the dimensions for the a tuned λ/2 dipole antenna at lower
frequencies, it is more practical to use a broadband biconical antenna.
5. Required equipment for receive chain of measurement system
a. Spectrum analyzer
b. RF preamplifier (if required)
c. In-line attenuator (if required)
d. DC power supply (if required)
e. Tuned λ/2 Dipole antenna at the test frequencies or broadband dipole antenna
NOTE: Considering the dimensions for the a tuned λ/2 dipole antenna at lower
frequencies, it is more practical to use a broadband biconical antenna.
6. The transmit and receive antenna must be of the same type for each measurement
4.3.6 Test Frequency
The test frequencies for shielding effectiveness (SE) measurement are defined in Chapter 3, RF
Shielded Room Requirements. Test frequencies used must be noted in the RF shield test
report.
4.3.7 Measurement Procedure
NOTE: Except when specified, antenna distances are measured at the center of the antenna.
1. Each wall of the RF shielded room that is accessible for the measurement will be tested. For
areas that are inaccessible for the direct location of the transmitting antenna, the inside of
that area will still be scanned using the receiving antenna with the transmitting antenna
positioned as close as possible to the intended test position, that position must be noted on
the test report
2. Each accessible plane of the wall is subdivided so that the horizontal spacing is no more
than 1.3 m (4 ft 3 in.) for the Transmit Antenna (TX) and Receive Antenna (RX) horizontal
positions. See the illustration below:

Illustration 7-5: Antenna Positioning
3. Measurements are taken with horizontal and vertical antenna polarizations. Both Transmit
(TX) and Receive (RX) antennas must be aligned with the same polarization, the measured
polarization must be part of the test report
4. For localized testing of shielded room items such as doors, windows, filters, penetration
areas, etc. the transmitting antenna (as well as receiving antenna) will be positioned in front
of the items under test
4.3.7.1 Shielding Effectiveness Measurement

Three main steps are required to complete the Shielding Effectiveness measurement at each
test position:
1. Take reference level measurement (Section 4.3.7.2)
2. Take attenuated level measurement (Section 4.3.7.3)
3. Calculate Shielding Effectiveness (Section 4.3.7.4)
4.3.7.2 Reference Level Measurement
1. The reference level is the value of signal measured by the receiver equipment with the
receiving antenna located at a prescribed distance from the transmit antenna and located
outside of the shielded enclosure.
2. Measurement setup for the reference level is in accordance with the illustration below:

Testing
Illustration 7-6: Reference Level Measurement
3. The antennas must be separated by a distance of 2 m, minimum, unless physical spacing

limitations for either the reference level or SE readings preclude maintaining that spacing. In
that event, maximum available separation must be used, but must not be less than 1 m, and
that separation must be noted on the test report
4. The coaxial cable from the receive antenna must be kept perpendicular to the axis of the
antenna for a distance of at least 1 m
5. The cable from the receive antenna is preferably routed through the wall of the shield via a
bulkhead type of coaxial connector. If this is not possible, it may be routed through a shield
door that is opened only far enough to pass the cable. If the open-door method is used, a
check for direct coupling to the receiving equipment must be made by putting a dummy load
in place of the receive antenna and verifying that any signal present is at least 10 dB below
the reference reading
6. Reference Level measurement is taken at each test location with antenna at both
polarizations (horizontal and vertical)
a. Reference Level at Horizontal Polarization
i. The reference level measurement is taken over a plane area covered as described
below.
ii. With horizontal polarization for both antennas, the receive antenna must be moved
vertically up 1.0 m from the initial position, and then move it down from the initial
position to 0.3 m above the floor. Then starting 1 m to the right of the initial position,
move slowly vertically up 1 m and then down to 0.3 m above the floor. Repeat this at
1 m to the left of the original position
iii. Record the maximum measurement reading in this plane
b. Reference Level at Vertical Polarization
i. The reference level measurement is taken over a plane area covered as described
below.

ii. With vertical polarization for both antennas, the receive antenna must be moved
horizontally right 1.0 m from the initial position, and then move it left from the initial
position to 1.0 m. Then starting 1 m above the initial position, move slowly
horizontally right 1 m and then horizontally left 1 m from initial position. Repeat this at
0.3 m above the floor (measure 0.3 m from the floor to the bottom of the antenna),
move slowly horizontally right 1 m and then horizontally left 1 m
iii. Record the maximum measurement reading in this plane
4.3.7.3 Attenuated Level Measurement
1. The basic measurement procedure consists of positioning the transmit antenna outside the
RF shielded room and the receive antenna inside the RF shielded room and measuring the
magnitude of the largest received signal
2. The Transmit Power for the shielded Room Measurement is the same as the power used to
determine the Reference Level
3. If an attenuator was used in the Reference measurement, it would be taken out for the
shielded Room measurement and the attenuator value added to the SE in the datasheet
4. Measurement setup for the attenuated level is in accordance with the illustration below:
Illustration 7-7: Attenuation Level Measurement
5. Attenuated Level measurement is taken at each test location with antenna at both
polarizations (horizontal and vertical).
a. Attenuated Level at Horizontal Polarization
i. Both tuned Receive and Transmit Antennas are in Horizontal Polarization
ii. In all the following measurements the Receive Antenna is held in Horizontal
Polarization and kept at a distance of 0.3 m from the inside shielded room wall
iii. Starting with the Receive Antenna directly parallel to the Transmit Antenna begin to
slowly move the Receive Antenna in a Volume Parallel to the shielded room wall 1 m

Testing
above initial position and 0.3 m above the floor and 1m to the left and right of the
initial position, see Illustration 7-7
iv. Measure and record the highest power in this volume
b. Attenuated Level at Vertical Polarization
i. Both Receive and Transmit Antennas are in Vertical Polarization
ii. In all the following measurements the Receive Antenna is held in Vertical
Polarization and kept at a distance of 0.3 m from the wall
iii. Starting with the Receive Antenna directly parallel to the Transmit Antenna begin to
slowly move the Receive Antenna in a Volume Parallel to the shielded room wall 1 m
above the initial position and 0.3 m above the floor (measure 0.3 m from the floor to
the bottom of the antenna) and 1 m to the left and right of the initial position
iv. Measure and record the highest power in this volume
4.3.7.4 Shielding Effectiveness calculation
The shielding effectiveness is calculated with the reference level measurement and the
attenuated level measurement as defined in Equation 1:
SE (db) = VRef_max - VAtt_max
or
SE (db) = PRef_max - PAtt_max
Where:
SE : Shielding Effectiveness in dB
VRef_max, VAtt_max: Reference measurement in dBuV
PRef_max, PAtt_max: Reference measurement in dBm
4.3.8 RF shielded Room Ground Isolation Resistance Measurement Method
WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD
THE RF SHIELDED ROOM MUST BE PROPERLY GROUNDED.

Illustration 7-8: RF Shielded Room
Table 7-3: RF Shielded Room
1 Hospital ground grid
2 AC lines and ground wire
3 Filter
4 Low resistance reading
1. This section does not apply to upgrades

2. This test must be made using either an isolated, current limited, high-voltage (>150 VDC)
DC source and DMM to read drop across the limiting resistor or a Megger instrument
capable of reading values less than 1000 ohms. Conventional resistance meters employing
test sources of 9 VDC or less must not be used
3. The ground isolation resistance measurement is performed by the following procedure:
a. All power to the enclosure is removed. For safety reasons, an AC voltage measurement
will be made to verify that no power is connected
b. With electrical power and intentional ground disconnected, connect the test instrument
between the shielded enclosure and AC power ground
c. Take a reading and record the value
d. Reconnect the lines to ground
4.3.9 RF Shield Test Report
A test report must be prepared by the testing organization performing the shielding
effectiveness and ground isolation resistance tests for the RF shielded room. The test report
includes data necessary for the evaluation of the shielding effectiveness performance and
ground isolation of the RF shielded room. The test report must contain the following information:
1. Name of the owner organization or hospital
2. Name of testing organization

Testing
3. Identification name for the RF shielded room being tested

4. Name of test personnel
5. Date of test
6. Frequencies tested
7. Shielding effectiveness measured for each test point location (each test point location must
be identified in the test report)
8. RF shielded room drawing showing each test point location
9. List any changes pertinent to the test setup or SE results (e.g., limited separation distance of
antennas, limited access to test points, etc.)
10. Ground isolation test results and the condition of the room when tested (e.g., RF room
completed without internal finishes and no electrical connections)
11. Pass/Fail conclusion
12. The following information for each piece of all calibrated equipment used for measurement:
a. Manufacturer
b. Model
c. Serial number
d. Current calibration date and calibration due date
Recommended additional information:

1. Location of RF shielded room relative to the whole building where it is installed
2. Pictures of RF shielded room shielding effectiveness test showing:
a. Overall view of RF shielded room
b. Window(s), door(s), filter(s), skylights, patient view window
c. Blank penetration panels
d. Installed additional penetration points (waveguides, vents, ducts, etc.)
e. Test set-up for reference level measurement
f. Test set-up for attenuated level measurement

5 Acoustic Background and Design Guidelines

The acoustic information is provided for site planning and architectural design activities to
address acoustics to meet local regulations and customer requirements. For more information
about recommended safety procedures regarding patient exposure to MR generated acoustic
levels, see the MR Safety Guide included with the system Users Manual.
5.1 Acoustic Background
A typical MR suite has two types of acoustic noise issues. The first is the acoustics within the
rooms in which the patients and technicians are impacted by the noise of the MR system as the
gradients are pulsed. The second is noise transmitted to other spaces via airborne and
structureborne paths.
5.1.1 Airborne
The airborne transmission path entails the excitation of air within the magnet room; the
resonator module consisting of the magnet, RF coil, and gradient coil generates acoustic noise
similar to an intense loud speaker. The airborne noise passes through walls via any openings,
i.e. small holes, cracks, HVAC ducts, and waveguides, into surrounding spaces within and
possibly beyond the confinements of the building. Acoustic energy can transmit across
distances of significant length.
Examples of airborne acoustics issues may include the following (not limited to only these) :
• MR Operator exposure at Operator Workstation (i.e. Operator viewing in-line with the patient
inside the magnet may require a higher acoustic attenuation window)
• Image reading rooms adjacent to Magnet Room, may be separated by hallways
• Secretarial, offices, meeting rooms, patient rooms (ICU, exam, primary care, etc.)
• Adjacent residential areas/spaces
• In-house library facilities

5.1.2 Structureborne
The structureborne transmission path is the result of mechanical excitation of the floor/building
structure causing the building to vibrate. The vibration of the surfaces at surrounding spaces
then radiates as acoustic noise. Acoustic energy can transmit across distances of significant
length.
NOTE: Less than 5% of installed base sites have experienced structureborne acoustic
issues.
Examples of structureborne acoustics issues may include the following (not limited to only
these):
• Areas directly above or below the Magnet Room, may not always be an issue
• Image reading rooms adjacent to Magnet Room, may be separated by hallways
• Secretarial, offices, meeting rooms, patient rooms (ICU, exam, primary care, etc.)
• Adjacent residential areas/spaces
172 5 Acoustic Background and Design Guidelines

• In-house library facilities
5.2 Acoustic Design Guidelines

5.2.1 Magnet Room
Noise generated by the MR system is inherent to the operation of the system. The sound quality
(human perception) within the Magnet Room can be modified by including sound absorbing
materials to make the room sound more subdued and less harsh. The measured sound levels
via a sound level meter will not change. However, the measured sound levels can be reduced
only when the sound level generated by the MR System is reduced.
Sound quality improvements can be achieved by the following:
• Use ceiling tiles with fiberglass panels having a 2 inch (51mm) thickness set into the
standard T-bar grid system.
• Adding fiberglass panels to the side walls covering approximately 20% of the side wall
surface area. The panels should focus on covering the top half of the side walls. Panels
could take many different and decorative shapes to improve the sterile look of the rooms.
Typically panels might be on the order of 4 ft x 6 ft (1.2 m x 1.8 m) with a thickness of 4
inches (102 mm) or equivalent. Panels shape could vary to produce mosaic effects to meet
the customer preference. Any decorative materials used to cover the wall panels must be
porous so that sound waves can pass through with ease. In principle, a person should be
able to breath through the material with ease. Fire retardant cloth should be used. The NRC
(Noise Reduction Coefficient) of the panels should be 0.95 or better when mounted against
a hard surface such as drywall or concrete.
5.2.2 Inter-Spacial Areas
Acoustic Noise Control to mitigate noise from being transmitted to other spaces often amounts
to paying attention to small details while working with ordinary construction materials. The key
objectives are to eliminate all cracks and gaps in the wall construction while making sure that
the doors, walls, floor, and ceiling have adequate transmission loss via mass or special double
wall construction along with good fitting massive doors.
The entire Magnet must be surrounded by walls with substantial mass and/or double wall
construction so that noise is contained in the room and not allowed to pass through into nearby
spaces. Wall junctions must be sealed with acoustical sealant so that noise waves to do not
escape from the room. In principle, if the room were filled with smoke and under a positive
pressure, no smoke would leak from the room.
5.2.2.1 Wall Construction
Wall Construction will entail ordinary building materials in a careful configuration.
• The preferred wall would have an ASTM Sound Transmission Coefficient (STC) 50
construction which entails the use of standard wall construction of steel studs (typically 3-5/8
inch (92 mm)) with 2 layers of Type X drywall (typically 5/8 (16 mm)) on each side totaling 4
layers and fiberglass batt in the stud cavity. All drywall must be overlapped by 6 inches (152
mm) or more. Beads of (USG) Acoustical Caulking (non-hardening) would be used around
the entire perimeter of the drywall. Any form of wall penetration should be avoided. Any
necessary wall penetrations must be sealed using combination of Acoustical Caulking (non-

hardening) and fiberglass batt material. See examples of wall construction shown in
Illustration 7-9 and Illustration 7-10.
• The top of the wall must join the ceiling/floor above so that no cracks or gaps occur. If metal
pan is used on the ceiling/floor (above), then flute seals would be used to seal the gaps
between the drywall and the pan. Alternately drywall can be cut out to fit into the flutes.
Acoustical caulking (non-hardening) will be used to seal the remaining cracks and gaps.
Illustration 7-9: Example Of Wall Construction For Airborne Noise Control - Option 1

Illustration 7-10: Example Of Wall Construction For Airborne Noise Control - Option 2
5.2.2.2 High Bay RF Room

A high bay RF Room is a self contained RF Room which has open air space between the RF
Room ceiling and the building floor above. The air space is an acoustic transmission path.
Acoustic energy must be reduced to minimize this transmission of energy through this path.
In cases where the Magnet is to be installed in a high bay, it may be most effective to enclose
the RF Room with its own drywall and steel stud room. The key difference being a ceiling
assembly that mimics the sidewall construction to contain noise.
• Normal high STC stud walls from above would be used to support a ceiling assembly
constructed of structural C channel with two layers of drywall on each side (total of 4 layers)
with fiberglass batt in the cavity.
• Penetrations should be avoided via the use of surface mounted lights. HVAC and ducts
passing through the ceiling, party wall or side walls would require acoustic noise attenuation
in the form of inline silencers. Gaps and cracks would be sealed between the ceiling, party
wall or vertical side walls and the cryogen vent plumbing. In essence the Magnet would be
enclosed in a drywall "doghouse".
5.2.2.3 Miscellaneous Plumbing, RF Windows and RF Doors
Other construction details are equally important to mitigate noise transmission to meet the
intended goal.
• Pipes (gas or water) and electrical conduit or Magnet Room signal cables must be sealed
where they penetrate the walls or ceiling. A heavy mastic material such as Duxseal™ is
appropriate.

• RF windows should be purchased as window/frame units with an STC rating obtained from
laboratory testing per ASTM standards. STC 50 to 60 windows are needed. The installation
must include proper sealing to avoid sound leaks.
• RF doors should be selected to provide an STC 50 to 60 to quell the noise. Contact RF

Shield Room supplier for selection of RF doors that meet the local acoustic codes and site
acoustic requirements. RF door seals must be selected to prevent small gaps around the
door perimeter and at the door threshold. RF door seals would either require periodic
replacement or a door seal that would last the life of the Magnet Room.

6 Sample Calculation AC Power Equipment Minimum Distance

This is a sample calculation to determine minimum distance from a feeder, transformer, or other
AC electrical source, using the Formula found in Chapter 2, MR Suite Magnetic Field
Specifications Electrical Current subsection to determine minimum distance from a feeder,
transformer, or other AC electrical source.
I (amps) = 8.55X2 (meters) ÷ S (meters)
Note that the formula has 3 variables, if you have 2 of them, you can calculate the 3rd. In this
example, we calculate the minimum distance X from the source, in this case a main electrical
feeder carrying 450 amps of current in a 5 inch conduit.
Rearranging:
where:
x Minimum distance (in meters) from the feeder lines to isocenter of the magnet
l Maximum allowable RMS single phase current (in amps) or maximum allowable RMS line current (in amps)
in three phase feeder lines
S Separation (in meters) between single phase conductors or greatest separation between three phase con‐
ductors
Note that the separation “S" is the spacing between the conductors and when all 3 conductors
are run in a single conduit, “S" is simply the diameter of the conduit.
S = 5 inches = 0.127 meters
1 Magnet
The conduit should be 2.6 meters or 8.5 feet from the magnet isocenter.

In other situations, the spacing “S" may be the spacing between HV feeders, the distance
between transformer lugs, or the spacing between conduits when the phase conductors are run
in separate conduits.
What if it is too close? Keep in mind that if this is an existing condition, you should request an
EMI study to quantify the magnitude and direction of the AC disturbances. The calculation is
worst case and does not take into account the vector direction of the AC interference. The
magnet is only sensitive to AC disturbances that are directed horizontally (magnet z-axis). Also
the calculation does not account for any magnetic shielding effect of steel conduit.
178 6 Sample Calculation AC Power Equipment Minimum

Distance
7 Selecting Magnet Anchor Size

The following is an example to illustrate the selection of proper anchors to install a Magnet in a
building with 2000 psi (13.8 MPa) concrete. For this example the area is not under seismic
requirements.
1. Determine magnet clamping force (for the Magnet: 2500 lbs + 200 lbs = 2700 lbs or 11,100
N + 900 N = 12,000 N).
2. Refer to the examples of anchor vendor catalogs below to select anchor diameter and
embedment which meets the clamping force (tension) determined in Step 1.
Diameter : Min. 0.625 inch Max. 1.25 inch
For 8 inch embedment select 3/4 inch diameter
For 4.5 inch embedment select 1 inch diameter
or
Diameter : Min. M16 Max. M32
For 130 mm embedment select M20 diameter
For 114 mm embedment select M24 diameter
3. The vendor instructions and torque to the maximum recommended level for the anchor
selected in Step 2 must be provided to the RF Shield Room vendor for proper installation of
the anchor and equipment.
Table 7-4: Allowable Anchor Loads in Concrete (English Units)
Anchor 2000 psi (13.8 MPa) 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) 6000 psi (41.4 MPa)
Embedment
Diameter
Depth Tension Shear Tension Shear Tension Shear Tension Shear
inches (mm)
in. (mm) lb (kN) lb (kN) lb (kN) lb (kN) lb (kN) lb (kN) lb (kN) lb (kN)
See note below
2 3/4 1250 2800 1600 3070 1810 3300 1920 3330

(70) (5.6) (12.5) (7.1) (13.7) (8.1) (14.8) (8.5) (12.5)
5/8 4 1870 3330 2400 3330 2930 3330 3200 3330

(15.9) (102) (8.3) (14.8) (10.7) (14.8) (13.0) (14.8) (14.2) (12.5)
7 2500 3330 3010 3330 3650 3330 3650 3330

(178) (11.2) (14.8) (13.4) (14.8) (16.2) (14.8) (16.2) (12.5)
3 1/4 1550 2880 1950 3310 2350 3730 2610 4800

(83) (6.9) (12.8) (8.7) (14.7) (10.5) (16.6) (11.6) (21.4)
3/4 4 3/4 2510 4510 3250 4650 3870 4800 4670 4800
(19.1) (121) (11.2) (20.1) (14.5) (20.7) (17.2) (21.4) (20.8) (21.4)
8 2930 4800 3870 4800 4530 4800 5120 4800

(203) (13.0) (21.4) (17.2) (21.4) (20.2) (21.4) (22.8) (21.4)
4 1/2 3120 6080 3870 6770 4610 7470 4800 7470

(114) (13.9) (27.0) (17.2) (30.1) (20.5) (33.2) (21.4) (33.2)
1 6 4400 7470 6400 7470 7200 7470 7330 7470

(25.4) (152) (19.6) (33.2) (28.5) (33.2) (32.0) (33.2) (32.6) (33.2)
9 5600 7470 8000 7470 9390 7470 9390 7470

(229) (24.9) (33.2) (35.59) (33.2) (41.77) (33.2) (41.8) (33.2)
Note: All shaded values fail to meet the clamping force (tension), and are therefore not acceptable anchors.

Table 7-5: Allowable Anchor Loads in Concrete (Metric Units)
Anchor Embedment 13.8 MPa (2000 psi) 20.7 MPa (3000 psi) 27.6 MPa (4000 psi) 41.4 MPa (6000 psi)
Diameter Depth Tension Shear Tension Shear Tension Shear Tension Shear
See note below mm (in.) kN (lb) kN (lb) kN (lb) kN (lb) kN (lb) kN (lb) kN (lb) kN (lb)
105 11.2 25.1 20.9 39.9 24.2 10125 6900 10550

M16
(4 1/8) (2500) (5650) (4705) (8965) (5450) (45.0) (30.7) (46.9)
130 25.1 52.9 30.7 58.7 36.4 14490 10005 14490

M20
(5 1/8) (5650) (11900) (6910) (13195) (8175) (64.5) (44.5) (64.5)
155 30.0 61.2 36.9 70.5 43.9 29.8 57.7 95.6

M24
(6 1/8) (6735) (13760) (8300) (15855) (9860) (17950) (12980) (21490)
Note: All shaded values fail to meet the clamping force (tension), and are therefore not acceptable anchors.
180 7 Selecting Magnet Anchor Size

8 Magnet Cryogenic Venting Pressure Drop Reference Tables

Use the following tables to calculate the cryogenic vent pressure drop through the pipe used.
Table 7-6: 3.0T Magnet Cryogenic Vent System Pressure Drop Matrix
Inside Distance of vent sys‐ Pressure drop Std sweep 45° Long sweep Std sweep 90° Long sweep 90° 90° miter bend
dia. of tem component from for straight pipe elbow 45° elbow elbow elbow
pipe magnet
(D)
ft m psi/ft kPa/m psi kPa psi kPa psi kPa psi kPa psi kPa
8 in. 0- 10 0.00 -3.05 0.14 3.22 1.12 7.70 0.74 5.13 2.09 14.43 1.40 9.62 4.19 28.86
(200
mm) 10- 20 3.05 -6.10 0.24 5.49 1.83 12.63 1.22 8.42 3.43 23.67 2.29 15.78 6.87 47.34
20- 30 6.10 -9.15 0.36 8.23 2.49 17.20 1.66 11.45 4.67 32.21 3.11 21.48 9.34 64.43
30- 40 9.15 -12.2 0.47 10.65 3.11 21.42 2.07 14.26 5.82 40.11 3.88 26.74 11.64 80.23
40- 50 12.20 0.57 12.80 3.67 25.32 2.45 16.86 6.88 47.42 4.58 31.61 13.75 94.84
-15.25
50- 60 15.25 0.65 14.68 4.20 28.93 2.79 19.26 7.86 54.17 5.24 36.11 15.71 108.33
-18.30
60-80 18.29-24.39 0.77 17.44 5.13 35.35 3.41 23.53 9.60 66.16 6.40 44.11 19.19 132.33
80-100 24.39-30.49 0.88 19.90 5.92 40.83 3.94 27.17 11.08 76.40 7.39 50.94 -- --
100-120 30.49-36.58 0.98 22.14 6.60 45.51 4.39 30.27 12.35 85.14 8.23 56.76 -- --
120-140 36.58-42.67 1.04 23.40 7.18 49.50 4.77 32.92 13.43 92.60 8.95 61.73 -- --
140-160 42.67-48.77 1.08 24.32 7.57 52.23 5.04 34.73 14.17 97.69 9.45 65.12 -- --
160-180 48.77-54.87 1.11 25.00 8.01 55.23 5.33 36.73 14.98 103.30 9.99 98.87 -- --
180-200 54.87-60.96 1.12 25.42 8.38 57.80 5.57 38.43 15.68 108.09 10.45 72.06 -- --
10 in. 0- 20 0.00 - 6.10 0.06 1.280 0.62 4.29 0.41 2.86 1.17 8.04 0.78 5.36 2.33 16.07
(250
mm) 20- 40 6.10 -12.22 0.12 2.725 1.05 7.25 0.70 4.83 1.97 13.58 1.31 9.05 3.94 27.16
40- 60 12.22 0.17 3.904 1.43 9.86 0.95 6.56 2.67 18.44 1.78 12.29 5.35 36.88
-18.29
60- 80 18.29 0.21 4.859 1.76 12.14 1.17 8.07 3.29 22.70 2.19 15.13 6.58 45.40
-24.39
80- 100 24.39 0.25 5.626 2.05 14.14 1.36 9.40 3.83 26.43 2.56 17.62 7.67 52.86
-30.49
100-120 30.49-36.58 0.28 6.370 2.30 15.89 1.53 10.56 4.31 29.70 2.87 19.80 8.61 59.80
120-140 36.58-42.67 0.30 6.822 2.53 17.43 1.68 11.58 4.72 32.56 3.15 21.71 9.44 65.12
140-160 42.67-48.77 0.32 7.172 2.68 18.45 1.78 12.25 5.00 34.46 3.33 22.97 10.00 68.92
160-180 48.77-54.87 0.33 7.451 2.85 19.66 1.89 13.06 5.33 36.73 3.55 24.49 10.65 73.46
180-200 54.87-60.96 0.34 7.656 3.01 20.73 2.00 13.77 5.62 38.72 3.74 25.81 11.23 77.44
12 in. 0- 20 0.00 - 6.10 0.020 0.441 0.26 1.78 0.17 1.19 0.48 3.34 0.32 2.22 0.97 6.67
(300
mm) 20- 40 6.10 -12.22 0.041 0.937 0.43 3.00 0.29 1.99 0.81 5.61 0.54 3.74 1.63 11.22
40- 60 12.22 0.060 1.353 0.59 4.08 0.39 2.72 1.11 7.64 0.74 5.09 2.22 15.27
-18.29
60- 80 18.29 0.075 1.702 0.73 5.06 0.49 3.36 1.37 9.45 0.91 6.30 2.74 18.89
-24.39

pipe magnet
(D)
80- 100 24.39 0.088 1.991 0.86 5.92 0.57 3.93 1.60 11.06 1.07 7.37 3.21 22.12
-30.49
100-120 30.49-36.58 0.10 2.283 0.97 6.70 0.64 4.44 1.81 12.50 1.21 8.33 3.63 25.00
120-140 36.58-42.67 0.11 2.469 1.07 7.39 0.71 4.90 2.00 13.78 1.33 9.19 4.00 27.57
140-160 42.67-48.77 0.12 2.617 1.14 7.83 0.75 5.19 2.12 14.60 1.41 9.74 4.24 29.21
160-180 48.77-54.87 0.12 2.741 1.22 8.40 0.81 5.57 2.27 15.66 1.51 10.44 4.54 31.32
180-200 54.87-60.96 0.13 2.840 1.29 8.90 0.86 5.90 2.41 16.60 1.61 11.07 4.82 33.20
14 in. 0- 20 0.00 - 6.10 0.008 0.180 0.123 0.85 0.082 0.57 0.231 1.59 0.154 1.06 0.462 3.18
(350
mm) 20- 40 6.10 -12.22 0.017 0.380 0.206 1.42 0.137 0.95 0.386 2.66 0.257 1.77 0.771 5.32
40- 60 12.22 0.024 0.552 0.281 1.94 0.187 1.29 0.525 3.62 0.350 2.42 1.051 7.25
-18.29
60- 80 18.29 0.031 0.699 0.349 2.41 0.232 1.60 0.652 4.50 0.435 3.00 1.304 8.99
-24.39
80- 100 24.39 0.036 0.824 0.411 2.83 0.272 1.88 0.766 5.28 0.511 3.52 1.533 10.57
-30.49
100-120 30.49-36.58 0.04 0.954 0.47 3.22 0.31 2.13 0.87 6.00 0.58 4.00 1.74 11.99
120-140 36.58-42.67 0.05 1.040 0.52 3.56 0.34 2.36 0.96 6.64 0.64 4.43 1.93 13.28
140-160 42.67-48.77 0.05 1.109 0.55 3.78 0.36 2.50 1.02 7.04 0.68 4.69 2.04 14.07
160-180 48.77-54.87 0.05 1.169 0.59 4.07 0.39 2.70 1.10 7.58 0.73 5.05 2.20 15.16
180-200 54.87-60.96 0.05 1.219 0.63 4.34 0.42 2.87 1.17 8.07 0.78 5.38 2.34 16.14
16 in. 0- 20 0.00 - 6.10 0.004 0.083 0.065 0.45 0.043 0.30 0.122 0.84 0.081 0.56 0.244 1.68
(400
mm) 20- 40 6.10 -12.22 0.008 0.174 0.108 0.75 0.072 0.50 0.202 1.39 0.135 0.93 0.404 2.79
40- 60 12.22- 0.011 0.253 0.148 1.02 0.098 0.68 0.275 1.90 0.184 1.27 0.551 3.80
18.29
60- 80 18.29 0.014 0.323 0.184 1.27 0.122 0.84 0.342 2.36 0.228 1.57 0.685 4.72
-24.39
80- 100 24.39 0.017 0.383 0.217 1.49 0.144 0.99 0.404 2.78 0.269 1.86 0.807 5.57
-30.49
100-120 30.49-36.58 0.020 0.447 0.25 1.70 0.16 1.13 0.46 3.17 0.31 2.11 0.92 6.34
120-140 36.58-42.67 0.022 0.490 0.27 1.89 0.18 1.25 0.51 3.52 0.34 2.35 1.02 7.04
140-160 42.67-48.77 0.023 0.525 0.29 2.00 0.19 1.32 0.54 3.73 0.36 2.48 1.08 7.45
160-180 48.77-54.87 0.025 0.556 0.31 2.17 0.21 1.43 0.58 4.03 0.39 2.69 1.17 8.06
180-200 54.87-60.96 0.026 0.583 0.34 2.32 0.22 1.53 0.62 4.31 0.42 2.87 1.25 8.61
182 8 Magnet Cryogenic Venting Pressure Drop Reference

Tables
pipe magnet
(D)
NOTICE
THIS TABLE MUST BE USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH ALL OTHER REQUIREMENTS FOR CRYOGENIC VENT
SYSTEM DESIGN IN PRE-INSTALLATION DIRECTION.
Notes
1. Elbows with angles greater than 90 deg must not be used
2. Data in Table 2 is based on the following facts and assumptions:
a. Initial flow conditions at magnet interface
b. EM energy (13MJ) is dumped to He during quench and rises He temperature to 10 Kelvin
c. Gas temperature starting at 10 Kelvin and increase with length determined by thermal energy balance
d. 90% He is assumed to be evacuated within 30 sec. None left after quench.
e. Absolute roughness is assumed to be 0.25 mm.
f. R/D = 1.0 for standard sweep elbows, R/D = 1.5 for long sweep elbows where D = inside diameter of pipe; R = radius of bend

184 8 Magnet Cryogenic Venting Pressure Drop Reference

Tables
© 2011-2016 General Electric Company. All Rights Reserved.
General Electric Company
3200 N. Grandview Boulevard
Waukesha, Wisconsin 53188
USA * GE, GE Monogram, Architect, and Discovery are trademarks of General Electric Company.
www.gehealthcare.com

HEAT EXCHANGER Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

HEAT EXCHANGER Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HEAT EXCHANGER

Article I. FOR YOUR SAFETY ................................................................................................................ 3

1. Signs and Symbols:

Any work on the heat exchanger may only be performed by qualified

The eletro-technical connection of the heat exchanger must be

Before attempting to carry out any work on the heat exchanger,

Any national regulations applicable in the country of installation

The fluid must comply with KOOLANT KOOLERS specifications.

When handing refrigerants it is imperative that the relevant

Section 3.01 Introduction:

Section 3.03 Starting the System:

Section 3.04 Enabling Devices:

The pump and compressors can be individually enabled using the

Section 3.06 Viewing Alarms:

Section 3.07 Sequence of Operation:

Heat Exchanger Main Parts

Heat Exchanger Overview 1

Dimplex Thermal Solutions recommends that an inhibited ethylene glycol or inhibited

The following maintenance procedures should be completed every 4 – 6 months:

Section 6.01 Condenser: Cleaning Air Filters and Condenser

Section 6.02 Electric Motors

Section 6.03 Check Water Quality / Test Glycol Mixture

Section 6.04 Inspect and Clean Fluid Strainer

Section 6.05 Inspect Fluid System for Leaks or Loose Connection

Pump/fan contactor power term. 22 lb-in 22 lb-in

Section 6.07 Inspect and Test Refrigeration System for Leaks

Model Number: WO2-2-5000 WO2-2-7500

will automatically drop pressure to reduce flow 70

to 35 gpm. Bypass relief valve is adjusted to 60

maintain 70 to 80 psi maximum pressure to 50

prevent pump damage due to deadheading. 40

Bypass relief valve should only be adjusted to a 30

higher pressure if the MRI is located above the 20

Heat Exchanger. Increase valve setting by the 10

head above the Heat Exchanger. 0

Pump is rotating but no pressure is established. 1. Improper rotation

Compressor hums but will not start. 1. Low line voltage

The unit short cycles. 1. Low refrigerant charge

Temperature controller is indicating a fault: See Below:

High refrigerant pressure fault 1. Dirty air filters

Low refrigerant pressure fault 1. Extreme low ambient temperature

Fluid flow fault 1. Pump not running

Pump Overload fault 1. Overload setting incorrect

Phase Monitor fault 1. Incorrect line phasing

Low Tank Level fault 1. Low/no fluid in Heat Exchanger reservoir

Koolant Koolers Model #: WO2-2-500 Koolant Koolers Model #: WO2-2-7500

"SUVA" is a registered trademark of DuPont.

Corporate MSDS Number : DU005999

Tradenames and Synonyms

Material CAS Number %

Inhalation of high concentrations of vapor is harmful and

(HAZARDS IDENTIFICATION - Continued)

HUMAN HEALTH EFFECTS:

Overexposure to the vapors by inhalation may include

Individuals with preexisting diseases of the central nervous

None of the components present in this material at concentrations

If inhaled, immediately remove to fresh air. Keep person calm.

Flush area with lukewarm water. Do not use hot water. If

In case of contact, immediately flush eyes with plenty of water

Not a probable route. However, in case of accidental ingestion,

THIS MATERIAL MAY MAKE THE HEART MORE SUSCEPTIBLE TO

Flash Point : No flash point

Flammable Limits in Air, % by Volume:

&6%1+$ &65 $

&6%1+$ ሪ $